Download Commissioning and Configuration GPON...
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module V800R007C00
Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Issue
01
Date
2009-12-01
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:
Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
[email protected]
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
Contents About This Document.....................................................................................................................1 1 Commissioning...........................................................................................................................1-1 1.1 Commissioning Introduction...........................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.1 Commissioning Definition.....................................................................................................................1-2 1.1.2 Commissioning Procedure.....................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Commissioning Preparations...........................................................................................................................1-3 1.2.1 Checking Hardware................................................................................................................................1-3 1.2.2 Preparing Software.................................................................................................................................1-4 1.2.3 Preparing Tools......................................................................................................................................1-5 1.2.4 Planning Data.........................................................................................................................................1-6 1.3 Stand-Alone Commissioning..........................................................................................................................1-7 1.3.1 Checking the Settings of DIP Switches..................................................................................................1-8 1.3.1.1 Checking the Settings of DIP Switches on the ESC Board.................................................................1-9 1.3.1.2 Checking the Settings of DIP Switches on the Fan Monitoring Board.............................................1-12 1.3.2 Powering On the Indoor Device...........................................................................................................1-17 1.3.3 Commissioning the Power Supply System..........................................................................................1-18 1.3.3.1 Checking the Power Supply of the DC PDU....................................................................................1-18 1.3.3.2 Checking the Power Supply of the Power Board..............................................................................1-18 1.3.4 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal...............................................................................................1-19 1.3.4.1 Starting the Maintenance Terminal...................................................................................................1-19 1.3.4.2 Configuring the IP Address of the Maintenance Terminal...............................................................1-20 1.3.5 Logging In to the System.....................................................................................................................1-22 1.3.5.1 Login Through the Local Serial Port.................................................................................................1-23 1.3.5.2 Login Through Telnet (Outband Management)................................................................................1-28 1.3.5.3 Login Through Telnet (Inband Management)...................................................................................1-32 1.3.5.4 Login Through SSH (Outband Management)...................................................................................1-36 1.3.5.5 Login Through SSH (Inband Management)......................................................................................1-48 1.3.6 Checking the Software Version............................................................................................................1-59 1.3.7 Loading the Script................................................................................................................................1-59 1.3.8 Configuring a Board.............................................................................................................................1-60 1.3.8.1 Adding a Board Offline.....................................................................................................................1-60 1.3.8.2 Confirming a Board...........................................................................................................................1-61 1.3.8.3 Checking the Board Status................................................................................................................1-62 Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
Contents
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide 1.3.9 Configuring the System Energy-Saving Function...............................................................................1-63 1.3.10 Checking the Status of the Upstream Port.........................................................................................1-64 1.3.11 Checking the Status of the Service Port.............................................................................................1-64 1.3.12 Testing the Optical Power of an Optical Port....................................................................................1-65 1.3.12.1 Testing the Mean Launched Power of a One-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port............................1-65 1.3.12.2 Testing the Mean Launched Power of a Two-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port...........................1-69 1.3.12.3 Testing the Actual Input Power of a One-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port..................................1-72 1.3.12.4 Testing the Actual Input Power of a Two-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port.................................1-77 1.3.13 Changing the System Name...............................................................................................................1-81 1.3.14 Configuring a System User................................................................................................................1-81 1.3.14.1 Adding a System User.....................................................................................................................1-81 1.3.14.2 Modifying the System User Attributes............................................................................................1-83 1.3.15 Configuring the System Time............................................................................................................1-86 1.3.16 Commissioning the EMU...................................................................................................................1-87 1.3.16.1 Commissioning the EMU_ESC......................................................................................................1-87 1.3.16.2 Commissioning the EMU_FAN......................................................................................................1-90 1.3.17 Checking the Configuration of the Auto-Save Function....................................................................1-92 1.3.18 Saving the Data..................................................................................................................................1-94 1.3.19 Backing Up System Files...................................................................................................................1-95
1.4 Interconnection Commissioning...................................................................................................................1-96 1.4.1 Commissioning the Interconnection with the NMS.............................................................................1-96 1.4.1.1 Commissioning Outband Network Management (SNMP V1&V2).................................................1-97 1.4.1.2 Commissioning Outband Management (SNMP V3)......................................................................1-103 1.4.1.3 Commissioning Inband Management (SNMP V1&V2).................................................................1-108 1.4.1.4 Commissioning Inband Network Management (SNMP V3)..........................................................1-115 1.4.2 Commissioning the Interconnection with the BRAS.........................................................................1-121 1.4.3 Commissioning the Interconnection with the Router.........................................................................1-122 1.4.4 Commissioning the Management Channel Between the OLT and the GPON MDU........................1-124 1.4.5 Commissioning the Management Channel Between the OLT and the GPON ONT.........................1-128 1.5 Maintenance and Management Commissioning.........................................................................................1-132 1.5.1 Checking the System Switchover.......................................................................................................1-132 1.5.2 Checking Alarms and Events.............................................................................................................1-134 1.5.2.1 Verifying the Alarm and Event Function........................................................................................1-134 1.5.2.2 Querying Alarms and Events..........................................................................................................1-135 1.5.3 Checking the Log...............................................................................................................................1-138
2 Basic Configurations................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 Configuring the License Function...................................................................................................................2-3 2.2 Configuring Alarms.........................................................................................................................................2-4 2.3 Configuring the System Clock........................................................................................................................2-6 2.4 Configuring the Network Time.......................................................................................................................2-7 2.4.1 (Optional) Configuring NTP Authentication.........................................................................................2-9 2.4.2 Configuring the NTP Broadcast Mode.................................................................................................2-10 ii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
2.4.3 Configuring the NTP Multicast Mode.................................................................................................2-12 2.4.4 Configuring the NTP Client/Server Mode...........................................................................................2-15 2.4.5 Configuring the NTP Peer Mode.........................................................................................................2-16 2.5 Adding Port Description................................................................................................................................2-18 2.6 Configuring the Auto-save Function.............................................................................................................2-19 2.7 Configuring the Attributes of an Upstream Ethernet Port.............................................................................2-21 2.8 Configuring the ANCP..................................................................................................................................2-24 2.9 Configuring DHCP........................................................................................................................................2-26 2.9.1 Configuring the Standard DHCP Mode...............................................................................................2-27 2.9.2 Configuring the DHCP Option60 Mode..............................................................................................2-30 2.9.3 Configuring the DHCP MAC Address Segment Mode.......................................................................2-32 2.10 Configuring a VLAN..................................................................................................................................2-35 2.11 Configuring System Security......................................................................................................................2-41 2.11.1 Configuring Firewall..........................................................................................................................2-42 2.11.2 Configuring Anti-Attack....................................................................................................................2-44 2.11.3 Preventing the Access of Illegal Users...............................................................................................2-46 2.12 Configuring the User Security.....................................................................................................................2-48 2.12.1 Configuring Anti-Theft and Roaming of User Account Through PITP............................................2-50 2.12.2 Configuring Anti-Theft and Roaming of User Accounts Through DHCP........................................2-53 2.12.3 Configuring the IP Address/MAC Address Binding..........................................................................2-55 2.12.4 Configuring Anti-IP Spoofing and Anti-MAC Spoofing...................................................................2-56 2.13 Configuring AAA........................................................................................................................................2-58 2.13.1 Configuring the Local AAA...............................................................................................................2-60 2.13.2 Configuring the Remote AAA (RADIUS Protocol)..........................................................................2-62 2.13.3 Configuring the Remote AAA (HWTACACS Protocol)...................................................................2-65 2.13.4 Configuration Example of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting.........................................2-69 2.13.5 Configuration Example of the HWTACACS Authentication (802.1X access user).........................2-72 2.13.6 Configuration Example of the HWTACACS Authentication (administrator)...................................2-76 2.14 Configuring the ACL..................................................................................................................................2-79 2.14.1 Configuring a Basic ACL...................................................................................................................2-81 2.14.2 Configuring an Advanced ACL.........................................................................................................2-82 2.14.3 Configuring a Link Layer ACL..........................................................................................................2-83 2.14.4 Configuring a User-defined ACL.......................................................................................................2-84 2.15 Configuring QoS.........................................................................................................................................2-87 2.15.1 Configuring Traffic Management......................................................................................................2-88 2.15.1.1 Configuring Traffic Management Based on Service Port...............................................................2-89 2.15.1.2 Configuring Traffic Management Based on Port+CoS...................................................................2-92 2.15.1.3 Configuring Traffic Management Based on Port+VLAN...............................................................2-93 2.15.1.4 Configuring Rate Limitation on an Ethernet Port...........................................................................2-94 2.15.1.5 Configuring Traffic Suppression.....................................................................................................2-94 2.15.2 Configuring the Queue Scheduling....................................................................................................2-96 2.15.2.1 Configuring the Queue Scheduling Mode.......................................................................................2-96 Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Contents
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide 2.15.2.2 Configuring the Mapping Between the Queue and the 802.1p Priority..........................................2-98 2.15.2.3 Configuring the Queue Depth.........................................................................................................2-99 2.15.3 Configuring Early Drop...................................................................................................................2-101 2.15.3.1 Configuring Priority-based Early Drop.........................................................................................2-101 2.15.3.2 Configuring Color-based Early Drop............................................................................................2-102 2.15.4 Configuring HQoS...........................................................................................................................2-103 2.15.5 Configuring Traffic Management Based on ACL Rules..................................................................2-103 2.15.5.1 Controlling the Traffic Matching an ACL Rule............................................................................2-104 2.15.5.2 Adding a Priority Tag to the Traffic Matching an ACL Rule.......................................................2-105 2.15.5.3 Enabling the Statistics Collection of the Traffic Matching an ACL Rule.....................................2-105 2.15.5.4 Enabling the Mirroring of the Traffic Matching an ACL Rule.....................................................2-106 2.15.5.5 Enabling the Redirection of the Traffic Matching an ACL Rule..................................................2-107
2.16 Configuring xPON Profiles.......................................................................................................................2-108 2.16.1 Adding a DBA Profile......................................................................................................................2-108 2.16.2 Configuring a GPON ONT Profile...................................................................................................2-109 2.16.2.1 Configuring a GPON ONT Line Profile.......................................................................................2-110 2.16.2.2 Configuring a GPON ONT Service Profile...................................................................................2-112 2.16.2.3 Configuring a GPON ONT Alarm Profile....................................................................................2-116
3 Protocol Configuration..............................................................................................................3-1 3.1 Configuring ARP Proxy..................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Configuring the BFD.......................................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.1 Configuration Example of the BFD Link Detection (Static Route).......................................................3-5 3.2.2 Configuration Example of the BFD Link Detection (Dynamic Route)................................................. 3-8 3.3 Configuring the Route...................................................................................................................................3-10 3.3.1 Configuration Example of the Routing Policy.....................................................................................3-11 3.3.2 Configuration Example of the Static Route.........................................................................................3-13 3.3.3 Configuration Example of RIP.............................................................................................................3-15 3.3.4 Configuration Example of OSPF.........................................................................................................3-18 3.3.5 Configuration Example of IS-IS..........................................................................................................3-21 3.3.6 Configuration Example of BGP...........................................................................................................3-24 3.4 Configuration Example of a VRF Instance...................................................................................................3-28 3.5 Configuring the MSTP..................................................................................................................................3-32 3.6 Configuration Example of Ethernet OAM....................................................................................................3-35 3.7 Configuring the MPLS Access......................................................................................................................3-38 3.7.1 Configuring the MPLS LDP................................................................................................................3-38 3.7.1.1 Configuring the Basic MPLS Functions...........................................................................................3-39 3.7.1.2 Configuring the Static LSP...............................................................................................................3-40 3.7.1.3 Configuring the LDP LSP.................................................................................................................3-41 3.7.2 Configuring the MPLS VPN................................................................................................................3-42 3.7.2.1 Configuring ETH PWE3...................................................................................................................3-42 3.7.2.2 Configuring TDM PWE3..................................................................................................................3-44 3.7.2.3 Configuration Example of MPLS - Based on Binding the VLAN with the PW Template..............3-45 iv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
3.7.2.4 Configuration Example of the PW Redundancy Protection..............................................................3-47 3.7.3 Configuring the MPLS RSVP-TE........................................................................................................3-51 3.7.3.1 Configuration Example of Establishing an MPLS TE Tunnel by Using RSVP-TE.........................3-51 3.7.3.2 Configuration Example of MPLS TE FRR.......................................................................................3-54 3.7.3.3 Configuring a Static MPLS TE Tunnel.............................................................................................3-57 3.7.3.4 Configuring a Dynamic MPLS TE Tunnel.......................................................................................3-60 3.7.4 Configuring the MPLS OAM...............................................................................................................3-62 3.7.4.1 Configuration Example for Detection of MPLS OAM for Static LSP Connectivity........................3-63 3.7.4.2 Configuration Example of the MPLS OAM Protection Switching Function...................................3-66 3.7.4.3 Configuring the Basic MPLS Detection Functions...........................................................................3-70 3.7.4.4 Configuring the MPLS OAM Protection Switchover Function........................................................3-72
4 Configuring the GPON Internet Access Service..................................................................4-1 4.1 Configuring a VLAN......................................................................................................................................4-5 4.2 Configuring an Upstream Port......................................................................................................................4-10 4.3 Configuring a GPON ONT...........................................................................................................................4-11 4.4 Configuring a GPON Port.............................................................................................................................4-13 4.5 Creating a GPON Service Port......................................................................................................................4-15
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)........................................................................... 5-1 5.1 Configuring Multicast Global Parameters.......................................................................................................5-5 5.2 Configuring the Multicast VLAN and the Multicast Program........................................................................5-7 5.3 Configuring the Multicast GPON ONT........................................................................................................5-11 5.4 Configuring a Multicast User........................................................................................................................5-13 5.5 (Optional) Configuring the Multicast Bandwidth.........................................................................................5-15 5.6 (Optional) Configuring Multicast Preview...................................................................................................5-16 5.7 (Optional) Configuring Program Prejoin......................................................................................................5-18 5.8 (Optional) Configuring the Multicast Logging Function..............................................................................5-19
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup..........................................................................................6-1 6.1 Configuring the Uplink Redundancy Backup.................................................................................................6-3 6.2 Configuring the Smart Link Redundancy Backup..........................................................................................6-5 6.3 Configuring the MPLS Service Board Redundancy Backup..........................................................................6-7 6.4 Configuring the GPON Port Redundancy Backup..........................................................................................6-8 6.5 Configuring Type B Dual Homing Protection Switching.............................................................................6-10 6.6 Configuring the Switchover of the Protect Group........................................................................................6-12
7 Configuring the DSLAM Subtending...................................................................................7-1 7.1 Configuring the NE Subtending Through the FE or GE Port.........................................................................7-2
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide......................................................................................8-1 8.1 Configuration Example of the FTTx Service (GPON Access).......................................................................8-2 8.1.1 FTTx Network........................................................................................................................................8-2 8.1.2 FTTx Data Plan (GPON Access)...........................................................................................................8-3 8.1.3 Configuring the FTTH Service............................................................................................................8-11 Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
Contents
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide 8.1.3.1 Configuring the FTTH Internet Access Service................................................................................8-12 8.1.3.2 Configuration Example of the FTTH VoIP Service (H.248-based)..................................................8-18 8.1.3.3 Configuration Example of the FTTH VoIP Service (SIP-based)......................................................8-24 8.1.3.4 Configuring the FTTH IPTV Service................................................................................................8-30 8.1.4 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Access Services.............................................................................8-35 8.1.4.1 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Internet Access Services (LAN Access).....................................8-37 8.1.4.2 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Internet Access Services (ADSL2+ Access)..............................8-42 8.1.4.3 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Internet Access Services (VDSL2 Access)................................8-52 8.1.4.4 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC VoIP Services (Based on the H.248 Protocol)...........................8-62 8.1.4.5 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC VoIP Services (Based on the SIP Protocol)...............................8-69 8.1.4.6 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC IPTV Services.............................................................................8-76 8.1.5 Configuring the FTTO (OLT+ATN930) Service.................................................................................8-82 8.1.5.1 Configuring the TDM PBX Access Service.....................................................................................8-83 8.1.5.2 Configuring the IP PBX Access Service...........................................................................................8-84 8.1.5.3 Configuring the Enterprise Router Access Service...........................................................................8-85 8.1.6 Configuring the FTTM (OLT+ATN930) Service................................................................................8-91 8.1.6.1 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service Between the CBU and the OLT...................8-92 8.1.6.2 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (MPLS-based)........................8-103 8.1.6.3 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (IP-based)...............................8-115 8.1.6.4 Configuring the ATM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (MPLS-based)........................8-125 8.1.6.5 Configuring the ATM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (IP-based)...............................8-136 8.1.6.6 Configuring the ETH PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU..................................................8-145
8.2 Configuring the P2P Optical Fiber Access Service....................................................................................8-155 8.2.1 Configuring the FTTH P2P Optical Fiber Access Service (Single-Port for Single Service).............8-156 8.2.2 Configuring the FTTH P2P Optical Fiber Access Service (Single-Port for Multiple Services)........8-157
9 Script Making.............................................................................................................................9-1 10 Configuring the File Transfer Mode..................................................................................10-1 10.1 Configuring the FTP Transfer Mode...........................................................................................................10-2 10.2 Configuring the SFTP Transfer Mode........................................................................................................10-3 10.3 Configuring the Xmodem Transfer Mode...................................................................................................10-4 10.4 Configuring the TFTP Transfer Mode........................................................................................................10-6
11 Software Package Settings....................................................................................................11-1 11.1 Default settings of the DBA profile............................................................................................................11-2 11.2 Default settings of the GPON ONT line profile..........................................................................................11-4 11.3 Default settings of the GPON ONT service profile....................................................................................11-4 11.4 Default settings of the GPON ONT alarm profile.......................................................................................11-5 11.5 Default settings of the environment monitoring units.................................................................................11-7
12 FAQ...........................................................................................................................................12-1 12.1 How to query the MAC addresses of the online users and the ports that provide the access for the users in the MA5600T?..........................................................................................................................................................12-3
vi
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Contents
12.2 How to determine whether the users configured on the MA5600T can get online in the normal state by running the commands?....................................................................................................................................................12-3 12.3 What are the prerequisites for the link and protocol status of the L3 interface of the MA5600T to be up? .............................................................................................................................................................................12-3 12.4 How to shield the alarms of the user port activation/deactivation?............................................................12-4 12.5 What are the frequently asked questions (FAQs) about the system security of the MA5600T?................12-4 12.6 How to Change the Management IP Address and VLAN Remotely..........................................................12-5 12.7 How to Change the Management VLAN....................................................................................................12-6 12.8 How to Change the Management IP address..............................................................................................12-6 12.9 How to Handle the System Prompt "too many users" When a User Telnets to the Device .......................12-7 12.10 How to Change the Rate of the User Port in a PON System....................................................................12-8 12.11 What Are the Differences Between Firewall and Packet-Filter in Activating an ACL............................12-8 12.12 How to Realize the Communication Between Users on the Same Board.................................................12-9 12.13 What Are Key Aspects and Major Steps for the Active/Standby Switchover........................................12-10 12.14 How to Query the Multicast Bandwidth Parameters of the MA5600T...................................................12-10 12.15 How to Select the Matched Hardware for Expanding the Bandwidth of the Upstream Port..................12-11 12.16 How to Back Up Data.............................................................................................................................12-11 12.17 How to Confirm an Upgraded Board......................................................................................................12-12 12.18 How to Configure the Data of an Upgraded Board.................................................................................12-12
A Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................A-1
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figures
Figures Figure 1-1 Commissioning procedure..................................................................................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Layout of the DIP switches (in default settings) on the H801ESCA board....................................... 1-9 Figure 1-3 Removing the ESC board.................................................................................................................1-11 Figure 1-4 Inserting the ESC board....................................................................................................................1-12 Figure 1-5 Layout of the DIP switches (in default settings) of the ESTI fan tray.............................................1-13 Figure 1-6 Layout of the DIP switches (in default settings) of the 19-inch fan tray..........................................1-13 Figure 1-7 Removing/Inserting the fan tray.......................................................................................................1-17 Figure 1-8 Configure the local area connection properties................................................................................1-21 Figure 1-9 Configure the IP address and the subnet mask.................................................................................1-22 Figure 1-10 Logging in to the MA5600T through the local serial port..............................................................1-23 Figure 1-11 Flowchart for logging in to the system through the local serial port..............................................1-24 Figure 1-12 Example network for outband management through telnet in a LAN............................................1-29 Figure 1-13 Network example for outband management through telnet in a WAN..........................................1-29 Figure 1-14 Flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through telnet (outband management)........................1-31 Figure 1-15 Running the telnet application........................................................................................................1-32 Figure 1-16 Example network for inband management through telnet in a LAN..............................................1-33 Figure 1-17 Example network for inband management through telnet in a WAN............................................1-33 Figure 1-18 Flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through telnet (inband management)..........................1-35 Figure 1-19 Running the telnet application........................................................................................................1-36 Figure 1-20 Example network for outband management through SSH in a LAN.............................................1-37 Figure 1-21 Example network for outband management through SSH in a WAN............................................1-38 Figure 1-22 Flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through SSH (Outband Management)........................1-40 Figure 1-23 Interface of the key generator.........................................................................................................1-42 Figure 1-24 Interface of the key generator.........................................................................................................1-43 Figure 1-25 Save the public key and the private key.........................................................................................1-44 Figure 1-26 Interface of converting the client public key to the RSA public key..............................................1-45 Figure 1-27 Interface of the SSH client software...............................................................................................1-46 Figure 1-28 Interface for logging in to the system through the SSH client software.........................................1-47 Figure 1-29 Interface for logging in to the system through the SSH client software.........................................1-47 Figure 1-30 Example network for inband management through SSH in a LAN...............................................1-48 Figure 1-31 Example network for inband management through SSH in a WAN..............................................1-49 Figure 1-32 Flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through SSH (Inband Management)...........................1-51 Figure 1-33 Interface of the key generator.........................................................................................................1-54 Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
Figures
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 1-34 Interface of the key generator.........................................................................................................1-55 Figure 1-35 Save the public key and the private key.........................................................................................1-55 Figure 1-36 Interface of converting the client public key to the RSA public key..............................................1-56 Figure 1-37 Interface of the SSH client software...............................................................................................1-57 Figure 1-38 Interface for logging in to the system through the SSH client software.........................................1-58 Figure 1-39 Interface for logging in to the system through the SSH client software.........................................1-58 Figure 1-40 Testing the mean launched power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the OLT side. . .1-66 Figure 1-41 Testing the mean launched power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the ONT side...1-67 Figure 1-42 Testing the mean launched power of the two-fiber bi-directional optical port..............................1-70 Figure 1-43 Testing the actual input power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the OLT side.........1-73 Figure 1-44 Testing the actual input power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the ONT side........1-74 Figure 1-45 Testing the actual input power of the two-fiber bi-directional optical port....................................1-78 Figure 1-46 Example network for the outband network management...............................................................1-97 Figure 1-47 Flowchart for commissioning the outband network management on the device...........................1-98 Figure 1-48 Set the SNMP parameters.............................................................................................................1-100 Figure 1-49 Set the SNMP parameters.............................................................................................................1-101 Figure 1-50 Add device....................................................................................................................................1-101 Figure 1-51 Add device....................................................................................................................................1-102 Figure 1-52 Example network for the outband network management.............................................................1-104 Figure 1-53 Flowchart for commissioning the outband network management on the device.........................1-104 Figure 1-54 Set the SNMP parameters.............................................................................................................1-106 Figure 1-55 Add device....................................................................................................................................1-107 Figure 1-56 Example network for the inband network management...............................................................1-109 Figure 1-57 Flowchart for commissioning the inband network management..................................................1-109 Figure 1-58 Set the SNMP parameters.............................................................................................................1-112 Figure 1-59 Set the SNMP parameters.............................................................................................................1-112 Figure 1-60 Add device....................................................................................................................................1-113 Figure 1-61 Add device....................................................................................................................................1-114 Figure 1-62 Example network for the inband network management...............................................................1-116 Figure 1-63 Flowchart for commissioning the inband network management..................................................1-116 Figure 1-64 Set the SNMP parameters.............................................................................................................1-119 Figure 1-65 Add device....................................................................................................................................1-120 Figure 1-66 Example network for commissioning the interconnection with the BRAS..................................1-121 Figure 1-67 Example network for commissioning the interconnection with the router...................................1-123 Figure 1-68 Example network for commissioning the management channel between the OLT and the GPON MDU ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-125 Figure 1-69 Flowchart for commissioning the management channel between the OLT and the GPON MDU ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-126 Figure 1-70 Example network for commissioning the management channel between the OLT and the GPON ONT ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-129 Figure 1-71 Flowchart for commissioning the management channel between the OLT and the GPON ONT ...........................................................................................................................................................................1-130 Figure 2-1 NTP broadcast mode........................................................................................................................2-10 x
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figures
Figure 2-2 NTP multicast mode.........................................................................................................................2-13 Figure 2-3 NTP client/server mode....................................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-4 NTP peer mode.................................................................................................................................2-17 Figure 2-5 Flowchart for configuring the auto-save function............................................................................2-20 Figure 2-6 Example network of the AAA application.......................................................................................2-59 Figure 2-7 Example network of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting application..............................2-70 Figure 2-8 Example network of the HWTACACS authentication.....................................................................2-73 Figure 2-9 Example network of the HWTACACS authentication.....................................................................2-76 Figure 2-10 First 64 bytes of a data frame.........................................................................................................2-85 Figure 2-11 QinQ packet format........................................................................................................................2-87 Figure 3-1 Example network of the ARP proxy...................................................................................................3-2 Figure 3-2 Flowchart for configuring the ARP proxy..........................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 Example network of the BFD link detection......................................................................................3-6 Figure 3-4 Example network of the BFD link detection......................................................................................3-8 Figure 3-5 Example network for configuring the routing policy.......................................................................3-11 Figure 3-6 Example network for configuring the static route............................................................................3-13 Figure 3-7 Example network for configuring RIP.............................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-8 Example network for configuring OSPF..........................................................................................3-18 Figure 3-9 Example network for configuring IS-IS...........................................................................................3-22 Figure 3-10 Example network for configuring the BGP....................................................................................3-24 Figure 3-11 Example network for configuring the VRF instance......................................................................3-29 Figure 3-12 Example network for configuring Ethernet OAM..........................................................................3-36 Figure 3-13 Example network of the MPLS based on binding the VLAN with the PW template....................3-46 Figure 3-14 Example network for configuring the PW redundancy protection.................................................3-48 Figure 3-15 Example network of establishing an MPLS TE tunnel by using RSVP-TE..................................3-52 Figure 3-16 Example network for configuring MPLS TE FRR.........................................................................3-54 Figure 3-17 Example network for configuring the static MPLS TE tunnel.......................................................3-58 Figure 3-18 Example network for configuring the dynamic MPLS TE tunnel..................................................3-60 Figure 3-19 Example network of detection of MPLS OAM for static LSP connectivity..................................3-63 Figure 3-20 Configuring the MPLS OAM protection switching function.........................................................3-67 Figure 5-1 Scheme of configuring the multicast service under GPON................................................................5-3 Figure 6-1 Example network of the dual uplink protect group between the MA5600T and the BRAS............6-12 Figure 8-1 Example network of full access services in the FTTx scenario..........................................................8-3 Figure 8-2 Example network of the FTTH service............................................................................................8-12 Figure 8-3 ONT parameters...............................................................................................................................8-16 Figure 8-4 Querying the ONT status..................................................................................................................8-17 Figure 8-5 ONT VAS Profile.............................................................................................................................8-22 Figure 8-6 MGC configure.................................................................................................................................8-23 Figure 8-7 WAN port parameters.......................................................................................................................8-28 Figure 8-8 VoIP parameters...............................................................................................................................8-29 Figure 8-9 Port bind...........................................................................................................................................8-29 Figure 8-10 Port status.......................................................................................................................................8-30 Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
Figures
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 8-11 Example network of the multiple service in FTTB and FTTC service..........................................8-36 Figure 8-12 Example network of the TDM PBX access service........................................................................8-84 Figure 8-13 Example network of the IP PBX access service.............................................................................8-85 Figure 8-14 Example network of the enterprise router access service...............................................................8-86 Figure 8-15 Example network of the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service between the CBU and the OLT......8-93 Figure 8-16 Example network of the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (MPLS-based)..........8-104 Figure 8-17 Example network of the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (MPLS-based)..........8-115 Figure 8-18 Example network of the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (MPLS-based)..........8-126 Figure 8-19 Example network of the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (IP-based).................8-136 Figure 8-20 Example network of the ETH PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (MPLS-based)...........8-146 Figure 8-21 Example network of the optical fiber access service in the single-port for single service mode ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-156 Figure 8-22 Example network of the optical fiber access service in the single-port for multiple services mode ...........................................................................................................................................................................8-158 Figure 10-1 TFTP main interface.......................................................................................................................10-7 Figure 10-2 Setting TFTP parameters................................................................................................................10-8
xii
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Tables
Tables Table 1-1 Hardware checklist...............................................................................................................................1-4 Table 1-2 Software checklist................................................................................................................................1-5 Table 1-3 Tool checklist.......................................................................................................................................1-5 Table 1-4 Data checklist.......................................................................................................................................1-6 Table 1-5 Settings of the DIP switches................................................................................................................1-9 Table 1-6 Mapping between S5-1 to S5-4 and sensor ports...............................................................................1-10 Table 1-7 Mapping between S6-1 to S6-5 and sub-node IDs.............................................................................1-10 Table 1-8 Settings of SW2..................................................................................................................................1-13 Table 1-9 Settings of SW2-1 to SW2-3..............................................................................................................1-14 Table 1-10 Settings of SW2-5 and SW2-6.........................................................................................................1-15 Table 1-11 Settings of SW2-7 and SW2-8.........................................................................................................1-15 Table 1-12 Data plan for the outband management through Telnet in a LAN...................................................1-30 Table 1-13 Data plan for the outband management through Telnet in a WAN.................................................1-30 Table 1-14 Data plan for the inband management through Telnet in a LAN.....................................................1-34 Table 1-15 Data plan for the inband management through Telnet in a WAN...................................................1-34 Table 1-16 Data plan for the outband management through SSH in a LAN......................................................1-38 Table 1-17 Data plan for the outband management through SSH in a WAN....................................................1-39 Table 1-18 Data plan for the inband management through SSH in a LAN........................................................1-49 Table 1-19 Data plan for the inband management through SSH in a WAN......................................................1-50 Table 1-20 Specifications of the GPON port (Class B+)...................................................................................1-68 Table 1-21 Specifications of the GPON port (Class C+)...................................................................................1-68 Table 1-22 Specifications of the GPON port (Class B+)...................................................................................1-75 Table 1-23 Specifications of the GPON port (Class C+)...................................................................................1-76 Table 1-24 User attributes..................................................................................................................................1-82 Table 1-25 Modifying the user attributes...........................................................................................................1-84 Table 1-26 Default configuration of the H801ESC board..................................................................................1-88 Table 1-27 Default configuration of the FAN....................................................................................................1-91 Table 1-28 Default configuration of the auto-save function..............................................................................1-93 Table 1-29 Operations for verifying the alarm and event function..................................................................1-134 Table 1-30 Commands for querying history alarms.........................................................................................1-135 Table 1-31 Commands for querying history events.........................................................................................1-136 Table 2-1 Default configuration for NTP.............................................................................................................2-8 Table 2-2 Default settings of the attributes of an Ethernet port.........................................................................2-22 Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
Tables
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide Table 2-3 VLAN application and planning........................................................................................................2-36 Table 2-4 Default parameter settings of VLAN.................................................................................................2-36 Table 2-5 VLAN types and application scenarios..............................................................................................2-37 Table 2-6 VLAN attributes and application scenarios....................................................................................... 2-38 Table 2-7 Default settings of system security.................................................................................................... 2-41 Table 2-8 Default settings of the user security mechanism................................................................................2-49 Table 2-9 Default settings related to PITP......................................................................................................... 2-50 Table 2-10 Default settings related to DHCP option 82.....................................................................................2-54 Table 2-11 Differences between HWTACACS and RADIUS...........................................................................2-60 Table 2-12 ACL types........................................................................................................................................ 2-80 Table 2-13 Description of letters and their offset values....................................................................................2-85 Table 2-14 Traffic parameters defined in the IP traffic profiles.........................................................................2-90 Table 2-15 Mapping between the queue weights and the actual queues............................................................2-97 Table 2-16 Mapping between the queue and the 802.1p priority.......................................................................2-99 Table 2-17 Queue depth allocation...................................................................................................................2-100 Table 2-18 Default settings of the DBA profiles..............................................................................................2-108 Table 2-19 Default settings of the GPON ONT profile....................................................................................2-109 Table 2-20 Default settings of the GPON ONT line profile.............................................................................2-110 Table 2-21 Default settings of the GPON ONT service profile.......................................................................2-112 Table 3-1 Data plan for configuring the ARP proxy............................................................................................3-2 Table 3-2 Data plan for configuring the BFD link detection...............................................................................3-6 Table 3-3 Data plan for configuring the BFD link detection...............................................................................3-9 Table 3-4 Data plan for configuring RIP............................................................................................................3-15 Table 3-5 Data plan for configuring OSPF........................................................................................................ 3-19 Table 3-6 Data plan for configuring IS-IS..........................................................................................................3-22 Table 3-7 Data plan for configuring the BGP.................................................................................................... 3-25 Table 3-8 Data plan for configuring a VRF instance......................................................................................... 3-29 Table 3-9 Data plan for configuring Ethernet OAM..........................................................................................3-36 Table 3-10 Data plan for establishing an MPLS TE tunnel by using RSVP-TE................................................3-52 Table 3-11 Data plan for configuring the static MPLS TE tunnel..................................................................... 3-58 Table 3-12 Data plan for configuring the dynamic MPLS TE tunnel................................................................3-61 Table 3-13 Data plan for detection of MPLS OAM for static LSP connectivity...............................................3-64 Table 3-14 Data plan for the MPLS OAM protection switching.......................................................................3-67 Table 4-1 Data plan for the GPON Internet access service..................................................................................4-2 Table 4-2 VLAN application and planning..........................................................................................................4-5 Table 4-3 Default parameter settings of VLAN...................................................................................................4-6 Table 4-4 VLAN types and application scenarios................................................................................................4-6 Table 4-5 VLAN attributes and application scenarios.........................................................................................4-8 Table 4-6 Default settings of the GPON ONT...................................................................................................4-12 Table 4-7 Default settings of the GPON port.....................................................................................................4-14 Table 4-8 Default settings of a service port........................................................................................................4-15 Table 5-1 Data items planned for the multicast service.......................................................................................5-2
xiv
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Tables
Table 5-2 Default configuration of the multicast service.....................................................................................5-3 Table 5-3 Default settings of the multicast global parameters.............................................................................5-5 Table 5-4 Default settings of the multicast VLAN attributes...............................................................................5-7 Table 5-5 Multicast mode mapping between the GPON boards on the MA5600T and certain MDUs.............5-11 Table 5-6 Default settings of the multicast user attributes.................................................................................5-13 Table 5-7 Default settings of the CAC parameters.............................................................................................5-15 Table 5-8 Default settings of the multicast preview parameters........................................................................5-17 Table 5-9 Default settings of the prejoin parameters..........................................................................................5-19 Table 5-10 Default settings of the multicast logging parameters.......................................................................5-20 Table 8-1 Data plan for the FTTx GPON access..................................................................................................8-4 Table 8-2 Data plan............................................................................................................................................8-13 Table 8-3 ONT parameters.................................................................................................................................8-17 Table 8-4 Data plan............................................................................................................................................8-18 Table 8-5 Data plan............................................................................................................................................8-24 Table 8-6 Data plan............................................................................................................................................8-31 Table 8-7 Data plan for configuring the enterprise router access service-OLT side..........................................8-86 Table 8-8 Data plan for configuring the enterprise router access service-ATN930 side...................................8-87 Table 8-9 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side....................................8-93 Table 8-10 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side...........................8-94 Table 8-11 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side................................8-105 Table 8-12 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side.........................8-105 Table 8-13 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side................................8-106 Table 8-14 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side................................8-116 Table 8-15 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side.........................8-117 Table 8-16 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side................................8-117 Table 8-17 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side................................8-126 Table 8-18 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side.........................8-127 Table 8-19 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side................................8-128 Table 8-20 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side................................8-137 Table 8-21 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side.........................8-137 Table 8-22 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side................................8-138 Table 8-23 Data plan for configuring the ETH PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side.................................8-146 Table 8-24 Data plan for configuring the ETH PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side...........................8-147 Table 8-25 Data plan for configuring the ETH PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side.................................8-148 Table 8-26 Data plan for configuring the VLANs...........................................................................................8-158 Table 9-1 Script data plan.....................................................................................................................................9-1 Table 11-1 DBA profile......................................................................................................................................11-2 Table 11-2 GPON ONT line profile...................................................................................................................11-4 Table 11-3 GPON ONT service profile..............................................................................................................11-4 Table 11-4 GPON ONT alarm profile................................................................................................................11-5 Table 11-5 Default settings of the H801ESC board...........................................................................................11-7 Table 11-6 Default settings of the FAN.............................................................................................................11-8 Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
About This Document
About This Document Intended Audience This document describes the commissioning of the basic functions provided by the device in terms of hardware, software, interconnection, and maintenance and management to ensure that the device runs in a stable and reliable state. This document describes the configuration procedures of various services supported by the MA5600T in terms of configuration method and configuration example. This document helps to learn the commissioning flows, commissioning methods, and configuration procedures of various services of the MA5600T. This document is intended for: l
Installation and commissioning engineers
l
System maintenance engineers
l
Data configuration engineers
Symbol Conventions The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows Symbol
Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
About This Document
Command Conventions Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italics.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
GUI Conventions Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the “>” signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2009-12-01) This is the first release.
2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
1
Commissioning
About This Chapter This document describes the commissioning of the basic functions provided by the device in terms of hardware, software, interconnection, and maintenance and management to ensure that the device runs in a stable and reliable state. 1.1 Commissioning Introduction The topic describes the commissioning definition and procedure. 1.2 Commissioning Preparations This topic describes the hardware, software, and tool preparations for the commissioning. 1.3 Stand-Alone Commissioning After the hardware installation, a stand-alone MA5600T should be commissioned to ensure that the stand-alone MA5600T works in the normal state. 1.4 Interconnection Commissioning The MA5600T provides multiple interfaces for interconnection. This topic describes the interconnection commissioning of the MA5600T. 1.5 Maintenance and Management Commissioning To ensure the stability of the MA5600T, you need to verify the maintainability and reliability of the device after completing the stand-alone commissioning and interconnection commissioning.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
1.1 Commissioning Introduction The topic describes the commissioning definition and procedure. 1.1.1 Commissioning Definition Commissioning refers to the stand-alone commissioning, the interconnection commissioning, and the maintenance and management commissioning after the hardware installation. This ensures that the device works in the normal state according to the design specifications. 1.1.2 Commissioning Procedure This topic describes the procedure for commissioning the device.
1.1.1 Commissioning Definition Commissioning refers to the stand-alone commissioning, the interconnection commissioning, and the maintenance and management commissioning after the hardware installation. This ensures that the device works in the normal state according to the design specifications.
1.1.2 Commissioning Procedure This topic describes the procedure for commissioning the device.
Flowchart Perform the commissioning according to the flowchart. Figure 1-1 shows the commissioning procedure. Figure 1-1 Commissioning procedure
1-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Commissioning Item The commissioning items in the commissioning procedure are described as follows: Commissioning Preparations This topic describes the hardware, software, and tool preparations for the commissioning. Stand-Alone Commissioning After the hardware installation, a stand-alone MA5600T should be commissioned to ensure that the stand-alone MA5600T works in the normal state. Interconnection Commissioning The MA5600T provides multiple interfaces for interconnection. This topic describes the interconnection commissioning of the MA5600T. Maintenance and Management Commissioning To ensure the stability of the MA5600T, you need to verify the maintainability and reliability of the device after completing the stand-alone commissioning and interconnection commissioning.
1.2 Commissioning Preparations This topic describes the hardware, software, and tool preparations for the commissioning. 1.2.1 Checking Hardware This topic describes how to prepare the hardware required before the commissioning. This facilitates the subsequent commissioning. 1.2.2 Preparing Software This topic describes how to prepare the software required before the commissioning. This facilitates the subsequent commissioning. 1.2.3 Preparing Tools This topic describes how to prepare the tools required before the commissioning. This facilitates the subsequent commissioning. 1.2.4 Planning Data This topic describes the information to be collected about the hardware configuration, networking, and data plan before the commissioning based on the engineering document. This facilitates the data configuration.
1.2.1 Checking Hardware This topic describes how to prepare the hardware required before the commissioning. This facilitates the subsequent commissioning. Table 1-1 lists the hardware to be checked before the commissioning.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-3
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Table 1-1 Hardware checklist SN
Item
Description
1
Power supply and grounding
Ensure that the power cable and the grounding meet the following requirements:
2
3
4
Cables and connectors
Upper-layer device
Board (daughter board)
l
The power cable and the ground cable are connected properly and are in good contact.
l
The labels of the power cable, ground cable, and power distribution switch are correct, legible and complete.
l
The connectors of the external ground cables and protection ground cables of the cabinet are connected properly, without any damage.
l
The power supply for the device is in the normal state.
Check the local maintenance serial port cable, network cable, optical fiber, subscriber cable, and connectors, and ensure that they meet the following requirements: l
The connectors are tight and firm.
l
The cable jacket is intact.
l
Cable labels are legible.
l
Cables are bundled properly.
Ensure that the upper-layer device meets the following requirements: l
The position of the interconnection port of the upper-layer device is correct.
l
The upper-layer device works in the normal state and can be used for the commissioning.
The board (daughter board) selected should meet the requirements for the external ports. NOTE Different boards (daughter boards) provide different external ports. For details about the boards and their external ports on the MA5600T, see Board Overview of the MA5600T Hardware Description.
1.2.2 Preparing Software This topic describes how to prepare the software required before the commissioning. This facilitates the subsequent commissioning. Table 1-2 shows the software checklist before the commissioning.
1-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Table 1-2 Software checklist SN
Item
Description
1
Software package
Ensure that files in the software package for the commissioning are complete and the software version is correct.
2
Software commissioning tools
Ensure that all the commissioning tools are available. The common commissioning tools are as follows: l
HyperTerminal (provided by the Windows OS): used for logging in to the MA5600T through the CLI.
l
TFTP, SFTP, and FTP tools: used for loading software. They can be downloaded from http:// support.huawei.com.
l
Client software key generator Puttygen.exe, client software key convertor sshkey.exe and SSH client software putty.exe: used for logging in to the MA5600T through the SSH.
1.2.3 Preparing Tools This topic describes how to prepare the tools required before the commissioning. This facilitates the subsequent commissioning. Table 1-3 lists the tools to be prepared for the commissioning. Table 1-3 Tool checklist SN
Item
Description
Remarks
1
Cables
One RS-232 serial port cable (One end with an RJ-45 connector used to connect to the board and the other end with a DB-9 or DB-25 female connector used to connect to the maintenance terminal)
Used to connect the maintenance terminal to the MA5600T for maintenance through the serial port.
One crossover cable
Used to connect the maintenance terminal to the MA5600T for maintenance through telnet.
Some optical fibers and patch cords with different connectors
Used for the upstream transmission and optical power test.
One maintenance terminal configured with a HyperTerminal application, such as a laptop
Used to log in to the MA5600T to commission the MA5600T.
2
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Maintena nce terminal
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-5
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
SN
Item
Description
Remarks
3
Auxiliary device and meter
One optical power meter
Used to test the mean launched power and the input optical power of an optical port.
One optical attenuator
Used to attenuate the input optical signal. It is used to protect the optical port from being damaged by intense optical signals during the device commissioning.
One multimeter
Used to measure the voltage, resistance and current intensity during the power commissioning.
One optical multiplexer/demultiplexer
Used to test the input optical power of a single-fiber bidirectional optical port. It is a meter with the multiplexing and demultiplexing functions.
One data network performance analyzer
Used to test the input optical power. It is used to transmit data to simulate the networking environment.
1.2.4 Planning Data This topic describes the information to be collected about the hardware configuration, networking, and data plan before the commissioning based on the engineering document. This facilitates the data configuration. Table 1-4 lists the data collected for the commissioning. Table 1-4 Data checklist
1-6
SN
Item
Description
1
Hardware configuration
This includes but is not limited to the following: l
Types and slot distribution of the control board and service boards
l
Types and physical positions of the upstream ports and the service ports
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
SN
Item
Description
2
Networking and data plan
This includes but is not limited to the following: l
Networking mode
l
IP address assignment
l
VLAN planning
NOTE
l
A commissioning script can be made based on the actual networking and the data plan. For how to make a script, see 9 Script Making.
l
For details about the default settings of the main software on the MA5600T, see 11 Software Package Settings.
1.3 Stand-Alone Commissioning After the hardware installation, a stand-alone MA5600T should be commissioned to ensure that the stand-alone MA5600T works in the normal state. 1.
1.3.1 Checking the Settings of DIP Switches This topic describes how to check the settings of the DIP switches on the environment monitoring board (ESC board) and the fan monitoring board. This ensures the consistency between the DIP switch settings and the application of the DIP switch settings.
2.
1.3.2 Powering On the Indoor Device This topic describes how to power on the indoor device to ensure that all the boards can be normally powered on.
3.
1.3.3 Commissioning the Power Supply System This topic describes how to commission the power supply to ensure the reliable and stable power supply provided for the device.
4.
1.3.4 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal During the commissioning, you need to maintain the device through the maintenance terminal. This topic describes how to start the maintenance terminal and configure the IP address of the maintenance terminal to meet the commissioning requirements.
5.
1.3.5 Logging In to the System You must log in to the MA5600T before commissioning the MA5600T through the maintenance terminal. The following describes three login modes, namely, local serial port mode, telnet mode, and SSH mode.
6.
1.3.6 Checking the Software Version This topic describes how to verify that current software version meets the deployment requirement.
7.
1.3.7 Loading the Script You can run the commands in the script in batches by loading the script instead of running the commands one by one. This shortens the commissioning duration and improves the commissioning efficiency. If the script is not used, skip this operation, and follow the commissioning procedure to perform the subsequent operations.
8.
1.3.8 Configuring a Board
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-7
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Specific services require specific boards. To use a board, you need to first confirm the automatically discovered board or add the board offline. 9.
1.3.9 Configuring the System Energy-Saving Function This topic describes how to power off a board that is not configured with any service for a long time to reduce the system power and thus to reduce the system energy consumption.
10. 1.3.10 Checking the Status of the Upstream Port This topic describes how to check whether the upstream port is in the normal state. 11. 1.3.11 Checking the Status of the Service Port This topic describes how to check whether the service port is in the normal state. 12. 1.3.12 Testing the Optical Power of an Optical Port This topic describes how to check whether the optical signal transmit and receive modules are normal by testing the mean launched power and the actual input power. 13. 1.3.13 Changing the System Name This topic describes how to customize the useful system name to differentiate MA5600Ts. This facilitates the management of the MA5600T. 14. 1.3.14 Configuring a System User For logging in to, configuring, and managing the MA5600T, system users of different attributes need to be added. This topic describes how to add a system user and modify the user attributes. 15. 1.3.15 Configuring the System Time This topic describes how to Configure the system time, time zone, time stamp, and start/ end time of the daylight saving time (DST) of the MA5600T to ensure that they are consistent with those in the actual condition. 16. 1.3.16 Commissioning the EMU The MA5600T monitors various environment parameters (including the temperature, humidity, and voltage of the power supply) to ensure that the MA5600T can work stably in a proper environment. This topic describes how to commission the environment monitoring unit (EMU). 17. 1.3.17 Checking the Configuration of the Auto-Save Function This topic describes how to check the configuration of the auto-save function on the MA5600T, which prevents data loss in case of unexpected restart. 18. 1.3.18 Saving the Data This topic describes how to save the data in the flash memory to prevent data loss in case of unexpected restart. 19. 1.3.19 Backing Up System Files When the first deployment or upgrade is complete, you need to back up the database file and the configuration file so that the system can be easily recovered in case of a fault.
1.3.1 Checking the Settings of DIP Switches This topic describes how to check the settings of the DIP switches on the environment monitoring board (ESC board) and the fan monitoring board. This ensures the consistency between the DIP switch settings and the application of the DIP switch settings. 1.3.1.1 Checking the Settings of DIP Switches on the ESC Board This topic describes how to check the settings of DIP switches on the ESC board. This ensures the consistency between the settings of DIP switches and the application of DIP switches. 1.3.1.2 Checking the Settings of DIP Switches on the Fan Monitoring Board This topic describes how to check the settings of DIP switches on the fan monitoring board. This ensures the consistency between the settings of DIP switches and the application of DIP switches. 1-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
1.3.1.1 Checking the Settings of DIP Switches on the ESC Board This topic describes how to check the settings of DIP switches on the ESC board. This ensures the consistency between the settings of DIP switches and the application of DIP switches.
Prerequisite The device must be powered off.
Description of DIP Switches The H801ESCA board resides in the I-type PDU and provides two sets of DIP switches, namely, S5 and S6. Figure 1-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the H801ESCA board. Figure 1-2 Layout of the DIP switches (in default settings) on the H801ESCA board
Table 1-5 describes the settings of the DIP switches (S5 and S6). Table 1-5 Settings of the DIP switches DIP Switch
Default Setting
S5-1
ON
S5-2 S5-3
Description Used to set the external sensor of JTA1-JTA4 as the voltage type or the current type. l ON: The external sensors are of the current type. l
OFF: The external sensors are of the voltage type.
S5-4 S6-1
OFF
Used to set the sub-node ID corresponding to the system configuration to ensure that the communication is in the normal state. l ON: The mapping address bit is 0.
S6-2
OFF
S6-3
OFF
l
S6-4
OFF
By default, the address value is 15.
S6-5
ON
S6-6
ON
OFF: The mapping address bit is 1.
Reserved
S6-7 Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-9
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
DIP Switch
Default Setting
S6-8
ON
Description Used to set the baud rate of the communication between the H801ESCA board and the control board. l
ON: The baud rate is 19200 bit/s.
l
OFF: The baud rate is 9600 bit/s.
Table 1-6 describes the mapping between S5-1 to S5-4 and sensor ports. Table 1-6 Mapping between S5-1 to S5-4 and sensor ports DIP Switch
OFF
ON
S5-1
The external sensor of JTA1 is of the voltage type.
The external sensor of JTA1 is of the current type.
S5-2
The external sensor of JTA2 is of the voltage type.
The external sensor of JTA2 is of the current type.
S5-3
The external sensor of JTA3 is of the voltage type.
The external sensor of JTA3 is of the current type.
S5-4
The external sensor of JTA4 is of the voltage type.
The external sensor of JTA4 is of the current type.
S6-1 to S6-5 are used to set the sub-node IDs of the ESC board. Table 1-7 lists the mapping between S6-1 to S6-5 and sub-node IDs. Table 1-7 Mapping between S6-1 to S6-5 and sub-node IDs
1-10
DIP Switch Setting (5, 4, 3, 2, 1)
Addre ss Value
DIP Switch Setting (5, 4, 3, 2, 1)
Addr ess Value
00000
0
10000
16
00001
1
10001
17
00010
2
10010
18
00011
3
10011
19
00100
4
10100
20
00101
5
10101
21
00110
6
10110
22
00111
7
10111
23
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
DIP Switch Setting (5, 4, 3, 2, 1)
Addre ss Value
DIP Switch Setting (5, 4, 3, 2, 1)
Addr ess Value
01000
8
11000
24
01001
9
11001
25
01010
10
11010
26
01011
11
11011
27
01100
12
11100
28
01101
13
11101
29
01110
14
11110
30
01111
15 (default setting)
11111
31
NOTE
When S6-1 to S6-5 are used to set the sub-node ID, make sure that the DIP switch settings are consistent with the data configuration. Because sub-node ID 30 is occupied by the ESC board of other versions (such as H303ESC and H304ESC), the sub-node ID of the H801ESCA board cannot be set to 30 so as to ensure the compatibility with the ESC board of other versions. Therefore, the address value cannot be set to 30 either. In addition, the sub-node ID cannot be the same as that of the fan monitoring board of the fan tray.
Procedure Step 1 Remove the cable connector if the ESC board is connected to an environment monitoring cable. Step 2 Loosen the screws on the ESC board anticlockwise by using the Phillips screwdriver, as shown in ① of Figure 1-3. Figure 1-3 Removing the ESC board
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-11
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Step 3 Hold the ejector lever of the front panel and remove the ESC board from the PDU, as shown in ① of Figure 1-3. Step 4 Check whether settings of DIP switches on the ESC board are consistent with the application. If the settings are inconsistent with the application, set the DIP switches again according to "Description of DIP Switches". Step 5 Insert the ESC board into the PDU, as shown in ① of Figure 1-4. Figure 1-4 Inserting the ESC board
Step 6 Fasten the screws on the ESC board clockwise by using the Phillips screwdriver, as shown in ① of Figure 1-4. Step 7 Reconnect the environment monitoring cable to the ESC board. ----End
Result The settings of DIP switches on the ESC board are consistent with the application.
1.3.1.2 Checking the Settings of DIP Switches on the Fan Monitoring Board This topic describes how to check the settings of DIP switches on the fan monitoring board. This ensures the consistency between the settings of DIP switches and the application of DIP switches.
Prerequisite The device must be powered off. 1-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Description of DIP Switches The ESTI fan tray uses the FCBB fan monitoring board, and the 19-inch fan tray uses the FCBC fan monitoring board. The fan monitoring board provides a set of DIP switches named SW2. Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6 show the layout of the DIP switches of the ESTI and the 19-inch fan trays respectively. Figure 1-5 Layout of the DIP switches (in default settings) of the ESTI fan tray
Figure 1-6 Layout of the DIP switches (in default settings) of the 19-inch fan tray
Table 1-8 lists the settings of SW2. Table 1-8 Settings of SW2
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
DIP Switch
Default Setting in the ESTI Fan Tray
Default Setting in the 19-Inch Fan Tray
Description
SW2-1
OFF
OFF
SW2-2
ON
ON
SW2-3
ON
ON
Used to set the sub-node address corresponding to the system configuration to ensure that the communication is in the normal state. l ON: The mapping address bit is 0. l OFF: The mapping address bit is 1. By default, the address value is 1.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-13
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
DIP Switch
Default Setting in the ESTI Fan Tray
Default Setting in the 19-Inch Fan Tray
Description
SW2-4
ON
ON
Used to set the baud rate of the communication between the fan tray and the control board.
SW2-5
ON
OFF
SW2-6
OFF
ON
SW2-7
ON
ON
SW2-8
OFF
OFF
l
ON: The baud rate is 19200 bit/s.
l
OFF: The baud rate is 9600 bit/s.
Used to set the quantity of the fans.
Used to set the fan speed adjustment mode.
Table 1-9, Table 1-10, and Table 1-11 list the settings of each DIP switch of SW2. Table 1-9 Settings of SW2-1 to SW2-3 SW2-3
SW2-2
SW2-1
Address Value
Descriptio n
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
ON
OFF
1 (default setting)
ON
OFF
ON
2
The settings must be the same as the data configuratio n.
ON
OFF
OFF
3
OFF
ON
ON
4
OFF
ON
OFF
5
OFF
OFF
ON
6
OFF
OFF
OFF
7
NOTE
When SW2-1, SW2-2, and SW2-3 are used to set the sub-node address, make sure that the DIP switch settings are consistent with the data configuration. The sub-node address value, however, cannot be the same as that of the environment monitoring board.
1-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Table 1-10 Settings of SW2-5 and SW2-6 SW2-6
SW2-5
Quantity of Fans
Remarks
ON
ON
6
-
ON
OFF
8
The 19-inch fan tray needs to be configured with eight fans. Therefore, only this setting can be adopted.
OFF
ON
4
The ESTI fan tray needs to be configured with four fans. Therefore, only this setting can be adopted.
OFF
OFF
10
-
Table 1-11 Settings of SW2-7 and SW2-8 SW2-8
SW2-7
Speed Adjustment Mode
Speed Adjustment Policy
Remar ks
ON
ON
Measure the temperature at the air intake vent (reserved)
Policy 1
-
ON
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
OFF
Measure the temperature at the air exhaust vent
l
If the temperature is lower than 25°C, the fans rotate at 50% of the full speed.
l
If the temperature is higher than 35°C, the fans rotate at full speed.
l
If the temperature ranges from 25°C to 35°C, the fans rotate at 50% to 100% of the full speed.
Policy 2 l
If the temperature is lower than 55°C, the fans rotate at 50% of the full speed.
l
If the temperature is higher than 65°C, the fans rotate at the full speed.
l
If the temperature ranges from 55°C to 65°C, the fans rotate at 50% to 100% of the full speed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
-
1-15
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
SW2-8
SW2-7
Speed Adjustment Mode
Speed Adjustment Policy
Remar ks
OFF
ON
Measure the temperature at the air intake vent
Policy 3
The ESTI and the 19-inch fan trays support only policy 3. Therefo re, only this setting can be adopted.
OFF
OFF
Stop fan rotating and measure the temperature at the air intake vent
l
If the temperature is lower than 30°C, the fans rotate at 50% of the full speed.
l
If the temperature is higher than 50°C, the fans rotate at full speed.
l
If the temperature ranges from 30°C to 50°C, the fans rotate at 50% to 100% of the full speed.
Policy 4
-
l
If the temperature is lower than 15°C, the fans stop rotating.
l
If the temperature ranges from 15°C to 45°C, the fans rotate at 50% of the full speed.
l
If the temperature is higher than 65°C, the fans rotate at full speed.
l
If the temperature ranges from 45°C to 65°C, the fans rotate at 50% to 100% of the full speed.
Procedure Step 1 Loosen the screws on the front panel of the fan tray anticlockwise by using the Phillips screwdriver, as shown in ① of Figure 1-7.
1-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Figure 1-7 Removing/Inserting the fan tray
Step 2 Hold the ejector lever of the fan tray and remove the fan tray from the service shelf, as shown in ① of Figure 1-7. Step 3 Check whether the settings of DIP switches on the fan monitoring board are consistent with the application. If settings of DIP switches on the fan monitoring board are not consistent with the application, set the DIP switches again according to "Description of DIP Switches". Step 4 Insert the fan tray into the slot, as shown in ① of Figure 1-7. Step 5 Use the Phillips screwdriver to fasten the panel screws clockwise on the fan tray, as shown in ① of the Figure 1-7. ----End
Result The settings of DIP switches on the fan monitoring board are consistent with the application.
1.3.2 Powering On the Indoor Device This topic describes how to power on the indoor device to ensure that all the boards can be normally powered on.
Prerequisite The after-installation check and the power-on check must be performed on the device.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-17
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Procedure Step 1 Connect the input power supply of the DC PDU. Step 2 Turn on the output control switch of the DC PDU. ----End
Result The device can be normally powered on, and the RUN LED on the boards are on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly.
1.3.3 Commissioning the Power Supply System This topic describes how to commission the power supply to ensure the reliable and stable power supply provided for the device. 1.3.3.1 Checking the Power Supply of the DC PDU This topic describes how to verify that either of the two independent power supplies can supply power to the cabinet. 1.3.3.2 Checking the Power Supply of the Power Board This topic describes how to check the redundancy backup function of the power boards.
1.3.3.1 Checking the Power Supply of the DC PDU This topic describes how to verify that either of the two independent power supplies can supply power to the cabinet.
Prerequisite The two independent power supplies of the DC power distribution unit (PDU) supply power to the cabinet concurrently.
Procedure Step 1 Disconnect the first power supply, and check the power supply of the cabinet. Step 2 Restore the first power supply to power the cabinet. Step 3 Disconnect the second power supply, and check the power supply of the cabinet. Step 4 Restore the second power supply to power the cabinet. ----End
Result After either of the two independent power supplies is disconnected, the power supply of the cabinet is in the normal state, and the power supply of the boards is not affected, that is, the RUN LED on the board is on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly.
1.3.3.2 Checking the Power Supply of the Power Board This topic describes how to check the redundancy backup function of the power boards. 1-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Prerequisite The two power boards configured must work in the normal state.
Context In the normal state, the two power boards work in the load balancing mode and provide power for all the service boards in the shelf. When one power board is faulty, the other power board provides power for all the service boards in the shelf. When checking the power supply of the power board, pay attention to the following points: l
Wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.
l
Turn off the -48 V input switch on the PDU that corresponds to the power board before replacing the board. In addition, when the board is powered on, do not remove or insert the power connector.
l
If one power board is faulty, replace the board in time to prevent the shelf from working for a long time when only one power board supplies power.
Procedure Step 1 Turn off the switch on the PDU that corresponds to one power board, and check the power supply for the service board. Step 2 Turn on the switch again. Step 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to check the other power board. ----End
Result The boards in the shelf work in the normal state after the switch on the PDU that corresponds to either power board is turned off, that is, the RUN LED on the board is on for 1s and off for 1s repeatedly.
1.3.4 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal During the commissioning, you need to maintain the device through the maintenance terminal. This topic describes how to start the maintenance terminal and configure the IP address of the maintenance terminal to meet the commissioning requirements. 1.3.4.1 Starting the Maintenance Terminal This topic describes how to start the maintenance terminal to prepare for the subsequent commissioning. 1.3.4.2 Configuring the IP Address of the Maintenance Terminal This topic describes how to configure the IP address of the maintenance terminal to ensure that you can log in to the MA5600T in the telnet or SSH mode through the maintenance terminal.
1.3.4.1 Starting the Maintenance Terminal This topic describes how to start the maintenance terminal to prepare for the subsequent commissioning. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-19
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Context A maintenance terminal is usually a laptop embedded with a HyperTerminal application.
Procedure Step 1 Power on the maintenance terminal. The Windows OS starts automatically, and the Log In dialog box is displayed. Step 2 (Optional) If the user name and the password are required, input the user name and the password of the administrator in the Log In dialog box. Step 3 Click OK to enter the Windows OS. ----End
Result The maintenance terminal runs in the normal state.
1.3.4.2 Configuring the IP Address of the Maintenance Terminal This topic describes how to configure the IP address of the maintenance terminal to ensure that you can log in to the MA5600T in the telnet or SSH mode through the maintenance terminal.
Prerequisites The maintenance terminal must be started.
Procedure Step 1 Right-click My Network Places and choose Properties. The Network Connections window is displayed. Step 2 In the Network Connections window, right-click Local Area Connection, and choose Properties. The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click the General tab, and then select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) in Components checked are used by this connection, as shown in the following figure.
1-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Figure 1-8 Configure the local area connection properties
Step 4 Click Properties to display the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box. Step 5 Click General, and then select Use the following IP address: to configure the IP address and the subnet mask, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-21
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Figure 1-9 Configure the IP address and the subnet mask
NOTE
The IP address of the maintenance terminal and the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port of the device must be in the same network segment.
Step 6 Click OK to return to the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box. Step 7 Click OK. ----End
Result The IP address of the maintenance terminal and the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port of the device are in the same network segment. NOTE
By default, the IP address of the maintenance network port (ETH port on the control board) is 10.11.104.2, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
1.3.5 Logging In to the System You must log in to the MA5600T before commissioning the MA5600T through the maintenance terminal. The following describes three login modes, namely, local serial port mode, telnet mode, and SSH mode. 1-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
1.3.5.1 Login Through the Local Serial Port When you need to maintain and manage the MA5600T locally, you can log in to the system through the local serial port. 1.3.5.2 Login Through Telnet (Outband Management) This topic describes how to log in to the MA5600T through the local maintenance Ethernet port (outband management port) in the telnet mode to maintain and manage the MA5600T. 1.3.5.3 Login Through Telnet (Inband Management) This topic describes how to log in to the MA5600T through the upstream port (inband management port) in the telnet mode to maintain and manage the MA5600T. 1.3.5.4 Login Through SSH (Outband Management) This topic describes how to log in to the MA5600T through the local maintenance Ethernet port (outband management port) in the SSH mode to maintain and manage the MA5600T. The SSH provides authentication, encryption, and authorization to ensure the network communication security. When a user logs in to the MA5600T remotely over an insecure network, SSH provides security guarantee and powerful authentication to protect the MA5600T against attacks such as IP address spoofing and interception of plain text password. 1.3.5.5 Login Through SSH (Inband Management) This topic describes how to log in to the MA5600T through the upstream port (inband management port) in the SSH mode to maintain and manage the MA5600T. The secure shell (SSH) provides authentication, encryption, and authorization to ensure the network communication security. When a user logs in to the MA5600T remotely over an insecure network, SSH provides security guarantee and powerful authentication to protect the MA5600T against attacks such as IP address spoofing and interception of plain text password.
1.3.5.1 Login Through the Local Serial Port When you need to maintain and manage the MA5600T locally, you can log in to the system through the local serial port.
Prerequisite l
A maintenance terminal (generally a laptop configured with a HyperTerminal application) must be available.
l
An RS-232 serial port cable (one end with an RJ-45 connector and the other end with a DB-9 or DB-25 female connector) must be available.
Networking Figure 1-10 shows the networking for logging in to the MA5600T through the local serial port. Figure 1-10 Logging in to the MA5600T through the local serial port
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-23
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Flowchart Figure 1-11 shows the flowchart for logging in to the system through the local serial port. Figure 1-11 Flowchart for logging in to the system through the local serial port
Procedure Step 1 Connect the serial port cable. Use an RS-232 serial port cable to connect a serial port of the PC to the CON port of the SCU control board, as shown in Figure 1-10. Step 2 Set the HyperTerminal communication parameters. 1.
Set up a connection. Click Start. Choose All Programs > Accessories > Communications > Hyper Terminal to display the Connection Description dialog box. Input the connection name, and click OK, as shown in the following figure.
1-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2.
1 Commissioning
Set the serial port. Select the serial port that is connected to the MA5600T. You can select COM1 or COM2 (here, use COM2 as an example), and click OK, as shown in the following figure.
3.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Set the HyperTerminal communication parameters. For details, see the following figure.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-25
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
NOTE
4.
l
The baud rate of the HyperTerminal must be the same as the baud rate of the serial port on the MA5600T. By default, the baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s.
l
If illegible characters are displayed on the HyperTerminal interface after you log in to the system, it is generally because the baud rate of the HyperTerminal is different from the baud rate of the MA5600T. In this case, set the consistent baud rate for the HyperTerminal to log in to the system. The system supports the baud rates of 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s, 57600 bit/s, and 115200 bit/s.
Click OK to display the HyperTerminal interface.
Step 3 (Optional) Set the properties of the HyperTerminal. 1.
Set the emulation type of the HyperTerminal. Choose File > Properties on the HyperTerminal interface. In the dialog box that is displayed, click the Settings tab, and set Emulation to VT100 or Auto Detect, as shown in the following figure. It is Auto Detect by default.
1-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2.
1 Commissioning
Set the line delay and the character delay of the ASCII code. Click ASCII Setup. In the dialog box that is displayed, set line delay to 200 and Character delay to 200, and then click OK, as shown in the following figure. By default, Line delay is 0, and Character delay is 0.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-27
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning NOTE
When you paste a text to the HyperTerminal, the character delay controls the character transmit speed, and the line delay controls the interval of transmitting every line. If a delay is very short, loss of characters occurs. When the pasted text is displayed abnormally, modify the delay.
----End
Result On the Hyper Terminal interface, press Enter, and the system prompts you to input the user name. Input the user name and the password for user registration (by default, the super user name is root and the password is admin), and wait until the CLI prompt character is displayed. and then click on the operation interface. If the login still fails, If the login fails, click return to step 1 to check the parameter settings and the physical connections, and then try again.
1.3.5.2 Login Through Telnet (Outband Management) This topic describes how to log in to the MA5600T through the local maintenance Ethernet port (outband management port) in the telnet mode to maintain and manage the MA5600T.
Prerequisite You must be logged in to the MA5600T through the local serial port. For details about how to log in to the MA5600T through the local serial port, see 1.3.5.1 Login Through the Local Serial Port. NOTE
In the following operations, the configuration of the MA5600T must be performed through the local serial port.
Networking Figure 1-12 shows an example network for outband management through telnet in a LAN, and Figure 1-13 shows an example network for outband management through telnet in a WAN.
1-28
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Figure 1-12 Example network for outband management through telnet in a LAN
NOTE
The MA5600T is connected to the LAN through the straight through cable, and the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port of the MA5600T is in the same network segment as the IP address of the maintenance terminal. Alternatively, the Ethernet port of the maintenance terminal can be directly connected to the maintenance Ethernet port of the MA5600T to manage the MA5600T in the outband management mode. In such a condition, a crossover cable must be used.
Figure 1-13 Network example for outband management through telnet in a WAN
Data Plan Table 1-12 and Table 1-13 provide the data plan for the outband management through telnet in a LAN and in a WAN respectively.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-29
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Table 1-12 Data plan for the outband management through Telnet in a LAN Item
Data
Maintenance network port of the MA5600T
IP address: 10.50.1.10/24 NOTE By default, the IP address of the maintenance network port (ETH port on the control board) is 10.11.104.2, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Maintenance terminal
IP address: 10.50.1.20/24 (in the same subnet as the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port)
Table 1-13 Data plan for the outband management through Telnet in a WAN Item
Data
Maintenance network port of the MA5600T
IP address: 10.50.1.10/24 NOTE By default, the IP address of the maintenance network port (ETH port on the control board) is 10.11.104.2, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
Maintenance terminal
IP address: 10.10.1.10/24
Router port connecting to the MA5600T
IP address: 10.50.1.1/24
Flowchart Figure 1-14 shows the flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through telnet (outband management).
1-30
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Figure 1-14 Flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through telnet (outband management)
Procedure Step 1 Set up the network environment. l
If you log in to the MA5600T in the LAN outband management mode through telnet, set up a network environment according to Figure 1-12.
l
If you log in to the MA5600T in the MAN outband management mode through telnet, set up a network environment according to Figure 1-13.
Step 2 Configure the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port. In the MEth mode, run the ip address command to configure the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port. huawei(config)#interface meth 0 huawei(config-if-meth0)#ip address 10.50.1.10 24
Step 3 Add a route for the outband management. l
If the network environment is set up as shown in Figure 1-12, you need not add a route.
l
If the network environment is set up as shown in Figure 1-13, run the ip route-static command to add a route from the maintenance Ethernet port of the MA5600T to the maintenance terminal. huawei(config-if-meth0)#quit huawei(config)#ip route-static 10.10.1.0 24 10.50.1.1
Step 4 Run the telnet application.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-31
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
On the maintenance terminal, choose Start > Run. On the Run window, input "telnet 10.50.1.10" in the Open field as shown in Figure 1-15 (considering the Windows OS as an example), and click OK. Then, the telnet dialog box is displayed. Figure 1-15 Running the telnet application
Step 5 Log in to the system. In the telnet dialog box, input the user name and the password. By default, the user name is root, and the password is admin. When the login is successful, the system displays the following information: >>User name:root >>User password:admin //The password is not displayed on the maintenance terminal. Huawei Integrated Access Software. Copyright(C) Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2002-2009. All rights reserved.
----End
Result After logging in to the system, you can maintain and manage the MA5600T.
1.3.5.3 Login Through Telnet (Inband Management) This topic describes how to log in to the MA5600T through the upstream port (inband management port) in the telnet mode to maintain and manage the MA5600T.
Prerequisite You must be logged in to the MA5600T through the local serial port. For details about how to log in to the MA5600T through the local serial port, see 1.3.5.1 Login Through the Local Serial Port. NOTE
In the following operations, the configuration of the MA5600T must be performed through the local serial port.
1-32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Networking Figure 1-16 shows an example network for inband management through telnet in a LAN, and Figure 1-17 shows an example network for inband management through telnet in a WAN. Figure 1-16 Example network for inband management through telnet in a LAN
Figure 1-17 Example network for inband management through telnet in a WAN
Data Plan Table 1-14 and Table 1-15 provide the data plan for the inband management through telnet in a LAN and in a WAN respectively.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-33
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Table 1-14 Data plan for the inband management through Telnet in a LAN Item
Data
Upstream port of the MA5600T
l
VLAN ID: 30
l
Port: 0/19/0
l
IP address: 10.50.1.10/24
Maintenance terminal
IP address: 10.50.1.20/24 (in the same subnet as the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port)
Table 1-15 Data plan for the inband management through Telnet in a WAN Item
Data
Upstream port of the MA5600T
l
VLAN ID: 30
l
Port: 0/19/0
l
IP address: 10.50.1.10/24
Maintenance terminal
IP address: 10.10.1.10/24
Router port connecting to the MA5600T
IP address: 10.50.1.1/24
Flowchart Figure 1-18 shows the flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through telnet (inband management).
1-34
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Figure 1-18 Flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through telnet (inband management)
Procedure Step 1 Set up the network environment. l
If you log in to the MA5600T in the LAN inband management mode through telnet, set up a network environment according to Figure 1-16.
l
If you log in to the MA5600T in the WAN inband management mode through telnet, set up a network environment according to Figure 1-17.
Step 2 Configure the IP address of the VLAN L3 interface. 1.
Run the vlan command to create a management VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 30 standard
2.
Run the port vlan command to add an upstream port to the VLAN. huawei(config)#port vlan 30 0/19 0
3.
In the VLANIF mode, run the ip address command to configure the IP address of the VLAN L3 interface. huawei(config)#interface vlanif 30 huawei(config-if-vlanif30)#ip address 10.50.1.10 24 NOTE
If the packet transmitted from the upstream port is untagged, run the native-vlan command to configure the native VLAN of the upstream port to be the same as the VLAN of the upstream port.
Step 3 Add a route for the inband management. l Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
If the network environment is set up as shown in Figure 1-16, you need not add a route. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-35
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
l
If the network environment is set up as shown in Figure 1-17, run the ip route-static command to add a route from the maintenance Ethernet port of the MA5600T to the maintenance terminal. huawei(config-if-meth0)#quit huawei(config)#ip route-static 10.10.1.0 24 10.50.1.1
Step 4 Run the telnet application. On the maintenance terminal, choose Start > Run. On the Run window, input "telnet 10.50.1.10" in the Open field as shown in Figure 1-19 (considering the Windows OS as an example), and click OK. Then, the telnet dialog box is displayed. Figure 1-19 Running the telnet application
Step 5 Log in to the system. In the telnet dialog box, input the user name and the password. By default, the user name is root, and the password is admin. When the login is successful, the system displays the following information: >>User name:root >>User password:admin //The password is not displayed on the maintenance terminal. Huawei Integrated Access Software. Copyright(C) Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2002-2009. All rights reserved.
----End
Result After logging in to the system, you can maintain and manage the MA5600T.
1.3.5.4 Login Through SSH (Outband Management) This topic describes how to log in to the MA5600T through the local maintenance Ethernet port (outband management port) in the SSH mode to maintain and manage the MA5600T. The SSH provides authentication, encryption, and authorization to ensure the network communication security. When a user logs in to the MA5600T remotely over an insecure network, SSH provides security guarantee and powerful authentication to protect the MA5600T against attacks such as IP address spoofing and interception of plain text password. 1-36
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Prerequisite l
You must be logged in to the MA5600T through the local serial port. For details about how to log in to the MA5600T through the local serial port, see 1.3.5.1 Login Through the Local Serial Port. NOTE
In the following operations, the configuration of the MA5600T must be performed through the local serial port. l
The tools used for commissioning in the case of login to the MA5600T through SSH must be available, include: Client software key generator Puttygen.exe, client software key convertor sshkey.exe and SSH client software putty.exe.
Networking Figure 1-20 shows an example network for outband management through SSH in a LAN, and Figure 1-21 shows an example network for outband management through SSH in a WAN. Figure 1-20 Example network for outband management through SSH in a LAN
NOTE
The MA5600T is connected to the LAN through the straight through cable, and the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port of the MA5600T is in the same network segment as the IP address of the maintenance terminal. Alternatively, the Ethernet port of the maintenance terminal can be directly connected to the maintenance Ethernet port of the MA5600T to manage the MA5600T in the outband management mode. In such a condition, a crossover cable must be used.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-37
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Figure 1-21 Example network for outband management through SSH in a WAN
Data Plan Table 1-16 and Table 1-17 provide the data plan for the outband management through SSH in a LAN and in a WAN respectively. Table 1-16 Data plan for the outband management through SSH in a LAN Item
Data
Maintenance network port of the MA5600T
l
IP address: 10.50.1.10/24
l
User authentication mode: RSA public key authentication
l
RSA key name: key
NOTE By default, the IP address of the maintenance network port (ETH port on the control board) is 10.11.104.2, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
New user
Maintenance terminal
1-38
l
User name/Password: huawei/test01
l
Authority: Operator
l
Permitted reenter number: 4
IP address: 10.50.1.20/24 (in the same subnet as the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Table 1-17 Data plan for the outband management through SSH in a WAN Item
Data
Maintenance network port of the MA5600T
l
IP address: 10.50.1.10/24
l
User authentication mode: RSA public key authentication
l
RSA key name: key
NOTE By default, the IP address of the maintenance network port (ETH port on the control board) is 10.11.104.2, and the subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
New user
l
User name/Password: huawei/test01
l
Authority: Operator
l
Permitted reenter number: 4
Maintenance terminal
IP address: 10.10.1.10/24
Router port connecting to the MA5600T
IP address: 10.50.1.1/24
Flowchart Figure 1-22 shows the flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through SSH.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-39
1 Commissioning
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 1-22 Flowchart for logging in to the MA5600T through SSH (Outband Management)
1-40
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Procedure Step 1 Set up the network environment. l
If you log in to the MA5600T in the LAN outband management mode through SSH, set up a network environment according to Figure 1-20.
l
If you log in to the MA5600T in the WAN outband management mode through SSH, set up a network environment according to Figure 1-21.
Step 2 Configure the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port. In the MEth mode, run the ip address command to configure the IP address of the maintenance Ethernet port. huawei(config)#interface meth 0 huawei(config-if-meth0)#ip address 10.50.1.10 24
Step 3 Add a route for the outband management. l
If the network environment is set up as shown in Figure 1-20, you need not add a route.
l
If the network environment is set up as shown in Figure 1-21, run the ip route-static command to add a route from the maintenance Ethernet port of the MA5600T to the maintenance terminal. huawei(config-if-meth0)#quit huawei(config)#ip route-static 10.10.1.0 24 10.50.1.1
Step 4 Create a user. Run the terminal user name command to create a user. huawei(config)#terminal user name User Name(length):huawei User Password(length):test01 //The password is not displayed on the maintenance terminal. Confirm Password(length):test01 //The password is not displayed on the maintenance terminal. User profile name(display version { |backplane|frameid/slotid }: Command: display version VERSION : MA5600V800R007C00 PRODUCT MA5600T Uptime is 3 day(s), 23 hour(s), 47 minute(s), 33 second(s)
1.3.7 Loading the Script You can run the commands in the script in batches by loading the script instead of running the commands one by one. This shortens the commissioning duration and improves the Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-59
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
commissioning efficiency. If the script is not used, skip this operation, and follow the commissioning procedure to perform the subsequent operations.
Prerequisite l
The hardware must be installed and checked.
l
The script file must be ready. For details about how to make a script, see 9 Script Making.
l
The operator must be in the privilege mode.
Procedure Step 1 Open the script file and copy all the commands to the CLI. ----End
Result The commands in the script can be executed automatically and successfully.
1.3.8 Configuring a Board Specific services require specific boards. To use a board, you need to first confirm the automatically discovered board or add the board offline. 1.3.8.1 Adding a Board Offline This topic describes how to add a board to an idle slot that is consistent with the board actually planned beforehand to ensure that the board runs immediately the board is installed in the slot. 1.3.8.2 Confirming a Board This topic describes how to confirm a board after the board installed in an idle slot is automatically discovered. This ensures that the auto-discovered board runs in the normal state. 1.3.8.3 Checking the Board Status This topic describes how to check whether the board works in the normal state.
1.3.8.1 Adding a Board Offline This topic describes how to add a board to an idle slot that is consistent with the board actually planned beforehand to ensure that the board runs immediately the board is installed in the slot.
Prerequisite The slot to which a board is added must be idle.
Context
1-60
l
The boards other than the control board can be added offline.
l
After a board is added offline, the board status is displayed as Failed. The board status becomes normal only when a board of the same type as the board added offline is installed in the slot. If a board of a different type is installed, the board resets repeatedly due to the board type mismatch. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Procedure Step 1 Run the board add command to add a board offline. NOTE
l
The shelf ID and the slot ID of the board added offline must be the same as the actual position. Otherwise, when the board is installed, the board status cannot be changed to normal.
l
The type of the board added offline must be the same as the type of the board installed. Otherwise, when the board is installed, the board status cannot be changed to normal.
Step 2 Run the display board frameid [ /slotid ] command to query the type of the added board. ----End
Result The type of the added board is the same as the board type that is planned. When a board is installed in the slot in which the board is added, the board status is displayed as Normal.
Example To add a service board GPBD offline in slot 0/2, do as follows: huawei(config)#board add 0/2 h802gpbd 0 frame 2 slot board added successfully huawei(config)#display board 0/2 --------------------------------------Board Name : H802GPBD Board Status : Failed --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Port min-distance max-distance Optical-module type (km) (km) status ------------------------------------------------------------0 GPON 0 20 1 GPON 0 20 2 GPON 0 20 3 GPON 0 20 4 GPON 0 20 5 GPON 0 20 6 GPON 0 20 7 GPON 0 20 ------------------------------------------------------------In port 0, the total of ONTs are: 0 In port 1, the total of ONTs are: 0 In port 2, the total of ONTs are: 0 In port 3, the total of ONTs are: 0 In port 4, the total of ONTs are: 0 In port 5, the total of ONTs are: 0 In port 6, the total of ONTs are: 0 In port 7, the total of ONTs are: 0
1.3.8.2 Confirming a Board This topic describes how to confirm a board after the board installed in an idle slot is automatically discovered. This ensures that the auto-discovered board runs in the normal state.
Prerequisite A board must be installed in an idle slot or all the boards in the shelf must be installed. After that, the system automatically identifies the board type, and the board status is Auto_find. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-61
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Procedure Step 1 Run the board confirm command to confirm an Auto_find board. NOTE
l
To confirm only one board, run the board confirm frameid/slotid command.
l
To confirm all the boards in a shelf, run the board confirm frameid command.
Step 2 Run the display board frameid [ /slotid ] command to query the board status. ----End
Result The board status is displayed as Normal.
Example To confirm the service board in slot 0/2, do as follows: huawei(config)#board confirm 0/2 0 frame 2 slot board confirms successfully huawei(config)#display board 0/2 --------------------------------------Board Name : H802GPBD Board Status : Normal --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Port min-distance max-distance Optical-module type (km) (km) status ------------------------------------------------------------0 GPON 0 20 Offline 1 GPON 0 20 Offline 2 GPON 0 20 Offline 3 GPON 0 20 Offline 4 GPON 0 20 Offline 5 GPON 0 20 Offline 6 GPON 0 20 Offline 7 GPON 0 20 Offline -------------------------------------------------------------
1.3.8.3 Checking the Board Status This topic describes how to check whether the board works in the normal state.
Procedure Step 1 Run the display board frameid command to query the status of all the boards. ----End
Result All the boards work in the normal state. That is, all of the board status is displayed as Normal.
Example To query the information about all the boards of shelf 0, do as follows: 1-62
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status SubType0 SubType1 Online/Offline ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 1 2 3 4 H802GPBD Normal 5 6 H802GPBD Normal 7 8 9 H801SCUL Active_normal FLBA 10 11 12 H802GPBD Normal 13 14 H802GPBD Normal 15 16 17 H802GPBD Normal 18 19 H801GICG Normal 20 21 22 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.3.9 Configuring the System Energy-Saving Function This topic describes how to power off a board that is not configured with any service for a long time to reduce the system power and thus to reduce the system energy consumption.
Prerequisite The board must support the power-off mode and the energy-saving mode.
Context Board energy-saving (automatic board power-off): After the MA5600T is installed and boards are confirmed, if no service is configured on the MA5600T, the boards are wasting the system resources. In this case, you can enable the system energy-saving mode. With this function enabled, if no service is configured 15 minutes after a board is confirmed and works normally, the device powers off the board. By default, the system energy-saving mode is disabled. You can run the board power-on command to power off a board manually. You can recover the power supply of the board that is automatically powered off in the following three ways: l
Run the board power-on command to power on the board.
l
Remove the board from the slot that is automatically powered off, and the system determines that the board is offline and then recovers the power supply of the slot. After the power supply is recovered, reinstall the board.
l
Run the undo system energy-saving mode command to disable the system energy-saving mode. Then, the system recovers the power supply of the boards that are automatically powered off.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-63
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Procedure Step 1 Run the system energy-saving mode command to enable the system energy-saving mode. By default, the system energy-saving mode is disabled. Step 2 Run the display system energy-saving mode command to query the system energy-saving mode. ----End
Result The system energy-saving mode queried is enable. If no service is configured 15 minutes after the board is confirmed and works normally, the board is powered off automatically
Example To enable the system energy-saving mode, do as follows: huawei(config)#system energy-saving mode Set the energy-saving mode successfully huawei(config)#display system energy-saving mode The status of the energy-saving switch: enable
1.3.10 Checking the Status of the Upstream Port This topic describes how to check whether the upstream port is in the normal state.
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface giu command to enter the GIU mode. Step 2 Run the display port state all command to check whether the upstream port is in the normal state. ----End
Result The upstream port is in the normal state. That is, the upstream port is in the active state and the link is in the online state. If the optical port is adopted for upstream transmission, Optic Status is displayed as normal.
1.3.11 Checking the Status of the Service Port This topic describes how to check whether the service port is in the normal state.
Prerequisite NOTE
The MA5600T provides various service ports. The following only describes how to check the status of a GPON port.
Procedure Step 1 Run the interface gpon command to enter the GPON mode. 1-64
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Step 2 Run the display port state command to check whether the service port is in the normal state. ----End
Result All the service ports are in the normal state. That is, Status is displayed as Activated, and Laser state is displayed as On.
1.3.12 Testing the Optical Power of an Optical Port This topic describes how to check whether the optical signal transmit and receive modules are normal by testing the mean launched power and the actual input power. 1.3.12.1 Testing the Mean Launched Power of a One-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port This topic describes how to check whether the optical signal transmitter is normal when a onefiber bi-directional optical port needs commissioning or when the optical port has error bits or its services are interrupted. 1.3.12.2 Testing the Mean Launched Power of a Two-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port When a two-fiber bi-directional optical port needs commissioning, or when the optical port has error bits or its services are interrupted, the mean launched power of the port can be tested for determining whether the optical signal transmitter is normal. 1.3.12.3 Testing the Actual Input Power of a One-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port When a one-fiber bi-directional optical port needs commissioning, or when the optical port has error bits or its services are interrupted, the actual input power (including the minimum sensitivity and minimum overload point) of the port can be tested for determining whether the optical signal receiver is normal. 1.3.12.4 Testing the Actual Input Power of a Two-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port When a two-fiber bi-directional optical port needs commissioning, or when the optical port has error bits or its services are interrupted, the actual input power (including the minimum sensitivity and minimum overload point) of the port can be tested for determining whether the optical signal receiver is normal.
1.3.12.1 Testing the Mean Launched Power of a One-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port This topic describes how to check whether the optical signal transmitter is normal when a onefiber bi-directional optical port needs commissioning or when the optical port has error bits or its services are interrupted.
Impact on System When a one-fiber bi-directional optical port is under the mean launched power test, the optical port cannot carry any service.
Tools, Meters, and Materials l
Optical power meter
l
Patch cords with different connectors (selected according to the actual requirements)
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-65
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Precautions
DANGER Take precautions for personal safety. Do not look at the laser transmit port or the optical fiber connector on the optical interface board without wearing protective glasses. l
Use the “dBm unit” of the optical power meter for the test.
l
The optical fiber connector and the optical transceiver on the front panel of the optical interface board must be clean and properly connected.
l
Use a patch cord as short as possible for the test. The length is generally within 1 m. It is recommended that a new patch cord be used.
l
Do not bend the optical fiber. Otherwise, the test result may be inaccurate.
Procedure Step 1 Test the mean launched power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the OLT side. 1.
Remove the optical fiber from the port to be tested. Connect one end of the patch cord to the port to be tested, and the other end to the optical power meter, as shown in Figure 1-40. Figure 1-40 Testing the mean launched power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the OLT side
NOTE
The ports of the optical power meter may be of different specifications. Therefore, select a patch cord with matched connectors.
1-66
2.
Set the test wavelength of the optical power meter to be the same as the operating wavelength of the port to be tested.
3.
Observe the reading of the optical power meter. When the reading becomes stable, record the optical power value. The optical power at this point is the actual mean launched power of the port. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4.
1 Commissioning
Repeat steps b and c several times (more than three times as recommended), and measure and record the maximum and minimum values of the mean launched power. Check whether the tested mean launched power meets technical requirements. NOTE
You can run the display port state command to query the mean launched power of the port. When the bandwidth is high, the tested value is more accurate and stable. When the bandwidth is low, the tested value is not accurate and is not recommended for use.
Step 2 Test the mean launched power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the ONT side. 1.
Set the ONT in the burst mode to work in the continuous mode through the OMCI channel.
2.
Disconnect the ONT from the ODN. Then, connect one end of the patch cord to the port to be tested, and the other end to the optical power meter, as shown in Figure 1-41. Figure 1-41 Testing the mean launched power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the ONT side
NOTE
The ports of the optical power meter may be of different specifications. Therefore, select a patch cord with matched connectors.
3.
Set the test wavelength of the optical power meter to be the same as the operating wavelength of the port to be tested.
4.
Observe the reading of the optical power meter. When the reading becomes stable, record the optical power value. The optical power at this point is the actual mean launched power of the port.
5.
Repeat steps b and c several times (more than three times as recommended), and measure and record the maximum and minimum values of the mean launched power. Check whether the tested mean launched power meets technical requirements. NOTE
You can run the display ont optical-info command to query the mean launched power of the port. When the bandwidth is high, the tested value is more accurate and stable. When the bandwidth is low, the tested value is not accurate and is not recommended for use.
----End
Result l
The tested mean launched power complies with the technical specifications of the optical port. For technical specifications of an optical port, see "Performance specifications".
l
If the tested mean launched power does not comply with the technical specifications of the optical port, contact the local Huawei technical support engineers to replace the optical transceiver. Then perform the test again.
Performance specifications GPON Port Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-67
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Table 1-20 Specifications of the GPON port (Class B+) Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
Transmit (Tx): 2.488 Gbit/s Receive (Rx): 1.244 Gbit/s
Port type
SC/PC
Maximum transmission distance
20 km
Cable type
Single-mode optical fiber
Standard compliance
ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
Central wavelength
Transmit (Tx): 1490 nm Receive (Rx): 1310 nm
Transmit optical power
1.5 dBm to 5.0 dBm
Extinction ratio
10 dB
Maximum receive sensitivity
-28 dBm
Overload optical power
-8 dBm
Table 1-21 Specifications of the GPON port (Class C+) Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
Transmit (Tx): 2.488 Gbit/s Receive (Rx): 1.244 Gbit/s
Port type
SC/PC
Maximum transmission distance
20 km
Cable type
Single-mode optical fiber
Standard compliance
ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS C+
Central wavelength
Transmit (Tx): 1490 nm Receive (Rx): 1310 nm
Transmit optical power
3.0 dBm to 7.0 dBm
Extinction ratio
10 dB
Maximum receive sensitivity
-30 dBm
Overload optical power
-8 dBm
P2P FE Port
1-68
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
100 Mbit/s
Port type
LC/PC
Maximum transmission distance
15 km
Cable type
Optical fiber
Central wavelength
Transmit (Tx): 1550 nm Receive (Rx): 1310 nm
Transmit optical power
-15 dBm to -8 dBm
Extinction ratio
8.5 dB (min.)
Maximum receive sensitivity
-32 dBm
Standard compliance
ITU-T G.957
1.3.12.2 Testing the Mean Launched Power of a Two-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port When a two-fiber bi-directional optical port needs commissioning, or when the optical port has error bits or its services are interrupted, the mean launched power of the port can be tested for determining whether the optical signal transmitter is normal.
Impact on System When a two-fiber bi-directional optical port is under the mean launched power test, the optical port cannot carry any service.
Tools, Meters, and Materials l
Optical power meter
l
Patch cords with different connectors (selected according to the actual requirements)
Precautions
DANGER Take precautions for personal safety. Do not look at the laser transmit port or the optical fiber connector on the optical interface board without wearing protective glasses. l
Use the dBm unit of the optical power meter for the test.
l
The optical fiber connector and the optical transceiver on the front panel of the optical interface board must be clean and properly connected.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-69
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning l
Use a patch cord as short as possible for the test. The length is generally within 1 m. It is recommended that a new patch cord be used.
l
Do not bend the optical fiber. Otherwise, the test result may be inaccurate.
Procedure Step 1 Connect one end of the patch cord to the Tx end of the port to be tested, and the other end to the optical power meter, as shown in Figure 1-42. Figure 1-42 Testing the mean launched power of the two-fiber bi-directional optical port
NOTE
The ports of the optical power meter may be of different specifications. Therefore, select a patch cord with matched connectors.
Step 2 Set the test wavelength of the optical power meter to be the same as the operating wavelength of the port to be tested. Step 3 Observe the reading of the optical power meter. When the reading becomes stable, record the optical power value. The optical power at this point is the actual mean launched power of the port. Step 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 several times (more than three times as recommended), and measure and record the maximum and minimum values of the mean launched power. Check whether the tested mean launched power meets technical requirements. NOTE
You can run the display port ddm-info command to query the mean launched power of the port. When the bandwidth is high, the tested value is more accurate and stable. When the bandwidth is low, the tested value is not accurate and is not recommended for use.
----End
1-70
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Result l
The tested mean launched power complies with the technical specifications of the optical port. For technical specifications of an optical port, see "Performance specifications".
l
If the tested mean launched power does not comply with the technical specifications of the optical port, contact the local Huawei technical support engineers to replace the optical transceiver. Then perform the test again.
Performance specifications 100Base-Fx Port Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
Full-duplex 100 Mbit/s
Port type
LC/PC
Cable type
Optical fiber
Port mode
Multi-mode
Single-mode
Maximum transmission distance
2 km
15 km
Central wavelength
1310 nm
1310 nm
Transmit optical power
-19 dBm to -14 dBm
-15 dBm to -8 dBm
Extinction ratio
8 dB
8.2 dB
Maximum receive sensitivity
-30 dBm
-28 dBm
Standard compliance
IEEE 802.3u
1000Base-Sx Port
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
1.25 Gbit/s
Port type
LC/PC
Cable type
Optical fiber
Maximum transmission distance
500 m over a 50 μm/125 μm multi-mode optical fiber
Standard compliance
IEEE 802.3z
Central wavelength
850 nm
Transmit optical power
-9.5 dBm to 0 dBm
Extinction ratio
9.0 dB
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-71
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Parameter
Specification
Maximum receive sensitivity
-17 dBm
1000Base-Lx Port Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
1.25 Gbit/s
Port type
LC/PC
Optical fiber used and maximum transmission distance
10 km over a 9 μm/125 μm single-mode optical fiber
Standard compliance
IEEE 802.3z
Central wavelength
1310 nm
Transmit optical power
-9.0 dBm to -3.0 dBm
Extinction ratio
9.0 dB
Maximum receive sensitivity
-20 dBm
1.3.12.3 Testing the Actual Input Power of a One-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port When a one-fiber bi-directional optical port needs commissioning, or when the optical port has error bits or its services are interrupted, the actual input power (including the minimum sensitivity and minimum overload point) of the port can be tested for determining whether the optical signal receiver is normal.
Impact on System When a one-fiber bi-directional optical port is under the actual input power test, the optical port cannot carry any service.
Tools, Meters, and Materials
1-72
l
Burst optical power meter
l
Optical attenuator
l
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer
l
Data network performance analyzer
l
Patch cords with different connectors (selected according to the actual requirements)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Precautions
DANGER Take precautions for personal safety. Do not look at the laser transmit port or the optical fiber connector on the optical interface board without wearing protective glasses. l
Use the dBm unit of the optical power meter for the test.
l
The optical power meter used for the test must be the burst optical power meter.
l
The optical fiber connector and the optical transceiver on the front panel of the optical interface board must be clean and properly connected.
l
Use a patch cord as short as possible for the test. The length is generally within 1 m. It is recommended that a new patch cord be used.
l
Do not bend the optical fiber. Otherwise, the test result may be inaccurate.
Procedure Step 1 Test the actual input power (including the minimum sensitivity and minimum overload point) of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the OLT side. 1.
Connect the devices according to Figure 1-43. Figure 1-43 Testing the actual input power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the OLT side
2.
Configure a data link on the device.
3.
Set the test wavelength of the burst optical power meter to be the same as the operating wavelength of the port to be tested.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-73
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning NOTE
For example, in the case of the GPON access, the operating wavelength should be set to 1310 nm.
4.
Use the data network performance analyzer to transmit packets to the OLT.
5.
Increase the optical attenuation value gradually. When a small number of packets are lost, decrease the optical attenuation value gradually. Stop adjusting the optical attenuation when no packets are lost in a short period. Adjust the optical attenuation gently and slowly.
6.
Read and record the input optical power (the actual minimum sensitivity) from the burst optical power meter.
7.
Decrease the optical attenuation value gradually. When a small number of packets are lost, increase the optical attenuation value gradually. Stop adjusting the optical attenuation when no packets are lost in a short period. Adjust the optical attenuation gently and slowly.
8.
Read and record the input optical power (the actual minimum overload point) from the burst optical power meter.
9.
Repeat steps e–h (more than three times are recommended) and check whether the tested values meet the technical requirements. NOTE
The actual input power (tested value, that is, the actual minimum sensitivity and the actual minimum overload point) of the tested port should comply with the following: minimum sensitivity + 3 dB ≤ actual input power ≤ minimum overload point – 5 dB.
Step 2 Test the actual input power (including the minimum sensitivity and minimum overload point) of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the ONT side. 1.
Connect the devices according to Figure 1-44. Figure 1-44 Testing the actual input power of the one-fiber bi-directional optical port on the ONT side
1-74
2.
Configure a data link on the device.
3.
Set the test wavelength of the burst optical power meter to be the same as the operating wavelength of the port to be tested. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
NOTE
For example, in the case of the GPON access, the operating wavelength should be set to 1490 nm.
4.
Use the data network performance analyzer to transmit packets to the OLT.
5.
Increase the optical attenuation value gradually. When a small number of packets are lost, decrease the optical attenuation value gradually. Stop adjusting the optical attenuation when no packets are lost in a short period. Adjust the optical attenuation gently and slowly.
6.
Read and record the input optical power (the actual minimum sensitivity) from the burst optical power meter.
7.
Decrease the optical attenuation value gradually. When a small number of packets are lost, increase the optical attenuation value gradually. Stop adjusting the optical attenuation until no packets are lost in a short period. Adjust the optical attenuation gently and slowly.
8.
Read and record the input optical power (the actual minimum overload point) from the burst optical power meter.
9.
Repeat steps e–h (more than three times are recommended) and check whether the tested value meets the technical requirements. NOTE
The actual input power of the tested port should comply with the following: minimum sensitivity + 3 dB ≤ actual input power ≤ minimum overload point – 5 dB.
----End
Result l
The tested actual input power complies with the technical specifications of the optical port. For technical specifications of an optical port, see "Performance specifications".
l
If the tested actual input power does not comply with the technical specifications of the optical port, contact the local Huawei technical support engineers to replace the optical transceiver. Then perform the test again.
Performance specifications GPON Port Table 1-22 Specifications of the GPON port (Class B+) Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
Transmit (Tx): 2.488 Gbit/s Receive (Rx): 1.244 Gbit/s
Port type
SC/PC
Maximum transmission distance
20 km
Cable type
Single-mode optical fiber
Standard compliance
ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS B+
Central wavelength
Transmit (Tx): 1490 nm Receive (Rx): 1310 nm
Transmit optical power Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
1.5 dBm to 5.0 dBm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-75
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Extinction ratio
10 dB
Maximum receive sensitivity
-28 dBm
Overload optical power
-8 dBm
Table 1-23 Specifications of the GPON port (Class C+) Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
Transmit (Tx): 2.488 Gbit/s Receive (Rx): 1.244 Gbit/s
Port type
SC/PC
Maximum transmission distance
20 km
Cable type
Single-mode optical fiber
Standard compliance
ITU-T G.984.2 CLASS C+
Central wavelength
Transmit (Tx): 1490 nm Receive (Rx): 1310 nm
Transmit optical power
3.0 dBm to 7.0 dBm
Extinction ratio
10 dB
Maximum receive sensitivity
-30 dBm
Overload optical power
-8 dBm
P2P FE Port Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
100 Mbit/s
Port type
LC/PC
Maximum transmission distance
15 km
Cable type
Optical fiber
Central wavelength
Transmit (Tx): 1550 nm Receive (Rx): 1310 nm
1-76
Transmit optical power
-15 dBm to -8 dBm
Extinction ratio
8.5 dB (min.)
Maximum receive sensitivity
-32 dBm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Standard compliance
1 Commissioning
ITU-T G.957
Test meters l
Burst optical power meter: It can test the upstream and downstream optical power concurrently. During the test, the normal connection line need not be disconnected. In external tests, this type of optical power meter is usually used. The burst optical power meter usually tests the optical power at the ingress of optical signals and displays the result on the panel. In fact, the power of optical signals attenuates when the signals enter and exit the optical power meter, which affects the test result. In actual external tests, however, this factor can be ignored.
l
Optical attenuator: It is a meter through which the attenuation of an optical line can be manually adjusted at the precision of 0.05 dB. During the test, if the tested values are found to fluctuate obviously, check the optical attenuator immediately. As shown by test experience, after an optical attenuator is used for a long time, the tested values may fluctuate, to a maximum range from -0.7 dB to +0.7 dB. With such a tolerance, a maximum of 1.4 dB tolerance may be caused to the test result.
l
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer: It is a meter with the multiplexing and demultiplexing functions. To aid understanding, these two functions are displayed by two meter icons in a networking diagram.
1.3.12.4 Testing the Actual Input Power of a Two-Fiber Bi-Directional Optical Port When a two-fiber bi-directional optical port needs commissioning, or when the optical port has error bits or its services are interrupted, the actual input power (including the minimum sensitivity and minimum overload point) of the port can be tested for determining whether the optical signal receiver is normal.
Impact on System When a two-fiber bi-directional optical port is under the actual input power test, the optical port cannot carry any service.
Tools, Meters, and Materials l
Burst optical power meter
l
Optical attenuator
l
Data network performance analyzer
l
Patch cords with different connectors (selected according to the actual requirements)
Precautions
DANGER Take precautions for personal safety. Do not look at the laser transmit port or the optical fiber connector on the optical interface board without wearing protective glasses.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-77
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning l
Use the dBm unit of the optical power meter for the test.
l
The optical power meter used for the test must be the burst optical power meter.
l
The optical fiber connector and the optical transceiver on the front panel of the optical interface board must be clean and properly connected.
l
Use a patch cord as short as possible for the test. The length is generally within 1 m. It is recommended that a new patch cord be used.
l
Do not bend the optical fiber. Otherwise, the test result may be inaccurate.
Procedure Step 1 Connect the devices according to Figure 1-45. Figure 1-45 Testing the actual input power of the two-fiber bi-directional optical port
Step 2 Configure a data link on the device. Step 3 Set the test wavelength of the burst optical power meter to be the same as the operating wavelength of the port to be tested. Step 4 Use the data network performance analyzer to transmit packets to the OLT. Step 5 Increase the optical attenuation value gradually. When a small number of packets are lost, decrease the optical attenuation value gradually. Stop adjusting the optical attenuation when no packets are lost in a short period. Adjust the optical attenuation gently and slowly. Step 6 Read and record the input optical power (the actual minimum sensitivity) from the burst optical power meter. Step 7 Decrease the optical attenuation value gradually. When a small number of packets are lost, increase the optical attenuation value gradually. Stop adjusting the optical attenuation when no packets are lost in a short period. Adjust the optical attenuation gently and slowly. Step 8 Read and record the input optical power (the actual minimum overload point) from the burst optical power meter. Step 9 Repeat steps 5–8 (more than three times are recommended) and check whether the tested input optical power meets the technical requirements. 1-78
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
NOTE
l
You can run the display port ddm-info command to query the actual input power of the port. When the bandwidth is high, the tested value is more accurate and stable. When the bandwidth is low, the tested value is not accurate and is not recommended for use.
l
The actual input power (tested value, that is, the actual minimum sensitivity and the actual minimum overload point) of the tested port should comply with the following: minimum sensitivity + 3 dB ≤ actual input power ≤ minimum overload point – 5 dB.
----End
Result l
The tested actual input power complies with the technical specifications of the optical port. For technical specifications of an optical port, see "Performance specifications".
l
If the tested actual input power does not comply with the technical specifications of the optical port, contact the local Huawei technical support engineers to replace the optical transceiver. Then perform the test again.
Performance specifications 100Base-Fx Port Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
Full-duplex 100 Mbit/s
Port type
LC/PC
Cable type
Optical fiber
Port mode
Multi-mode
Single-mode
Maximum transmission distance
2 km
15 km
Central wavelength
1310 nm
1310 nm
Transmit optical power
-19 dBm to -14 dBm
-15 dBm to -8 dBm
Extinction ratio
8 dB
8.2 dB
Maximum receive sensitivity
-30 dBm
-28 dBm
Standard compliance
IEEE 802.3u
1000Base-Sx Port
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
1.25 Gbit/s
Port type
LC/PC
Cable type
Optical fiber Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-79
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Parameter
Specification
Maximum transmission distance
500 m over a 50 μm/125 μm multi-mode optical fiber
Standard compliance
IEEE 802.3z
Central wavelength
850 nm
Transmit optical power
-9.5 dBm to 0 dBm
Extinction ratio
9.0 dB
Maximum receive sensitivity
-17 dBm
1000Base-Lx Port Parameter
Specification
Transmission rate
1.25 Gbit/s
Port type
LC/PC
Optical fiber used and maximum transmission distance
10 km over a 9 μm/125 μm single-mode optical fiber
Standard compliance
IEEE 802.3z
Central wavelength
1310 nm
Transmit optical power
-9.0 dBm to -3.0 dBm
Extinction ratio
9.0 dB
Maximum receive sensitivity
-20 dBm
Test meters
1-80
l
Burst optical power meter: It can test the upstream and downstream optical power concurrently. During the test, the normal connection line need not be disconnected. In external tests, this type of optical power meter is usually used. The burst optical power meter usually tests the optical power at the ingress of optical signals and displays the result on the panel. In fact, the power of optical signals attenuates when the signals enter and exit the optical power meter, which affects the test result. In actual external tests, however, this factor can be ignored.
l
Optical attenuator: It is a meter through which the attenuation of an optical line can be manually adjusted at the precision of 0.05 dB. During the test, if the tested values are found to fluctuate obviously, check the optical attenuator immediately. As shown by test experience, after an optical attenuator is used for a long time, the tested values may fluctuate, to a maximum range from -0.7 dB to 0.7 dB. With such a tolerance, a maximum of 1.4 dB tolerance may be caused to the test result.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide l
1 Commissioning
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer: It is a meter with the multiplexing and demultiplexing functions. To aid understanding, these two functions are displayed by two meter icons in a networking diagram.
1.3.13 Changing the System Name This topic describes how to customize the useful system name to differentiate MA5600Ts. This facilitates the management of the MA5600T.
Context l
By default, the device name is MA5600T.
l
The system name takes effect immediately after change.
l
After the system name is changed, the CLI prompt character changes to the new name accordingly.
Procedure Step 1 Run the sysname command to set the system name. ----End
Result The CLI prompt character changes to the system name that is set after the command is executed successfully.
Example To name the first MA5600T at Shenzhen office in China shenzhen_MA5600T_A, do as follows: huawei(config)#sysname shenzhen_MA5600T_A shenzhen_MA5600T_A(config)#
1.3.14 Configuring a System User For logging in to, configuring, and managing the MA5600T, system users of different attributes need to be added. This topic describes how to add a system user and modify the user attributes. 1.3.14.1 Adding a System User This topic describes how to add system users of different attributes for logging in to, configuring, and managing the MA5600T. This facilitates the management of the MA5600T. 1.3.14.2 Modifying the System User Attributes This topic describes how to modify the attributes of a system user, including the password, user profile, authority, permitted reenter number, and appended information in the case that the user attributes are not consistent with the current data plan.
1.3.14.1 Adding a System User This topic describes how to add system users of different attributes for logging in to, configuring, and managing the MA5600T. This facilitates the management of the MA5600T.
Prerequisite You must have the administrator authority or higher authority. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-81
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
Context l
The super user and the administrator have the authority to add a user at a lower level, that is: –
The super user can add an administrator, an operator, or a common user.
–
The administrator can add only an operator or a common user.
l
The user name must be unique, and cannot be all or online.
l
The super user and the administrator can add multiple users consecutively. Up to 127 (total 128 including the root user) users can be added to the system.
l
The system supports up to 10 concurrently online terminal users.
When adding a user, you must configure the user attributes, including the user account, password, profile, authority, permitted reenter number, and appended information. Table 1-24 lists the user attributes. Table 1-24 User attributes User Attribute
Description
Account
An account is also called a user name and consists of 6-15 printable characters. The user name is unique in the system. It cannot contain any space and is case insensitive.
Password
A password consists of 6-15 characters. It must contain at least one digit and one letter, and is case-sensitive.
User profile
The name of a user profile consists of 1-15 printable characters. A user profile includes the validity period of the user name, validity period of the password, login time, and logout time.
Authority
Users are classified into three levels: common user, operator, and administrator. NOTE According to the operation authority, users of the MA5600T are classified into four levels: common user, operator, administrator, and super user. The user at one level can add only the user at a lower level. The following lists the authority of all users. l Common users can perform basic system operations and simple query
operations. l Operators can configure the device and the services. l For the administrator and the super user, they have the following similarities
and differences: l Similarities: l Perform all configurations. l Maintain and manage the device, user account, and user authority. l Differences: l Only one super user exists in the system; however, multiple
administrators can coexist in the system. l The super user can add an administrator, but an administrator has no
authority to add the super user.
1-82
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1 Commissioning
User Attribute
Description
Permitted reenter number
The permitted reenter number determines whether a user name can be used to log in to the system from several terminals at the same time. The permitted reenter number ranges from 0 to 4, and is generally set to 1.
Appended information
Appended information is a type of additional information about the user. It consists of a string of 0-30 characters. It can be the telephone number or the address of a user.
Procedure Step 1 Run the terminal user name command to add a user that is consistent with the actual data plan. Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query the user information. ----End
Result The queried user information is the same as the actual data plan.
Example With the administrator authority, to add a common user with the account as huawei, password as test01, user profile as the default root user profile, user level as Common User, permitted reenter number as 3, and appended information as user, do as follows: huawei(config)#terminal user name User Name(length):huawei User Password(length):test01//The password is not displayed on the console. Confirm Password(length):test01//The password is not displayed on the console. User profile name( preview > watch > idle.
5-8
l
Dynamic generation mode: A program list is dynamically generated according to the programs requested by users. In this mode, the program list need not be configured or maintained; however, the functions such as program management, user multicast bandwidth management, program preview, and program prejoin are not supported.
1.
Run the igmp match mode disable command to set the dynamic generation mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
CAUTION The igmp match mode command can be executed only when the IGMP mode is disabled. 2.
Run the igmp match group command to configure the IP address range of the program group that can be dynamically generated. Users can request only the programs whose IP addresses are within the specified range.
Step 3 Configure the multicast upstream port. 1.
Run the igmp uplink-port command to configure the multicast upstream port. The packets of the multicast VLAN corresponding to the upstream port are forwarded and received by this upstream port.
2.
In the BTV mode, run the igmp uplink-port-mode command to change the mode of the multicast upstream port. By default, the port is in the default mode. In the MSTP network, the port adopts the MSTP mode. l
Default mode: If the multicast VLAN contains only one upstream port, the multicast packets that go upstream can be sent only by this port. If the multicast VLAN contains multiple upstream ports, the multicast packets that go upstream are sent by all the upstream ports.
l
MSTP mode: This mode is adopted in the MSTP network.
Step 4 Select the multicast mode. Run the igmp mode { proxy | snooping } command to select the L2 multicast mode. By default, the multicast mode is disabled. In the IGMP snooping mode, proxy can be enabled for the report packet and the leave packet. When a multicast user joins or leaves a multicast program, the MA5600T can implement IGMP proxy. IGMP snooping and IGMP proxy are controlled separately. l
Run the igmp report-proxy enable command to enable the proxy of the snooping report packet. When the first user requests to join a program, after authenticating the user, the MA5600T sends the user report packet to the network side and receives a corresponding multicast stream from the multicast router. The report packets of the users that follow the first user are not sent by the MA5600T to the network side.
l
Run the igmp leave-proxy enable command to enable the proxy of the snooping leave packet. When the last user requests to leave the program, the MA5600T sends the user leave packet to the network side to request the upper-layer device to stop sending multicast streams. The leave packets of the users that precede the last user are not sent by the MA5600T to the network side.
Step 5 Set the IGMP version. Run the igmp version{ v2 | v3 } command to set the IGMP version. By default, IGMP v3 is enabled in the system. If the upper-layer and lower-layer devices in the network are IGMP v2 devices and cannot recognize the IGMP v3 packets, run this command to change the IGMP version. IGMP v3 is compatible with IGMP v2 in packet processing. If IGMP v3 is enabled on the MA5600T and the upper-layer multicast router switches to IGMP v2, the MA5600T automatically switches to IGMP v2 when receiving the IGMP v2 packets. If the MA5600T does not receive any more IGMP v2 packets within the preset IGMP v2 timeout time, it automatically Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
switches back to IGMP v3. In the BTV mode, run the igmp proxy router timeout command to set the IGMP v2 timeout time. By default, the timeout time is 400s. Step 6 Change the priority for forwarding IGMP packets. Run the igmp priority command to change the priority for forwarding the IGMP packets by the upstream port. By default, the priority is 6 and need not be changed. l
In the IGMP proxy mode, the IGMP packets sent from the upstream port to the network side adopt the priority set through the preceding command in the multicast VLAN.
l
In the IGMP snooping mode, the IGMP packets forwarded to the network side adopt the priority of the user service stream. The priority of the service stream is set through the traffic profile.
Step 7 Check whether the configuration is correct. l
Run the display igmp config vlan command to query the attributes of the multicast VLAN.
l
Run the display igmp program vlan command to query the information about the program of the multicast VLAN.
----End
Example Assume the following configurations: VLAN 101 is created, multicast programs are configured statically, the IP address of the program is 224.1.1.1, the program bandwidth is 5000 kbit/s, the upstream port of the multicast VLAN is 0/19/0, the IGMP proxy is used, and the IGMP version is IGMP V3. To perform these configurations, do as follows: huawei(config)#vlan 101 smart huawei(config)#multicast-vlan 101 huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp match mode enable huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp program add name movie ip 224.1.1.1 sourceip 10.10.10.10 hostip 10.0.0.254 bandwidth 5000 huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp uplink-port 0/19/0 huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp mode proxy Are you sure to change IGMP mode?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp version v3
Assume the following configurations: VLAN 101 is created, multicast programs are configured dynamically, the upstream port of the multicast VLAN is 0/19/0, the IGMP proxy is used, and the IGMP version is IGMP V3. To perform these configurations, do as follows: huawei(config)#vlan 101 smart huawei(config)#multicast-vlan 101 huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp match mode disable This operation will delete all the programs in current multicast vlan Are you sure to change current match mode? (y/n)[n]: y Command is being executed, please wait... Command has been executed successfully huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp uplink-port 0/19/0 huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp mode proxy Are you sure to change IGMP mode?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp version v3
5-10
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
5.3 Configuring the Multicast GPON ONT When the MA5600T is connected with an ONT or an MDU, you need to configure the multicast interconnection data to forward the multicast traffic streams.
Prerequisite Before configuring the multicast GPON ONT, you must add the ONT correctly. For the configuration method, see Configuring the GPON ONT.
Context l
When the OLT is connected with an ONT such as the HG850a, the MA5600T manages the ONT in the OMCI mode. In this case, you need to configure the ONT line profile and the ONT service profile, configure the multicast data in the ONT service profile, and bind the profiles to the ONT to issue the multicast service.
l
When the OLT is connected with an MDU such as the MA5620G or MA5616, the MA5600T manages the MDU in the SNMP mode. In this case, you need not configure the ONT service profile. You only need to configure the multicast data on the MDU interconnected with the MA5600T to forward the multicast traffic streams.
Table 5-5 provides the multicast mode mapping between the GPON boards on the MA5600T and certain MDUs. Here, "NG" indicates that the service can be implemented and "OK" indicates that the multicast service can be implemented. l
Mode 1: OLT: IGMP snooping. MDU: IGMP snooping.
l
Mode 2: OLT: The multicast mode is off, and the multicast stream mode is transparent. MDU: Transparent.
Table 5-5 Multicast mode mapping between the GPON boards on the MA5600T and certain MDUs Board+MDU
Mode 1
Mode 2
GPBC+MA5610
NG
NG
GPBC+MA5620G
OK
OK
GPBC+MA5626G
OK
OK
GPBC+MA5652G
NG
NG
Procedure Step 1 Add an ONT line profile. For the configuration method, see Configuring the GPON ONT Line Profile. Step 2 Add an ONT service profile. Run the ont-srvprofile gpon command to add a GPON ONT service profile, and then enter the GPON ONT service profile mode. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
If the ONT management mode is the SNMP mode, you need not configure the service profile. After adding a GPON ONT service profile, directly enter the GPON ONT service profile mode to configure the related multicast data. 1.
Run the ont-port command to configure the port capability set of the ONT. The port capability set in the ONT service profile must be the same as the actual ONT capability set.
2.
Run the port vlan command to configure the port VLAN of the ONT.
3.
Configure the multicast mode of the ONT. Run the multicast mode { igmp-snooping|olt-control|unconcern } command to select the multicast mode.
4.
l
igmp-snooping: IGMP snooping obtains related information and maintains the multicast forwarding entries by listening to the IGMP packets in the communication between the user and the multicast router.
l
olt-control: It is the dynamic controllable multicast mode. A multicast forwarding entry can be created for the multicast join packet of the user only after the packet passes the authentication.
l
unconcern: It is the unconcern mode. After this mode is selected, the OLT does not limit the multicast mode, and the multicast mode on the OLT automatically matches the multicast mode on the ONT.
Configure the multicast forwarding mode. Run the multicast-forward { tag|unconcern|untag } command to configure the processing mode on the VLAN tag of the multicast data packets.
5.
l
tag: Set the multicast forwarding mode to contain the VLAN tag.
l
untag: Set the multicast forwarding mode not to contain the VLAN tag.
l
unconcern: The forwarding mode is not concerned.
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured service profile take effect. NOTE
For an ONT that is added through the ont add command or an automatically found ONT that is confirmed through the ont comfirm command, if you run the commit command after modifying the ONT line profile parameters and the ONT service profile parameters, the modified profile parameters take effect immediately.
----End
Example To configure the ONT service profile 10 of 4 ETH ports, 2 POTS ports, the VLAN of the ETH port as 10, the multicast mode as IGMP snooping, the multicast forwarding mode as unconcern, do as follows: huawei(config)#ont-srvprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#ont-port eth 4 pots 2 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#port vlan eth 1 10 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#multicast mode igmp-snooping huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#multicast-forward unconcern huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#quit
5-12
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
5.4 Configuring a Multicast User This topic describes how to configure a multicast user and the related authority to provision the multicast service.
Prerequisite Before configuring a multicast user, you need to create the service channel. The procedure is as follows: l
Configure a GPON multicast user 1.
Configure the VLAN
2.
Configure the upstream port
3.
Configure the multicast GPON ONT
4.
Configure the GPON user port
5.
Configure the GPON traffic stream
Context Add a multicast user and bind the multicast user to the multicast VLAN to create a multicast member. Bind the multicast user to an authority profile to implement multicast user authentication. Table 5-6 lists the default settings of the multicast user attributes. Table 5-6 Default settings of the multicast user attributes Parameter
Default Setting
Limitation on the number of programs that can be watched by the multicast user
Number of programs that can be watched concurrently: 8
Quick leave mode of the multicast user
mac-based
Global switch of multicast user authentication
enable
Maximum number of programs at various levels that can be watched: no limit
Procedure Step 1 In the global config mode, run the btv command to enter the BTV mode. Step 2 Configure a multicast user and the multicast user attributes. 1.
Add a multicast user. Run the igmp user add service-port command to add a multicast user.
2. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Configure the maximum number of programs that can be watched by the multicast user. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
3.
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
l
Run the igmp user add service-port index max-program { max-program-num | nolimit } command to set the maximum number of programs that can be watched by the multicast user concurrently. Up to eight programs can be watched by the multicast user concurrently. By default, the system supports eight programs.
l
Run the igmp user watch-limit service-port { hdtv | sdtv | streaming-video } command to set the maximum number of programs at various levels that can be watched by the multicast user.
Set the quick leave mode of the multicast user. Run the igmp user add service-port index quickleave { immediate | disable | macbased } command to set the quick leave mode of the multicast user. By default, the quick leave mode is the mac-based mode. l
immediate: After receiving the leave request packet of the multicast user, the system immediately deletes the multicast user from the multicast group. This setting is applicable to the scenario where only one terminal is connected to the same port or the terminal works in the IGMP proxy mode.
l
disable: After receiving the leave request packet of the multicast user, the system sends ACK packets to confirm that the multicast user leaves, and then deletes the multicast user from the multicast group.
l
mac-based: It is the quick leave mode based on the MAC address. The system detects the MAC address in the leave packet of the user. If it is the same as the MAC address in the report packet of the user, the system immediately deletes the multicast user from the multicast group. Otherwise, the system does not delete the multicast user. In this mode, the application scenario with multiple terminals is supported.
Step 3 Configure multicast user authentication. To control the authority of a multicast user, you can enable the multicast user authentication function. 1.
Configure the multicast user authentication switch. Run the igmp user add service-port index { auth | no-auth } command to configure whether to authenticate a multicast user. The default configuration is no-auth. NOTE
After configuring multicast user authentication, you need to enable the global authentication switch to make the configuration take effect. By default, the global switch of multicast user authentication is enabled. You can run the igmp proxy authorization command to change the configuration.
2.
Bind the multicast user to a global profile. The multicast user is bound to an authority profile to implement user authentication. Run the igmp user bind-profile command to bind the user to an authority profile. After the binding, the multicast user uses the authority of the programs configured in the bound profile.
Step 4 Bind the multicast user to a multicast VLAN. In the multicast VLAN mode, run the igmp multicast-vlan member command to bind the user to the multicast VLAN. Then, the user becomes a multicast member of the multicast VLAN and can demand programs configured for the multicast VLAN. Step 5 Run the display igmp user command to check whether the related information about the multicast user is correct. ----End 5-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
Example To add multicast user (port) 0/1/1 to multicast VLAN 101, enable user authentication, enable log report, set the maximum bandwidth to 10 Mbit/s, and bind the user to right profile music, do as follows: huawei(config)#service-port 100 vlan 101 gpon 0/1/1 ont 0 gemport 1 rx-cttr 2 txcttr 2 huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add service-port 100 auth log enable max-bandwidth 10240 huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile service-port 100 profile-name music huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#multicast-vlan 101 huawei(config-mvlan10)#igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 100
5.5 (Optional) Configuring the Multicast Bandwidth To limit the multicast bandwidth of a user, you can enable multicast bandwidth management, that is, connection admission control (CAC), and then control the bandwidth of a multicast user by setting the program bandwidth and the user bandwidth.
Prerequisite The program matching mode of the multicast VLAN must be the static configuration mode.
Context If the CAC function (not the dynamic ANCP CAC function) is enabled and a user demands a multicast program, the system compares the remaining bandwidth of the user (bandwidth configured for the user – total bandwidth of the online programs of the user) with the bandwidth of the multicast program. If the remaining bandwidth of the user is sufficient, the system adds the user to the multicast group. If the bandwidth is insufficient, the system does not respond to the request of the user. If the CAC function is disabled, the system does not guarantee the bandwidth of the multicast program. When the bandwidth is not guaranteed, problems such as mosaic and delay occur in the multicast program. Table 5-7 lists the default settings of the CAC parameters. Table 5-7 Default settings of the CAC parameters
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Parameter
Default Setting
Global CAC switch
enable
Bandwidth of the multicast program
5000 kbit/s
Bandwidth of the multicast user
no-limit
Bandwidth of the GPON port
716800 kbit/s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-15
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Procedure Step 1 In the global config mode, run the btv command to enter the BTV mode. Step 2 Enable the global CAC switch. By default, the global CAC switch is already enabled. You can run the igmp bandwidthCAC { enable | disable } command to change the setting. Step 3 Configure the bandwidth of the multicast program. l
Run the igmp program add ip ip-addr bandwidth command to configure the bandwidth of a single multicast program.
l
Run the igmp bandwidth port frameid/slotid/portid max-bandwidth{ bandwidth | nolimit } command to configure the program bandwidth of a physical port on a board. This command is available for only the GPON port. The default bandwidth of a port is 716800 kbit/s.
Step 4 Configure the bandwidth of the multicast user. Run the igmp user add service-port index max-bandwidth command to allocate the bandwidth that is available to the multicast user. Step 5 Check whether the multicast bandwidth configuration is correct. l
Run the display igmp config global command to check the status of the global CAC switch.
l
Run the display igmp program command to query the bandwidth of the multicast program.
l
Run the display igmp user command to query the bandwidth of the multicast user.
----End
Example To enable bandwidth management for multicast users, set the user bandwidth to 10 Mbit/s when adding multicast user 0/1/1, and configure the program bandwidth to 1 Mbit/s when adding multicast program 224.1.1.1. huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp bandwidthcAC enable huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add port 0/1/1 max-bandwidth 10240 huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#multicast-vlan 101 huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp program add ip 224.1.1.1 bandwidth 1024
5.6 (Optional) Configuring Multicast Preview Multicast preview is an advertizing method provided by carriers for ISPs. The purpose is to allow users to have an overview of a program in a controlled way. In other words, the duration, interval, and count of the user previews are controlled.
Prerequisite The program matching mode of the multicast VLAN must be the static configuration mode.
Context The difference between program preview and normal program watching is that, after the user goes online, the duration of the preview is restricted. When the duration expires, the user goes 5-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
offline. The user can request the program again only after the preview interval expires. The count by which the user can request the program within a day (the start time can be configured) is restricted by the preview count of the user. Multicast preview parameters are managed through the preview profile. One program can be bound to only one preview profile, but one preview profile can be referenced by multiple programs. Table 5-8 lists the default settings of the multicast preview parameters. Table 5-8 Default settings of the multicast preview parameters Parameter
Default Value
Global multicast preview function
enable
Preview profile
Preview profile with index 0
Preview profile parameters
Maximum preview duration: 120s Maximum preview count: 8 Minimum interval between two previews: 120s
Time for resetting the preview record
4:00:00 am
Valid duration of multicast preview
30s
Procedure Step 1 In the global config mode, run the btv command to enter the BTV mode. Step 2 Enable the global multicast preview function. By default, the global multicast preview function is enabled. You can run the igmp preview{ enable | disable } command to change the setting. Step 3 Configure the preview profile. Run the igmp preview-profile add command to configure the preview profile, and set the parameters: maximum preview duration, maximum preview count, and minimum interval between two previews. The system has a default preview profile with index 0. Step 4 Bind the program to the preview profile. In the multicast VLAN mode, run the igmp program add ip ip-addr preview-profile index command to bind the program to be previewed to the preview profile so that the program has the preview attributes as defined in the preview profile. By default, the program is bound to the preview profile with index 0. Step 5 Change the time for resetting the preview record.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-17
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Run the igmp preview auto-reset-time command to change the time for resetting the preview record. The preview record of the user remains valid within one day. On the second day, the preview record is reset. By default, the system resets the preview record at 4:00:00 a.m. Step 6 Modify the valid duration of multicast preview. Run the igmp proxy recognition-time command to modify the valid duration of multicast preview. If the actual preview duration of the user is shorter than the valid duration, the preview is not regarded as a valid one and is not added to the preview count. By default, the valid duration of multicast preview is 30s. Step 7 Run the display igmp config global command to check whether the values of the multicast preview parameters are correct. ----End
Example To enable preview of multicast programs by using the system default preview profile, do as follows: huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview enable
To enable preview of multicast programs, create preview profile 1, set the maximum preview time to 150s, the maximum preview count to 10, and apply this preview profile when adding program 224.1.1.1, do as follows: huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview enable huawei(config-btv)#igmp preview-profile add index 1 duration 150 times 10 huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#multicast-vlan 101 huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp program add ip 224.1.1.1 preview-profile 1
5.7 (Optional) Configuring Program Prejoin In program prejoin, the MA5600T receives in advance the multicast stream of a program from the upper-layer multicast router to the upstream port before a user sends a request to join a program, thus shortening the waiting time of the user for requesting the program.
Prerequisite The program matching mode of the multicast VLAN must be the static configuration mode.
Context Multicast program prejoin is the same as program request. The MA5600T plays the role of a user and sends the report packet for receiving in advance the multicast stream from the upperlayer multicast router to the upstream port. After the prejoin function is enabled, if the upper-layer multicast router does not support static multicast entry forwarding, the unsolicited report function needs to be enabled so that the user can request the program quickly. Generally, the upper-layer multicast router processes the user request by responding to the group-specific query and the general query. Table 5-9 lists the default settings of the prejoin parameters. 5-18
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
Table 5-9 Default settings of the prejoin parameters Parameter
Default Value
Prejoin function
disable
Unsolicited report of IGMP packets
disable
Procedure Step 1 Enable the prejoin function. Run the igmp program add ip ip-addr prejoin enable command to enable the prejoin function of a program. By default, the prejoin function is disabled. Step 2 After the prejoin function is enabled, if the upper-layer multicast router does not support static multicast entry forwarding, the unsolicited report function needs to be enabled for IGMP packets. l
Run the igmp program add ip ip-addr unsolicited enable command to enable the unsolicited report function for IGMP packets. By default, the unsolicited report function is disabled.
l
Run the igmp unsolicited-report interval command to modify the interval for unsolicitedly reporting IGMP packets. By default, the interval is 10s.
Step 3 Check whether the prejoin function is configured correctly. l
Run the display igmp program command to query the status of the prejoin function and the unsolicited report function.
l
Run the display igmp config vlan command to query the interval for unsolicitedly reporting IGMP packets.
----End
Example To enable the prejoin function when adding program 224.1.1.1, do as follows: huawei(config-mvlan101)#igmp program add ip 224.1.1.1 prejoin enable
5.8 (Optional) Configuring the Multicast Logging Function Multicast log serves as a criterion for carriers to evaluate the viewership of multicast programs.
Prerequisite If the syslog is used for reporting multicast logs, the syslog server must be properly configured.
Context Multicast logs have three control levels: multicast VLAN level, multicast user level, and multicast program level. The system generates logs only when the logging functions at the three levels are enabled. When the user stays online for longer than the valid time for generating logs, the system generates logs in any of the following conditions: Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-19
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON) l
The user goes offline naturally, by force, or abnormally.
l
The user is blocked or deleted.
l
The program is deleted.
l
The program priority is changed.
l
The upstream port to which the program is bound changes.
l
The VLAN of the upstream port to which the program is bound changes.
l
The right mode is switched.
l
The user preview times out.
l
The IGMP mode is switched.
l
The bandwidth CAC is not passed.
The system supports up to 32K logs. When the user goes online, the system records only the online date and time. The system generates a complete log only when the user goes offline. The MA5600T can report the multicast log to the log server in the syslog mode and the call detailed record (CDR) mode. By default, the MA5600T reports the log in the syslog mode. l
Syslog mode: Logs are reported to the syslog server in the form of a single log.
l
CDR mode: Logs are reported to the log server in the form of a log file (.cvs). One log file contains multiple logs.
Table 5-10 lists the default settings of the multicast logging parameters. Table 5-10 Default settings of the multicast logging parameters
5-20
Parameter
Default Value
Report mode of the multicast log
Syslog mode
Logging function at the multicast VLAN level
enable
Logging function at the multicast user level
enable
Logging function at the multicast program level
enable
Interval for automatically logging
2 hours
Minimum online duration for generating a valid log
30s
Parameters of the log report in the CDR mode
Report interval: 600s Maximum number of logs that can be reported each time: 200
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
Procedure l
Configure the parameters of the logging function of the multicast host. 1.
Enable the multicast logging functions. Multicast logs have three control levels: multicast VLAN level, multicast user level, and multicast program level. The system generates logs only when the logging functions at the three levels are enabled. By default, the three functions are enabled.
2.
–
In the BTV mode,run the igmp log { enable | disable } command to configure the logging function at the multicast VLAN level.
–
In the BTV mode,Run the igmp user add service-port index log { enable | disable } command to configure the logging function at the multicast user level.
–
In the Multicast VLAN mode,run the igmp program add ip ip-addr log { enable | disable } command to configure the logging function at the multicast program level.
Modify the interval for automatically logging. In the BTV mode,run the igmp proxy log-interval command to modify the interval for automatically logging. When the user stays online for a long time, the system generates logs at the preset interval. This is to prevent the problem that a log is not generated when the user leaves the multicast group without sending a leave packet, which can affect the accounting. By default, the interval is two hours.
3.
Modify the minimum online duration for generating a valid log. In the BTV mode,run the igmp proxy recognition-time command to modify the minimum online duration for generating a valid log. If the user is in a multicast group (such as to preview a program) for shorter than the preset duration, the user operation is not regarded as a valid one and a log is not generated. A log is generated only when a user stays online for longer than the specified duration. By default, the minimum online duration is 30s.
l
Configure the function of CDR-mode log report. 1.
Configure the multicast log server and the data transmission mode for the CDR-mode log report. Run the file-server auto-backup cdr command to configure the active and standby multicast log servers.
2.
Enable the function of CDR-mode log report. In the BTV mode,run the igmp cdr { enable | disable } command to configure the function of CDR-mode log report. After the function is enabled, the MA5600T reports the local multicast logs to the multicast log server in the form of a file. After the function is disabled, the MA5600T reports each single log to the syslog server in the default syslog mode.
3.
4. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Configure the parameters of the log report in the CDR mode. –
In the BTV mode,run the igmp cdr-interval command to set the report interval. By default, the interval is 600s.
–
In the BTV mode,run the igmp cdr-number command to set the maximum number of logs that can be reported each time. When the number of the multicast logs in the CDR file reaches the preset value, the MA5600T reports the logs. By default, the maximum number is 200.
Check whether the configuration is correct. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-21
5 Configuring the Multicast Service (xPON)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
–
Run the display file-server command to query the configuration of the CDR multicast log server.
–
Run the display igmp config global command to query the status and other parameters of the function of CDR-mode log report.
----End
Example To configure the multicast log to be reported to log server 10.10.10.1 in the CDR mode, use the TFTP transmission mode, and set the password to 1234, do as follows: huawei(config)#file-server auto-backup cdr primary 10.10.10.1 tftp 1234 huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp cdr enable
5-22
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
Configuring Redundancy Backup
About This Chapter The MA5600T provides the powerful redundancy backup mechanism. Redundancy or backup implements the high reliability and self-healing capability of the system, which maximally preserves the services provided by carriers and network stability of customers, and minimizes the loss in case of an accident.
Background Information In the carrier-class operation, to ensure that the system still works in the normal state in case of certain accidents or disasters, generally, add redundancy (backup) devices or parts to enhance the reliability of the entire system. The MA5600T supports the following redundancy backup modes: l
LACP aggregation for uplink ethernet port
l
Uplink redundancy backup
l
Smart link redundancy backup
l
MPLS service board redundancy backup
l
PON port redundancy backup
l
Type B dual homing protection switching
6.1 Configuring the Uplink Redundancy Backup This topic describes how to configure the uplink aggregation group or uplink protection group to improve the reliability of service transmission. 6.2 Configuring the Smart Link Redundancy Backup The smart link is a solution that is applied in the network with dual uplinks and provides reliable and efficient backup and quick switching for the dual uplinks. The solution provides high reliability for carriers' network. 6.3 Configuring the MPLS Service Board Redundancy Backup This topic describes how to configure 1+1 redundancy backup for the MPLS service board. In this way, when the MPLS service board is faulty, the service is not affected. 6.4 Configuring the GPON Port Redundancy Backup Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-1
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
This topic describes how to configure 1+1 redundancy backup for the GPON service board. In this way, when the GPON service board is faulty, the service is not affected. 6.5 Configuring Type B Dual Homing Protection Switching This topic describes how to configure GPON ports on two OLT devices to back up each other. When the GPON port on an OLT is faulty, the system automatically switches the service to the GPON board on the other OLT, thus implementing protection for two active ports on two devices in case of an optical fiber fault. 6.6 Configuring the Switchover of the Protect Group This topic describes how to configure the ARP detection between the MA5600T and the BRAS. When the active uplink in the dual uplinks of the MA5600T is faulty, the service data can be automatically switched to the protection uplink, thus implementing the switchover between protect group of upstream ports on the MA5600T to ensure the normal running of the service.
6-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
6.1 Configuring the Uplink Redundancy Backup This topic describes how to configure the uplink aggregation group or uplink protection group to improve the reliability of service transmission.
Background Information Redundancy backup for the uplink includes the following information: l
Uplink aggregation group: Aggregate multiple Ethernet ports as an aggregation group to increase the bandwidth and balance the inbound and outbound load of each member. In addition, the ports in an aggregation group back up each other, which enhance the link security. NOTE
1. The ETH board and GIU slot support the configuration of the aggregation group. 2. Inter-board aggregation is supported between two GIU slots. The ETH board, however, does not support inter-board aggregation. l
Upstream port protection group: An upstream port protection group contains a working port and a protection group. In the normal state, the working port carries services. When the link of the working port fails, the system automatically switches the service on the working port to the protect port to ensure normal service transmission and to protect the uplink. NOTE
A protection group works in either of the following modes: 1. Port status detection mode. l
Two ports of the protection group or the transmit ports on two boards are enabled. You can determine whether to perform a switchover according to the port status.
l
When the number of ports that are in the up state on the standby board is larger than the number of ports that are in the up state on the active board, a switchover is triggered.
2. Time delay detection mode. l
Only one transmit port of the protection group is enabled, and the other is disabled.
l
When the enabled transmit port is in the down state, disable the transmit port and enable the other transmit port.
l
If the second port is in the up state, a switchover is performed. Otherwise, the detection continues.
Procedure l
Configure redundancy backup for the uplink by configuring an aggregation group. 1.
Create an Ethernet port aggregation group. Run the link-aggregation command to add multiple upstream Ethernet ports to the same aggregation group to implement protection and load balancing between ports. When configuring port aggregation, note that the GIU slot supports inter-board aggregation. When you run the link-aggregation command, if frameid/slotid is entered twice, inter-board aggregation is configured; if frameid/slotid is entered only once, intra-board aggregation is configured.
2. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
(Optional) Add members to the aggregation group. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-3
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
Run the link-aggregation add-member command to add an Ethernet port to an existing aggregation port to increase the bandwidth of the aggregation port and improves the link reliability. NOTE
This step is optional and is recommended if you need to further increase the bandwidth of an aggregation group or improve the link reliability.
3.
Query the information about the aggregation group. Run the display link-aggregation command to query the types, number, and working modes of aggregated Ethernet ports.
l
Configure redundancy backup for the uplink by configuring an upstream port protection group. 1.
Create an upstream port protection group. In the protect mode, run the protect-group command to create an upstream port protection group. After the protection group is configured successfully, the system switches the service over to the standby port to protect the uplink if the connection between the active port and the upper-layer device is broken. When running the protect-group to create a protection group, if frameid/slotid/ portid is entered, a port-level protection group is created; if frameid/slotid is entered, a board-level protection group is created. NOTE
1. The GIU slot does not support the board-level protection group. 2. The uplink protection group of the GIU slot can work in only the timedelay detection mode.
2.
Query the information about the protection group. Run the display protect-group command to query the information about the protection group and all the members in the protection group.
----End
Example Assume the following configurations: The MA5600T transmits services upstream through the GIU slot, upstream ports 0/19/0 and 0/19/1 on the same GIU slot are configured as an upstream port aggregation group, packets are distributed to the member ports of the aggregation group according to the source MAC address, and the working mode is the LACP static aggregation mode. To perform these configurations, do as follows: huawei(config)#link-aggregation 0/19 0-1 egress-ingress workmode lacp-static
Assume the following configurations: The MA5600T transmits services upstream through the GIU slot, upstream ports 0/19/0 and 0/19/1 on the same GIU slot are configured as an interboard aggregation group, packets are distributed to the member ports of the aggregation group according to the source MAC address, and the working mode is the LACP static aggregation mode. To perform these configurations, do as follows: huawei(config)#link-aggregation 0/19 0 0/20 0 egress-ingress workmode lacp-static
Assume the following configurations: The MA5600T transmits services upstream through the GIU slot, upstream ports 0/19/0 and 0/19/1 on the same GIU slot are configured as an upstream port protection group, port 0/19/0 functions as the active port, port 0/19/1 functions as the protection port, the working mode is the delay detection mode, and enable the protection group function. To perform these configurations, do as follows: 6-4
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
huawei(config-protect)#protect-group first 0/19/0 second 0/19/1 eth workmode timedelay enable
Assume the following configurations: The MA5600T transmits services upstream through the GIU slot, the ports on the active and standby GIU slots are configured as a inter-board protection group, the port in slot 0/19 functions as the active port, the port in 0/20 functions as the protection port, the working mode is the delay detection mode, and the protection group function is enabled. To perform these configurations, do as follows: huawei(config-protect)#protect-group first 0/19 second 0/20 eth workmode timedelay enable
6.2 Configuring the Smart Link Redundancy Backup The smart link is a solution that is applied in the network with dual uplinks and provides reliable and efficient backup and quick switching for the dual uplinks. The solution provides high reliability for carriers' network.
Background Information Thus, the smart link solution is applied to the access network. With this solution, redundancy backup for active and standby links and quick switching are implemented for a dual homing network. This ensures high reliability and quick convergence. Meanwhile, as a supplementary to the smart link solution, the monitor link solution is introduced to monitor uplinks. This improves the backup function of the smart link solution. The smart link and monitor link feature, which is applied to the scenario of a network with dual uplinks (the network is connected to the upstream IP network through dual uplinks), is related to the OLT and the upstream network device. The upstream network device such as the router must support the smart link and monitor link feature. NOTE
The smart link and monitor link feature is put forth by Huawei. Currently, only Huawei devices support this technology.
Smart link-related concepts: l
Smart link protection group A smart link group contains up to two ports, namely one master port and one slave port. In normal conditions, only one port is in the active state, and the other port is blocked and in the standby state. When the port in the active state fails, the smart link group automatically blocks the port, and switches the previously standby port to the active state.
l
Master port The master port, which is also called the work port, is a port role in a smart link group. When both ports are in the standby state, the master port takes priority to switch to the active state.
l
Slave port The slave port, which is also called the protection port, is a port role in the smart link group. When both ports are in the standby state, the master is prevailed upon to switch to the active state, and the slave port remains in the standby state.
l
Flush packet After link switching occurs on the smart link group, the original forwarding entry is not applicable to the network with new topology, and the upstream convergence device needs to update the MAC and ARP entries. In this case, the smart link group notifies the other
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-5
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
devices in the network of updating the address table through sending the notification packet. This notification packet is the flush packet. Monitor link-related concepts: l
Monitor link group A monitor link group is composed of one uplink and several downlinks.
l
Uplink When the uplink in a monitor link group fails, it indicates that the monitor link group fails. In this case, the downlinks in the monitor link group will be blocked by force.
l
Downlink When a downlink in a monitor link group fails, it does not affect the uplink or the other downlinks.
A smart link can work in either the active/standby mode or the load balancing mode. The differences are as follows: l
In the active/standby mode, both ports are enabled. Only the master port is in the active state and can forward data. The slave port is blocked and is in the standby state.
l
In the load balancing mode, both ports are enabled. If both ports work in the normal state, the data is forwarded through both ports, implementing load balancing.
Procedure Step 1 Configure a smart link protection group. 1.
Run the protect-group command to create a smart link protection group. The protection group works in either the active/standby mode or the load balancing mode. NOTE
When configuring a smart link protection group, set the protected object to eth-nni-port. Working modes of other types do not support the smart link feature.
2.
Run the protect-group member command to add members to a smart link protection group. When adding members to the protection group, add a working member, and then add a protection member.
3.
Run the protect-group enable command to enable the smart link protection group. After a protection group is created, the protection group is in the disabled state by default. You should enable the protection group to make the configuration take effect.
4.
Query the information about the protection group. Run the display protect-group command to query the information about the protection group and all the members in the protection group.
Step 2 Configure the flush packet sending mode. After service switching occurs on a protection group, the original forwarding entry is not applicable to the new network, and the entire network needs to update the MAC and ARP entries. In this case, the protection group sends flush packets to other devices to notify them of updating the MAC and ARP entries. 1.
Run the flush send command to configure the flush packet sending parameters of the protection group, including the control VLAN and the password. a.
6-6
If the flush packet sending parameters are not configured, no flush packet is sent when switching occurs on the protection group. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
2.
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
b.
If the protection group is not in the control VLAN, no flush packet is sent.
c.
The peer device must support receiving flush packets, and the flush packet receiving function of the corresponding port must be enabled.
Run the display flush receive command to query the port that receives flush packets and the flush packet receiving parameters.
Step 3 (Optional) Configure a monitor link group. Generally, the monitor link is used with the smart link to monitor the uplink, thus perfecting the smart link redundancy backup. NOTE
1. Generally, the monitor link group is configured on the upper-layer device (such as a router) that is interconnected with the OLT, subtended to the smart link protection group. 2. You need to configure the monitor link on the MA5600T only when the MA5600T functions as the upperlayer device that is interconnected with the OLT, thus monitoring the uplink of the subtended OLT. Otherwise, the configuration is meaningless.
1.
Run the monitor-link group command to create a monitor link group, and enter the monitor link group mode. A monitor link group consists of one upstream port and multiple downstream ports. When the upstream port is faulty, the downstream ports are disabled. Thus, the downstream devices can detect the link fault and switch the services to a normal link.
2.
3.
Run the member port command to add members to a monitor link group. l
The uplink of a monitor link group can be a common Ethernet port, the master port of a protection group, or the master port of an aggregation group.
l
The downlink of a monitor link group can be only a common Ethernet port.
Run the display monitor-link group command to query the information about the monitor link group.
----End
Example Assume the following configurations: The MA5600T implements dual uplinks through the GIU board, upstream ports 0/19/0 and 0/19/1 on the GIU board are added as members of smart link protection group 2, port 0/19/0 functions as the working port, port 0/19/1 functions as the protection port, the working mode is the active/standby mode, the control VLAN of flush packets is VLAN 10, the password is abc, and the protection group function is enabled. To perform these configurations, do as follows: huawei(config)#protect-group 2 protect-target eth-nni-port workmode smart-link huawei(config-protect-group-2)#protect-group member port 0/19/0 role work huawei(config-protect-group-2)#protect-group member port 0/19/1 role protect huawei(config-protect-group-2)#flush send control-vlan 10 password simple abc huawei(config-protect-group-2)#protect-group enable huawei(config-protect-group-2)#quit
6.3 Configuring the MPLS Service Board Redundancy Backup This topic describes how to configure 1+1 redundancy backup for the MPLS service board. In this way, when the MPLS service board is faulty, the service is not affected. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-7
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Background Information NOTE
Only MPLS boards of the same type support redundancy backup.
Procedure Step 1 Create a protection group. Run the protect-group command to a protection group that protects the service processing board. NOTE
1. Configure protect-target to service-process-board. 2. The working mode of the MPLS service board protection group can be only boardstate.
Step 2 Add members to the protection group. Run the protect-group member command to add members to a protection group. NOTE
l
When adding members to the protection group, add a working member, and then add a protection member.
l
Adding a protection group member based on the port is not supported for the MPLS service board, and only adding a protection group member based on the board is supported.
Step 3 Enable the protection group. Run the protect-group enable command to enable the protection group. After a protection group is created, the protection group is in the disabled state by default. You should enable the protection group to make the configuration take effect. Step 4 Query the information about the protection group. Run the display protect-group command to query the information about the protection group and all the members in the protection group. ----End
Example To configure redundancy back for MPLS boards in slots 0/2 and 0/3 of the MA5600T so that when the service board in slot 0/2 fails, the system can automatically switch the services to the service board in slot 0/3. huawei(config)#protect-group 1 protect-target service-process-board workmode boardstate huawei(protect-group-1)#protect-group member board 0/2 role work huawei(protect-group-1)#protect-group member board 0/3 role protect huawei(protect-group-1)#protect-group enable
6.4 Configuring the GPON Port Redundancy Backup This topic describes how to configure 1+1 redundancy backup for the GPON service board. In this way, when the GPON service board is faulty, the service is not affected.
Background Information The GPON port supports redundancy backup on the same board and the redundancy on different boards. The differences are as follows: 6-8
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
l
Port redundancy backup on the same board does not require extra GPON service board, which saves hardware resources. In case that the GPON service board fails, however, the services on the entire board are interrupted.
l
Port redundancy backup on the different boards requires an independent standby GPON service board, which increases the hardware cost. In the case that the active GPON service board fails, however, the services can be automatically switched over to the GPON ports on the standby board, and the service access is not affected. NOTE
Only GPON boards of the same type support inter-board redundancy backup.
Procedure Step 1 Create a GPON port protection group. Run the protect-group command to a protection group that protects the ports on the GPON access side. NOTE
1. Configure protect-target to gpon-uni-port. 2. The working mode of the GPON port protection group can be only timedelay.
Step 2 Add members to the protection group. Run the protect-group member command to add members to a protection group. NOTE
l
When adding members to the protection group, add a working member, and then add a protection member.
l
Adding a protection group member based on the board is not supported for the GPON port, and only adding a protection group member based on the port is supported.
l
The member ports can be ports on different GPON boards, but the GPON board types must be the same.
Step 3 Enable the protection group. Run the protect-group enable command to enable the smart link protection group. After a protection group is created, the protection group is in the disabled state by default. You should enable the protection group to make the configuration take effect. Step 4 Query the information about the protection group. Run the display protect-group command to query the information about the protection group and all the members in the protection group. NOTE
The GPON protection group supports the binding to a PPPoE single-MAC address pool. When the PPPoE singleMAC address function is enabled, run the bind mac-pool single-mac command to bind a GPON protection group to a PPPoE single-MAC address. If the GPON protection group is not bound to the PPPoE source MAC address, when the GPON protection group is switched over, the PPPoE service carried on this port is interrupted. In this case, you must re-dial and determine the service interruption time according to the BRAS configuration. This may fail to meet the switchover performance requirement that the service interruption time must not exceed 50 ms.
----End
Example To configure redundancy backup for ports 0/2/0 and 0/2/1 on the same GPON board of the MA5600T so that when port 0/2/0 is faulty, the system can automatically switch the service to port 0/2/1 to continue service access, do as follows: Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-9
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#protect-group 0 protect-target gpon-uni-port workmode timedelay huawei(protect-group-0)#protect-group member port 0/2/0 role work huawei(protect-group-0)#protect-group member port 0/2/1 role protect huawei(protect-group-0)#protect-group enable
To configure inter-board redundancy backup for ports 0/2/0 and 0/3/0 on different GPON boards of the MA5600T so that when port 0/2/0 is faulty, the system can automatically switch the service to port 0/3/0 to continue service access, do as follows: huawei(config)#protect-group 0 protect-target gpon-uni-port workmode timedelay huawei(protect-group-0)#protect-group member port 0/2/0 role work huawei(protect-group-0)#protect-group member port 0/3/0 role protect huawei(protect-group-0)#protect-group enable
6.5 Configuring Type B Dual Homing Protection Switching This topic describes how to configure GPON ports on two OLT devices to back up each other. When the GPON port on an OLT is faulty, the system automatically switches the service to the GPON board on the other OLT, thus implementing protection for two active ports on two devices in case of an optical fiber fault.
Background Information A large number of users can be connected to one GPON port because of the high access bandwidth provided by the GPON technology. To ensure that services can recover quickly in case of failure of backbone optical fibers, perform protection for GPON ports to improve the security of the OLT. Type B dual homing protection switching can improve the capability of the OLT against disasters. In the Type B dual homing protection switching mode, the active and standby upstream optical fibers of the ODN are connected to two OLTs respectively, and the two OLTs can be distributed in two regions. When the OLT connected to the active optical fiber fails, the system automatically switches the service to the OLT connected to the standby optical fiber. The principles of Type B dual homing protection switching of the OLTs are as follows: l
Configure the OLTs through the BMS (the BMS is associated with two OLTs). NOTE
To configure the two OLTs through the CLI, ensure the configuration consistency of the OLTs. l
During the protection switching, the OLT initiates auto detection, determines whether to perform switching according to the actual status of the PON port, and updates the protection status of the members in the protection group by reporting alarms.
The implementation of the Type B dual homing protection switching of GPON ports includes the automatic switching mode and the forced switching mode. The differences between them are as follows:
6-10
l
Automatic switching is determined and initiated by the OLT. During the protection switching, the OLT initiates auto detection (detects the availability of optical signals on the optical fiber), determines whether to perform switching according to the actual status of the PON port, and updates the protection status of the members in the protection group by reporting alarms.
l
Forced switching is initiated by the BMS. The BMS issues the forced switching command to both the active and standby OLTs. Then, the active OLT changes to the standby OLT, and the standby OLT changes to the active OLT.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
Precautions Pay attention to the following conditions when configuring Type B dual homing protection switching: 1.
The types of both OLTs must be the same, and the device software must be V800R007.
2.
Both OLTs must work in the profile mode.
3.
The types of the GPON boards where the GPON UNI ports are used for creating a dual homing protection group must be the same.
4.
Type B dual homing configuration can be completed on the BMS, and you need not perform extra configuration on the OLT.
l
Perform the configuration on the BMS.
Procedure NOTE
Type B dual homing configuration can be completed on the BMS.
1.
Add a dual homing protection group. (1) Choose Access Service > Dual Homing from the main menu of the BMS. (2) On the Dual Homing tab, right-click and choose Add. (3) In the Add Dual Homing Protection Group dialog box, enter Name and Description, and select Work Member and Protection Member.
(4) Click OK. NOTE
After a dual homing protection group is created successfully,
2.
l
The GPON port that functions as the work member works in the forced active state, the GPON port that functions as the protection member works in the forced standby state, and the automatic detection function is disabled.
l
The default management status of the protection group is disabled.
Enable automatic detection for the dual homing protection group. Select the created dual homing protection group, right-click and choose Enable Automatic Detection. NOTE
After automatic detection is enabled for the dual homing protection group, the protection group function is enabled at the same time.
3.
Query the detailed information about the protection group. Select the created dual homing protection group, query the member information by clicking the Member tab, including the status, role, working mode, and frozen status.
----End Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-11
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
6.6 Configuring the Switchover of the Protect Group This topic describes how to configure the ARP detection between the MA5600T and the BRAS. When the active uplink in the dual uplinks of the MA5600T is faulty, the service data can be automatically switched to the protection uplink, thus implementing the switchover between protect group of upstream ports on the MA5600T to ensure the normal running of the service.
Background Information Figure 6-1 shows an example network of the dual uplink protect group between the MA5600T and the BRAS. Figure 6-1 Example network of the dual uplink protect group between the MA5600T and the BRAS
The MA5600T accesses BRAS1 and BRAS2 through the protect group of upstream ports. The current uplinks are Link1 and Link2, and Link3 functions as the protection link. The protection switchover module of the MA5600T processes the link status and port status detected through ARP, both of which jointly determine whether to trigger the SF signal of the port. If Link1 is broken and Link2 is normal, although the upstream port of the MA5600T is in the UP state, the MA5600T can actively trigger a switchover of the upstream port according to the ARP detection result to ensure the normal running of the service. NOTE
l
The protect group created in the GIU slot or on the ETH board supports ARP detection. Currently, other types of protect groups do not support ARP detection.
l
According to the ARP detection feature, no network device that can terminate ARP detection packets should exist between the source end and destination end of ARP detection, that is, the LAN switch in the network cannot terminate the ARP detection packet sent from the MA5600T or the BRAS.
Procedure Step 1 Create an ARP detection task. 1.
6-12
Run the arp-detect command to create an ARP detection task in the VLAN from the upstream port to the peer IP address. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
NOTE
The upstream port of the ARP detection task must be added to the VLAN.
2.
Configure the interval for transmitting ARP detection packets. Run the min-tx-interval command to configure the interval for transmitting ARP detection packets. NOTE
After ARP detection is enabled, the CPU usage increases because the CPUs of the MA5600T and the BRAS need to process ARP packets, and the CPU usage increases as the frequency for transmitting ARP packets increases. Therefore, you need to configure the interval for transmitting ARP detection packets according to actual conditions.
3.
Configure the ARP detection timeout multiplier. Run the detect-multiplier command to configure the ARP detection timeout multiplier. NOTE
ARP detection timeout time = Transmit interval x Detection multiplier. The minimum value is 3s, which is the time for the ARP detection to trigger a switchover. The detailed value varies according to the CPU load of the MA5600T and the CPU load of the peer device. It should be configured properly according to the application environment.
4.
Enable ARP detection. Run the detect command to enable ARP detection.
Step 2 Configure an upstream port protect group. 1.
Create a protect group and configure its members. a.
Run the protect-group command to create a protect group of Ethernet upstream ports, and configure its working mode.
b.
Run the protect-group member command to add the working port and protection port to the protect group.
Step 3 Enable the protect group. Run the protect-group enable command to enable the protect group. After a protect group is created, the protect group is in the disabled state by default. You should enable the protect group to make the configuration take effect. ----End
Example Assume the following configurations: The MA5600T accesses BRAS1 and BRAS2 through dual uplinks, upstream ports 0/19/0 and 0/19/1 on the GIU board are configured as a protect group that allows ARP detection, port 0/19/0 functions as the working port, port 0/19/1 functions as the protect port, the IP address of BRAS1 for ARP detection is 10.10.10.10, the VLAN for ARP detection is VLAN 10, the expected interval for transmitting ARP detection packets is 60 ms, and the ARP detection timeout multiplier is 5. To perform these configurations so that the system automatically switches to BRAS2 when the ARP detection times out to ensure the normal running of the service, do as follows: huawei(config)#arp-detect dett bind peer-ip 10.10.10.10 vlan 10 port 0/19/0 huawei(config-arp-detect-dett)#min-tx-interval 60 huawei(config-arp-detect-dett)#detect-multiplier 5 huawei(config-arp-detect-dett)#detect enable huawei(config-arp-detect-dett)#quit huawei(config)#protect-group 2 protect-target eth-nni-port workmode timedelay huawei(protect-group-2)protect-group member port 0/19/0 role work
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-13
6 Configuring Redundancy Backup
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(protect-group-2)#protect-group member port 0/19/1 role protect huawei(protect-group-2)#protect-group enable
6-14
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7
7 Configuring the DSLAM Subtending
Configuring the DSLAM Subtending
About This Chapter Multiple MA5600Ts can be subtended. 7.1 Configuring the NE Subtending Through the FE or GE Port The MA5600Ts (NEs) can be directly connected to each other though the FE or GE port. Subtending saves the upstream optical fibers and simplifies networking and service configuration.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-1
7 Configuring the DSLAM Subtending
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7.1 Configuring the NE Subtending Through the FE or GE Port The MA5600Ts (NEs) can be directly connected to each other though the FE or GE port. Subtending saves the upstream optical fibers and simplifies networking and service configuration.
Background Information l
The two ports to be subtended must be the same in the port type, port rate, and port duplex mode.
l
If the ETHB board is used for subtending, the network role of the port on the ETHB board must be set.
Procedure Step 1 Configure the VLAN of the master NE. The VLAN type is smart, and the VLAN attribute is common. For details about the configuration, see 2.10 Configuring a VLAN. Step 2 Add an upstream port to the VLAN of the master NE. Run the port vlan command to add an upstream port to the VLAN. Step 3 Add a subtending port to the VLAN of the master NE. Run the port vlan command to add a subtending port to the VLAN. Step 4 Set the network role of the subtending port of the master NE. This step is required only when the ETHB board is used for subtending. 1.
Run the interface eth command to enter the ETH mode.
2.
Run the network-role command to set the network role of the port to subtending. By default, the port functions as a cascade port.
Step 5 Configure the VLAN of the slave NE. The VLAN of the slave NE is the same as the VLAN of the master VLAN. The VLAN type is smart, and the VLAN attribute is common. For details about the configuration, see 2.10 Configuring a VLAN. Step 6 Add an upstream port to the VLAN of the slave NE. Run the port vlan command to add an upstream port to the VLAN. ----End
Example Assume that master NE huawei_A and slave NE huawei_B are subtended through the GIU board. To add upstream port 0/19/0 and subtending port 0/19/1 of huawei_A to VLAN 100, and add upstream port 0/19/0 of huawei_B to VLAN 100, do as follows: huawei_A(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei_A(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0
7-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7 Configuring the DSLAM Subtending
huawei_A(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 1 huawei_B(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei_B(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0
Assume that master NE huawei_A and slave NE huawei_B are subtended through the ETHB board. To add upstream port 0/19/0 and subtending port 0/6/0 of huawei_A to VLAN 100, and add upstream port 0/19/0 of huawei_B to VLAN 100, do as follows: huawei_A(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei_A(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0 huawei_A(config)#port vlan 100 0/6 0 huawei_A(config)#interface eth 0/6 huawei_A(config-if-eth-0/6)#network-role cascade huawei_A(config-if-eth-0/6)#quit huawei_B(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei_B(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-3
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
FTTx Solution Configuration Guide
About This Chapter The FTTx solution configuration guide describes how to configure typical FTTH, FTTB/C, FTTO, and FTTM services (such as high-speed Internet access, multicast, VoIP, and mobile bearer services) on the OLT and the ONU step by step through examples. 8.1 Configuration Example of the FTTx Service (GPON Access) This topic describes how to configure the Internet access service, voice service, multicast service, and mobile bearer service in the GPON access mode in various FTTx scenarios. 8.2 Configuring the P2P Optical Fiber Access Service This topic describes the P2P optical fiber access technology and how to configure the P2P optical fiber access service on the OLT.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-1
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8.1 Configuration Example of the FTTx Service (GPON Access) This topic describes how to configure the Internet access service, voice service, multicast service, and mobile bearer service in the GPON access mode in various FTTx scenarios.
Context The description in this topic is based on the GPON profile mode. You can query the current GPON mode in the diagnose mode. huawei(config)#diagnose huawei(diagnose)%%display xpon mode --------------------------------------------------Current config mode: Profile-mode ---------------------------------------------------
8.1.1 FTTx Network FTTx applications include FTTH, FTTB, FTTC, FTTO, FTTM, and VIP P2P access. 8.1.2 FTTx Data Plan (GPON Access) This topic plans the data in a unified manner for connecting to the OLT in the FTTx GPON access mode for various example networks. The subsequent examples are configured based on the following data plan. 8.1.3 Configuring the FTTH Service This topic describes how to configure the Internet access, VoIP, and IPTV services in the FTTH GPON access mode. 8.1.4 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Access Services This topic describes how to configure the Internet access, voice and multicast in the FTTB and FTTC Access Services. 8.1.5 Configuring the FTTO (OLT+ATN930) Service Through the MA5600T+ATN930 network, the fiber to the office (FTTO) solution is provided for enterprise users. This topic describes how to configure the TDM PBX access, IP PBX access, and enterprise router access services in the FTTO scenario. 8.1.6 Configuring the FTTM (OLT+ATN930) Service In the FTTM network, the ATN930 functions as a base station AG and is connected to the 2G or 3G base station in various modes. After the OLT transmits signals upstream to the upperlayer network, the ATN930 is connected to the base station controller (BSC) or radio network controller (RNC) to implement the FTTM network application over the 2G or 3G network.
8.1.1 FTTx Network FTTx applications include FTTH, FTTB, FTTC, FTTO, FTTM, and VIP P2P access.
Network Figure 8-1 shows an example network of full access services in the FTTx scenario. FTTx applications include FTTH, FTTB, FTTC, FTTO, FTTM, and VIP P2P access.
8-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
l
FTTH indicates fiber to the home. The ONT is connected to the OLT in the PON mode to implement FTTH. The voice, data, and video services are provided through a single optical fiber.
l
FTTB/FTTC indicates fiber to the building/fiber to the curb. The MDU is connected to the OLT in the PON mode to implement FTTB/FTTC, and provides voice, data, and video services for the users in communities.
l
FTTO indicates fiber to the office. The SBU is connected to the OLT in the PON mode to implement FTTO. In this way, the Intranet TDM PBX, Intranet IP PBX, and Intranet private line services are provided.
l
FTTM indicates fiber to the mobile base station. The CBU is connected to the OLT in the PON mode to implement base station backhaul.
l
P2P indicates point to point. The VIP household and enterprise users can be directly connected to the OLT through GE optical fibers to implement end-to-end QoS.
Figure 8-1 Example network of full access services in the FTTx scenario
8.1.2 FTTx Data Plan (GPON Access) This topic plans the data in a unified manner for connecting to the OLT in the FTTx GPON access mode for various example networks. The subsequent examples are configured based on the following data plan.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-3
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Data Plan Table 8-1 provides the unified data plan for configuring the HSI, IPTV, VoIP, emulation services, and private line services in an FTTx network. NOTE
The ONU in the data plan refers to the ONT and the MDU collectively.
Table 8-1 Data plan for the FTTx GPON access Service Classificati on
Item
Data
Remarks
Network data
FTTH
OLT PON port: 0/1/1
In the current network, FTTH, FTTB, and FTTC can be implemented on the same OLT. Generally, different slots are used for the implementation. Implementing various FTTx networks concurrently, however, is not recommended in general.
ONT ID: 1 FTTB/C
OLT PON port: 0/2/1 ONT ID: 1
FTTO/M
OLT PON port: 0/3/1 ONT ID: 1
P2P
Device management
8-4
FE ports of the OPFA board on the OLT: l
0/5/1
l
0/5/2
l
0/5/3
Inband NMS IP address of the OLT
192.168.50.1/24
Management VLAN of the OLT
4000
Inband NMS IP address of the MDU
192.168.50.2/24
Management VLAN of the MDU
4000
Inband gateway IP address of the MDU
192.168.50.254/24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
To configure the MDU from the OLT by logging in to the MDU through Telnet, the management VLAN of the OLT and that of the MDU must be the same, and the management IP address of the OLT and that of the MDU must be in the same network segment. In the GPON access, the network management protocol of the MDU adopts SNMP and that of the ONT adopts OMCI.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Service Classificati on
Item
Data
Remarks
Service VLAN
HSI service
HG: PVC 8/35, untag
l
For the Internet access service, you can use two precisely-bound VLAN tags to extend VLANs and identify users. On the ONU, each user is allocated with a CVLAN. On the OLT, each OLT, each slot of the OLT, or each PON port can be allocated with an SVLAN.
l
The ONU VLANs of the same OLT must be planned in a unified manner and each ONU VLAN ID must be unique.
ONU VLAN: 1001-1024 OLT VLANs: l
CVLAN (using the VLAN of the ONU): 1001-1024
l
SVLAN: 100
IPTV service
Multicast VLAN: 1000
Generally, multicast VLANs are divided according to multicast sources.
VoIP service
HG: PVC 8/40; VLAN ID: 3
Generally, the VoIP service can be identified by a single VLAN tag.
ONU VLAN: 200 OLT VLAN (VLAN transparently transmitting the ONU service): 200
Emulation service
TDM emulation SVLAN: 500 ATM emulation SVLAN: 700 ETH emulation SVLAN: 800
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Each OLT, each slot of the OLT, or each PON port can be allocated with a VLAN to reduce VLAN broadcast domains. They are the SVLANs of the OLT that transparently transmit the ONU service. 8-5
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Service Classificati on
Item
Data
Remarks
QinQ private line service
ONU SVLAN: 2000
QinQ is used to implement the L2 VPN private line service. In the case of FTTH, enable QinQ on the OLT; in the case of FTTB/ FTTC, enable QinQ on the ONU.
OLT VLAN (VLAN transparently transmitting the ONU service): 2000
Each slot of the OLT can be allocated with an SVLAN to reduce VLAN broadcast domains. QoS (priority)
QoS (DBA)
HSI service
Priority: 1; queue scheduling: WRR
IPTV service
Priority: 4; queue scheduling: WRR
VoIP service
Priority: 6; queue scheduling: PQ
Emulation service
Priority: 6; queue scheduling: PQ
QinQ private line service
Priority: 5; queue scheduling: PQ
HSI service
l
Profile name: PPPOE
l
Profile type: Type4
l
Maximum bandwidth: 100 Mbit/s
l
T-CONT ID: 4
l
Profile name: IPTV
l
Profile type: Type4
l
Maximum bandwidth: 60 Mbit/s
l
T-CONT ID: 3
IPTV service
8-6
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Generally, the QoS priorities are NMS service and IP voice service > private line service > IPTV service > Internet access service in a descending order. Generally, the priority is set on the ONU, and the OLT inherits the priority set on the ONU. DBA is used to control the upstream bandwidth of the ONU. DBA profiles are bound to TCONTs. Different TCONTs are planned for different bandwidth assurance types. Generally, the service with a high priority adopts a fixed bandwidth or an assured bandwidth, and the service with a low priority adopts the maximum
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Service Classificati on
Item
Data
VoIP service
l
Profile name: VOIP
l
Profile type: Type3
l
Assured bandwidth: 15 Mbit/s
l
Maximum bandwidth: 30 Mbit/s
l
T-CONT ID: 2
l
Profile name:
Emulation service
QinQ private line service
QoS (CAR)
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
–
For TDM emulation: TDM
–
For ADM emulation: ATM
–
For ETH emulation: ETH
l
Profile type: Type1
l
Fixed bandwidth 32 Mbit/s
l
T-CONT ID: 1
l
Profile name: PrivateLine
l
Profile type: Type3
l
Assured bandwidth: 20 Mbit/s
l
Maximum bandwidth: 50 Mbit/s
l
T-CONT ID: 5
Emulation service
No rate limitation in the upstream and downstream directions
VoIP service
No rate limitation in the upstream and downstream directions
IPTV service
No rate limitation in the upstream and downstream directions
HSI service
Upstream and downstream bandwidth: 4 Mbit/s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Remarks
bandwidth or best effort.
Traffic control can be implemented on the BRAS, or on the OLT or ONU by using port rate limitation or using a traffic profile to limit the upstream and downstream traffic. Generally, in the case of FTTH, limit the rate on the OLT; in the case of FTTB/ FTTC, limit the rate on the ONU.
8-7
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Service Classificati on
Item
Data
IPTV service data
Multicast protocol
OLT: IGMP proxy
VoIP service data
8-8
Remarks
ONU: IGMP snooping Multicast version
IGMP V3
IGMP v3 and IGMP v2 are supported, and IGMP v3 is compatible with IGMP v2.
Multicast program configuration mode
Static configuration mode
The OLT can also generate a multicast program library, that is, dynamically generate a program list according to the programs requested by users. In this mode, the program list need not be configured or maintained; however, the functions such as program management, user multicast bandwidth management, program preview, and program prejoin are not supported.
IP address of the multicast server
10.10.10.10
Multicast program
224.1.1.10
Signaling and media IP addresses
17.10.10.10/24
Gateway IP address
17.10.10.0/24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
H.248 and SIP support separate media and signaling. The media and signaling IP address can be the same or different.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Service Classificati on
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Item
Data
Remarks
MG interface (H. 248)
MG interface ID: 0
It is the MG interface ID used for the VoIP service to be configured, which determines the virtual access gateway (VAG) specified for the user.
Signaling port ID of the MG interface: 2944
It is the transport layer protocol port ID used for the signaling exchange between the MG and the MGC.
IP address of the primary MGC to which the MG interface belongs: 200.200.200.200/24
When dual homing is configured, the IP address and the port ID of the secondary MGC must also be configured.
NOTE The parameters of the MG interface must be the same as the parameters on the MGC. H.248 has many negotiation parameters, and the parameters here are mandatory.
Port ID of the primary MGC to which the MG interface belongs: 2944
SIP interface (SIP) NOTE The parameters of the SIP interface must be the same as the parameters on the softswitch. SIP has many negotiation parameters, and the parameters here are mandatory.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Coding mode of the MG interface: text
-
Transmission mode of the MG interface: UDP
The transmission mode of the MG interface is selected according to the requirements on the MGC. Generally, UDP is adopted.
SIP interface ID: 0
It is the SIP interface ID used for the VoIP service to be configured, which determines the virtual access gateway (VAG) specified for the user.
Signaling port ID of the SIP interface: 5056
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-9
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Service Classificati on
Item
Data
Remarks
IP address of the primary softswitch to which the SIP interface belongs: 200.200.200.200/24
When dual homing is configured, the IP address and the port ID of the secondary softswitch must also be configured.
Port ID of the primary softswitch to which the SIP interface belongs: 5060/24 Coding mode of the SIP interface: text Transmission mode of the SIP interface: UDP
The transmission mode is selected according to the requirements on the softswitch. Generally, UDP is adopted.
Home domain of the SIP interface: huawei Index of the profile used by the SIP interface: 1
PSTN users
8-10
Different profile indexes are used for interconnection with non-Huawei softswitches. You can run the if-h248 attribute profileindex command to query the profile index. For interconnection with a ZTE softswitch, use profile 5; for interconnection with a Bell softswitch, no constant profile is used. Profile 0 can be used and the data is negotiated with the Bell softswitch.
phone1-phone24: 83110001-83110024
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Service Classificati on
Emulation service data
Item
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Data
Remarks
User priorities: Phone 1: Cat2; Phone 2-Phone 24: Cat3 (default)
According to the service requirements, user priorities must be specified. The user priorities include the following:
Local LSR ID
10.10.10.10/32
Remote (OLT) LSR ID
10.20.20.20/32
Remote (PTN) LSR ID
30.30.30.30/32
l
cat1: government1 (category 1 government users)
l
cat2: government2 (category 2 government users)
l
cat3: common (common users)
Generally, the IP address of the loopback interface is used as the LSR ID.
8.1.3 Configuring the FTTH Service This topic describes how to configure the Internet access, VoIP, and IPTV services in the FTTH GPON access mode.
Context As shown in Figure 8-2, in the FTTH scenario, users are connected to the OLT through the ONT in the GPON mode to implement the Internet access, VoIP, and IPTV services.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-11
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 8-2 Example network of the FTTH service
8.1.3.1 Configuring the FTTH Internet Access Service The OLT is connected to the remote ONT through a GPON port to provide users with the highspeed Internet access service. 8.1.3.2 Configuration Example of the FTTH VoIP Service (H.248-based) The OLT is connected to the remote ONT through a GPON port to provide users with the IPbased high-quality and low-cost VoIP service. 8.1.3.3 Configuration Example of the FTTH VoIP Service (SIP-based) The OLT is connected to the remote ONT through a GPON port to provide users with the IPbased high-quality and low-cost VoIP service. 8.1.3.4 Configuring the FTTH IPTV Service The OLT is connected to the remote ONT through a GPON port to provide users with the IPTV service.
8.1.3.1 Configuring the FTTH Internet Access Service The OLT is connected to the remote ONT through a GPON port to provide users with the highspeed Internet access service.
Service Requirements
8-12
l
The user PC is connected to the ONT through the LAN port in the PPPoE dialing mode. The ONT is connected to the OLT and then to the upper-layer network in the GPON mode to provide the high-speed Internet access service.
l
The high-speed Internet access service is identified by two precisely-bound VLAN tags. On the ONT, each user is allocated with a CVLAN; on the OLT, each slot is allocated with an SVLAN.
l
The high-speed Internet access service adopts a bandwidth-ensured mode with the maximum bandwidth 100 Mbit/s as the DBA profile and performs the 4 Mbit/s rate limitation on both the upstream and downstream directions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Table 8-2 Data plan Item
Data
OLT
Service VLAN ID: 100 Service VLAN type: Smart Service VLAN attribute: q-in-q Upstream port: 0/19/0
ONT
ONT ID: 1 ID of the port on the ONT that is connected to the PC: 1 Type of the port on the ONT that is connected to the PC: ETH VLAN ID of the port on the ONT that is connected to the PC: 10
Prerequisite l
The OLT is connected to the BRAS.
l
Related configurations are performed on the BRAS according to the authentication and accounting requirements for dialup users. For details about the configuration, see the corresponding configuration guide.
l
The VLAN of the LAN switch port connected to the OLT is the same as the upstream VLAN of the OLT.
l
Configure the OLT:
Procedure 1.
Create a service VLAN and add an upstream port to it. The VLAN ID is 100, and the VLAN is a smart VLAN, VLAN attribute is QinQ. Add upstream port 0/19/0 to VLAN 100. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei(config)#vlan attrib 100 q-in-q huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0
2.
Configure a traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. The profile ID is 8, the CIR is 4 Mbit/s, the priority is 1, and packets are scheduled according to the priority carried. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 8 cir 4096 priority 1 prioritypolicy tag-In-Packag
3.
Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile ID to 10, type to type4, and upstream bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-id 10 type4 fix 102400
4. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
(Optional) Add an alarm profile. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-13
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
5.
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
–
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is reported.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to configure an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONT line.
Add an ONT line profile. Add GPON ONT line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 4 to the DBA profile 10. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 4 dba-profile-id 10
Add GEM port 1 for transmitting ETH traffic streams and bind GEM port 1 to TCONT 4. The QoS mode is priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
1. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. 2. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priority-queue 6
Configure the service mapping mode from the GEM port to the ONT to VLAN (default), and map CVLAN 10 to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 0 vlan 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit NOTE
After a profile is configured, run the commit command to make the configuration take effect before the system quits the profile mode.
6.
Add an ONT service profile. The service profile type should be consistent with the actual ONT type. Considering the HG850a as an example, configure four ETH ports and two POTS ports. The ID of the VLAN to which the ETH ports 1 belong is 10. huawei(config)#ont-srvprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#ont-port eth 4 pots 2 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#port vlan eth 1 10 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#quit NOTE
After a profile is configured, run the commit command to make the configuration take effect before the system quits the profile mode.
7.
8-14
Add an ONT. The ONT is connected to GPON port 0/1/1. Configure the ONT ID to 1, SN to 32303131D659FD40, management to OMCI, the bound line profile ID is 10, and the bound service profile ID is 10.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONT offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONT.
l
Before confirming an automatically discovered ONT, you must run the port portid ont-autofind command in the GPON mode to enable the ONT automatic discovery function of the port.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONT is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/1 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/1/1 Ont SN : 32303131D659FD40 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : HG850aGTH.B Ont SoftwareVersion : V1R1C01SPC033 Ont EquipmentID : EchoLife:HG850a Ont autofind time : 2009-10-24 14:59:10 -----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 32303131D659FD40 omci ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont-srvprofile-id 10 desc HG850a NOTE
8.
l
After an ONT is added, it is recommended that you run thedisplay ont info command to query the ONT status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONT are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONT state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONT capabilities, and then add a proper ONT profile based on the queried ONT capabilities. Then, add an ONT again.
(Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONT. The default alarm profile (profile 1) is adopted. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
9.
Specify the VLAN for the ONT port. ETH port 1 on the ONT is connected to the PC and the native VLAN is VLAN 10. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont port native-vlan 1 1 eth 1 vlan 10
10. Add a service port to the VLAN. Configure the management service port ID to 1, SVLAN ID to 100, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 10. Use traffic profile 8. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 1 vlan 100 gpon 0/1/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multiservice user-vlan 10 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
11. Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the HSI service is 1, adopting the WRR scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-15
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
12. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONT. Consider the HG850a as an example. The configurations on other types of ONTs are similar. NOTE
l
If PPPoE dialing is directly performed on the PC, the ONT need not be configured.
l
If PPPoE dialing is performed on the ONT, the ONT needs to be configured.
1.
Configure the IP address of the PC network adapter to be in the same network segment with the IP address of the local maintenance Ethernet port of the HG850a (default: 192.168.100.1).
2.
Open the Web browser, and enter the IP address of the local maintenance Ethernet port of the HG850a.
3.
On the login interface, enter the user name (default: telecomadmin) and password (default: admintelecom) of the administrator. After the password authentication is passed, the Web configuration interface is displayed.
4.
In the navigation pane, choose Basic > WAN. In the interface that is displayed, you can browse and configure the WAN port of the HG850a, as shown in Figure 8-3. Figure 8-3 ONT parameters
8-16
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Table 8-3 ONT parameters Parameter
Description
Enabled
Choose Enable to make the configuration take effect.
Service List
Choose Internet from the Service List drop-down list.
VLAN ID
Indicates the C-VLAN ID.
IPGetMode
Indicates the IP address obtaining mode.
NAT
Indicates the network address translation (NAT).
NAT Type
Indicates the NAT type.
Username
Indicates the user name for the simulated PPPoE dialing access.
Password
Indicates the password for the simulated PPPoE dialing access.
Binding Options
Indicates binding to the L3 LAN port for the data service. The selected LAN port indicates that the WAN port is bound to the LAN port. This WAN port can be considered as a route.
5.
After the parameters are configured as shown in Figure 8-3, click Apply to make the configuration take effect.
6.
In the navigation pane, choose Status > Device. In the interface that is displayed, click the WAN tab. Then you can see that the status is displayed as Connected, as shown in Figure 8-4. Figure 8-4 Querying the ONT status
----End
Result Connect the ONT to the PC, and perform dialing on the PC by using the PPPoE dialing software. After the dialing is successful, the user can access the Internet.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-17
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Configuration File vlan 100 smart vlan attrib 100 q-in-q port vlan 100 0/19 0 traffic table ip index 8 cir 4096 priority 1 priority-policy tag-In-Packag dba-profile add profile-id 10 type4 fix 102400 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 4 dba-profile-id 10 gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 1 0 vlan 10 commit quit ont-srvprofile gpon profile-id 10 ont-port eth 4 pots 2 port vlan eth 1 10 commit quit interface gpon 0/1 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 32303131D659FD40 omci ont-lineprofile-id 10 ontsrvprofile-id 10 desc HG850a ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 ont port native-vlan 1 1 eth 1 vlan 10 quit service-port 1 vlan 100 gpon 0/1/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 10 rxcttr 8 tx-cttr 8 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
8.1.3.2 Configuration Example of the FTTH VoIP Service (H.248-based) The OLT is connected to the remote ONT through a GPON port to provide users with the IPbased high-quality and low-cost VoIP service.
Service Requirements l
The ONT is connected to the MGC through H.248.
l
The ONT obtains the IP address through DHCP.
l
Two phone sets are connected to two TEL ports of the ONT respectively, and calls can be made between two phone sets.
l
The DBA mode of the VoIP service is assured bandwidth + maximum bandwidth, and no rate limitation is performed on the upstream and downstream traffic.
Table 8-4 Data plan Item
Data
OLT
S-VLAN ID: 200 S-VLAN type: smart VLAN Upstream port: 0/19/0 C-VLAN ID: 20
ONT
8-18
ONT ID: 1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Prerequisite l
The interface data and the PSTN user data corresponding to the MG interface must be configured on the MGC.
l
The OLT must be connected to the MGC.
l
Configure the OLT:
Procedure 1.
Create a service VLAN and add an upstream port to it. The VLAN ID is 200, and the VLAN is a smart VLAN. Add upstream port 0/19/0 to VLAN 200. huawei(config)#vlan 200 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 200 0/19 0
2.
Configure a traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. The profile ID is 9, no rate limitation in the upstream and downstream directions, the priority is 6, and packets are scheduled according to the priority carried. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Packag
3.
Add a DBA profile. Configure the profile ID to 20, type to type3, assured bandwidth to 15 Mbit/s, and maximum bandwidth to 30 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-id 20 type3 assure 15360 max 30720
4.
5.
(Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is reported.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to configure an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONT line.
Add an ONT line profile. Add GPON ONT line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 2 to the DBA profile 20. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 2 dba-profile-id 20
Add GEM port 2 for transmitting ETH traffic streams and bind GEM port 2 to TCONT 2. The QoS mode is priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
1. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. 2. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation).
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-19
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 2 eth tcont 2 priority-queue 6
Configure the service mapping mode from the GEM port to the ONU to VLAN (default), and map CVLAN 20 to GEM port 2. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 2 1 vlan 20 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit NOTE
After a profile is configured, run the commit command to make the configuration take effect before the system quits the profile mode.
6.
Add an ONT service profile. The service profile type should be consistent with the actual ONT type. Considering the HG850a as an example, configure four ETH ports and two POTS ports. huawei(config)#ont-srvprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#ont-port eth 4 pots 2 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#quit NOTE
After a profile is configured, run the commit command to make the configuration take effect before the system quits the profile mode.
7.
Add an ONT. The ONT is connected to GPON port 0/1/1. Configure the ONT ID to 1, SN to 32303131D659FD40, management to OMCI, the bound line profile ID is 10, and the bound service profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONT offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONT.
l
Before confirming an automatically discovered ONT, you must run the port portid ont-autofind command in the GPON mode to enable the ONT automatic discovery function of the port.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONT is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/1 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/1/1 Ont SN : 32303131D659FD40 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : HG850aGTH.B Ont SoftwareVersion : V1R1C01SPC033 Ont EquipmentID : EchoLife:HG850a Ont autofind time : 2009-10-24 14:59:10 -----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 32303131D659FD40 omci ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont-srvprofile-id 10 desc HG850a
8-20
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
8.
l
After an ONT is added, it is recommended that you run thedisplay ont info command to query the ONT status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONT are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONT state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONT capabilities, and then add a proper ONT profile based on the queried ONT capabilities. Then, add an ONT again.
(Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default alarm profile (profile 1) is adopted. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
9.
Add a service port to the VLAN. Configure the service port ID to 2, SVLAN ID to 200, GEM port ID to 2, and CVLAN ID to 20. Bind traffic profile 9 to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 2 vlan 200 gpon 0/1/1 ont 1 gemport 2 multiservice user-vlan 20 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9
10. Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the VOIP service is 6, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
11. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONT. Consider the HG850a as an example. The configurations on other types of ONTs are similar. NOTE
In the case of the HG850a, to provide voice services of different versions, you must select different ONT software versions. Before the configuration, ensure that the current software version of the HG850a supports H.248.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
1.
Log in to the BMS V200R012C05 and enable FTP.
2.
Choose Profile > ONT VAS Profile from the main menu.
3.
In the ONT VAS Profile, right-click and choose Add.
4.
In the dialog box that is displayed, set parameters such as Profile Name, Vendor ID, Terminal Type, and Version. The detailed settings are as follows: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-21
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
5.
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
–
Profile Name: VOIPHG850a
–
Vendor ID: HWTC
–
Terminal Type: EchoLife:HG850a
–
Version: V1R1C01B010-Later
Click Voice > Country code and signaling protocol. In the right pane, select the country code according to actual conditions. Then, configure Signal Protocol to H248, as shown in Figure 8-5. Figure 8-5 ONT VAS Profile
8-22
6.
Click H.248 Global digitmap configure. In the right pane, configure Digitmap to x.T.
7.
As shown in Figure 8-6. Choose H.248MGC > H.248 protocol basic configure . In the right pane, configure MGC server IP and MGC port to the following values: –
MGC server IP: 200.200.200.200
–
MGC port: 2944
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Figure 8-6 MGC configure
8.
Click OK.
9.
In the Physical Map navigation tree on the Main Topology tab, double-click the required OLT, or select the required OLT, right-click, and choose Device Management.
10. In the navigation tree, choose GPON > GPON ONU. 11. Click the GPON ONU tab and enter the filtering criterion to query the GPON ONU records. 12. In the information list, select HG850a, right-click, and choose Bind VAS Profile. 13. In the dialog box that is displayed, select profile VOIPHG850 and click OK. ----End
Result Connect two phone sets to two TEL ports on the ONT, and calls can be made between two phone sets.
Configuration File vlan 200 smart port vlan 200 0/19 0 traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Packag
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-23
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
dba-profile add profile-id 20 type3 assure 16384 max 26624 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 2 dba-profile-id 20 gem add 2 eth tcont 2 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 2 1 vlan 20 commit quit ont-srvprofile gpon profile-id 10 ont-port eth 4 pots 2 commit quit interface gpon 0/1 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 32303131D659FD40 omci ont-lineprofile-id 10 ontsrvprofile-id 10 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 quit service-port 2 vlan 200 gpon 0/1/1 ont 1 gemport 2 multi-service user-vlan 20 rxcttr 9 tx-cttr 9 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
8.1.3.3 Configuration Example of the FTTH VoIP Service (SIP-based) The OLT is connected to the remote ONT through a GPON port to provide users with the IPbased high-quality and low-cost VoIP service.
Service Requirements l
The ONT is connected to the SIP server through SIP.
l
The ONT obtains the IP address through DHCP.
l
Two phone sets are connected to two TEL ports of the ONT respectively, and calls can be made between two phone sets.
l
The DBA mode of the VoIP service is assured bandwidth + maximum bandwidth, and no rate limitation is performed on the upstream and downstream traffic.
Table 8-5 Data plan Item
Data
OLT
S-VLAN ID: 200 S-VLAN type: smart VLAN Upstream port: 0/19/0 C-VLAN ID: 20
ONT
ONT ID: 1 IP address of the SIP server: 200.200.200.200/24 Port ID of the SIP server: 5060
8-24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Prerequisite l
The SIP interface data and the PSTN user data corresponding to the MG interface must be configured on the SIP server.
l
The OLT must be connected to the SIP server.
l
Configure the OLT:
Procedure 1.
Create a service VLAN and add an upstream port to it. The VLAN ID is 200, and the VLAN is a smart VLAN. Add upstream port 0/19/0 to VLAN 200. huawei(config)#vlan 200 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 200 0/19 0
2.
Configure a traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. The profile ID is 9, no rate limitation in the upstream and downstream directions, the priority is 6, and packets are scheduled according to the priority carried. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Packag
3.
Add a DBA profile. Configure the profile ID to 20, type to type3, assured bandwidth to 15 Mbit/s, and maximum bandwidth to 30 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-id 20 type3 assure 15360 max 30720
4.
5.
(Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is reported.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to configure an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONT line.
Add an ONT line profile. Add GPON ONT line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 2 to the DBA profile 20. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 2 dba-profile-id 20
Add GEM port 2 for transmitting ETH traffic streams and bind GEM port 2 to TCONT 2. The QoS mode is priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
1. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. 2. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation).
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-25
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 2 eth tcont 2 priority-queue 6
Configure the service mapping mode from the GEM port to the ONU to VLAN (default), and map CVLAN 20 to GEM port 2. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 2 1 vlan 20 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit NOTE
After a profile is configured, run the commit command to make the configuration take effect before the system quits the profile mode.
6.
Add an ONT service profile. The service profile type should be consistent with the actual ONT type. Considering the HG850a as an example, configure four ETH ports and two POTS ports. huawei(config)#ont-srvprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#ont-port eth 4 pots 2 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#quit NOTE
After a profile is configured, run the commit command to make the configuration take effect before the system quits the profile mode.
7.
Add an ONT. The ONT is connected to GPON port 0/1/1. Configure the ONT ID to 1, SN to 32303131D659FD40, management to OMCI, the bound line profile ID is 10, and the bound service profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONT offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONT.
l
Before confirming an automatically discovered ONT, you must run the port portid ont-autofind command in the GPON mode to enable the ONT automatic discovery function of the port.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONT is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/1 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/1/1 Ont SN : 32303131D659FD40 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : HG850aGTH.B Ont SoftwareVersion : V1R1C01SPC033 Ont EquipmentID : EchoLife:HG850a Ont autofind time : 2009-10-24 14:59:10 -----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 32303131D659FD40 omci ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont-srvprofile-id 10 desc HG850a
8-26
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
8.
l
After an ONT is added, it is recommended that you run thedisplay ont info command to query the ONT status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONT are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONT state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONT capabilities, and then add a proper ONT profile based on the queried ONT capabilities. Then, add an ONT again.
(Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default alarm profile (profile 1) is adopted. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
9.
Add a service port to the VLAN. Configure the service port ID to 2, SVLAN ID to 200, GEM port ID to 2, and CVLAN ID to 20. Bind traffic profile 9 to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 2 vlan 200 gpon 0/1/1 ont 1 gemport 2 multiservice user-vlan 20 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9
10. Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the VOIP service is 6, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
11. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONT. Consider the HG850a as an example. The configurations on other types of ONTs are similar. NOTE
In the case of the HG850a, to provide voice services of different versions, you must select different ONT software versions. Before the configuration, ensure that the current software version of the HG850a supports SIP.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
1.
Open the Web browser, and enter the IP address of the local maintenance Ethernet port of the HG850a (default: 192.168.100.1).
2.
On the login interface, enter the user name (default: telecomadmin) and password (default: admintelecom) of the administrator. After the password authentication is passed, the Web configuration interface is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-27
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
3.
In the navigation pane, choose Basic > WAN. On the interface that is displayed, click New in the upper-right corner.
4.
Configure parameters of the voice WAN port, as shown in Figure 8-7. –
Service list: VoIP
–
VLAN ID: 20 (the same as the C-VLAN ID on the OLT)
–
IPGetMode: DHCP
–
NAT: Enable
–
NAT Type: NAPT
For other parameters, use the default values. Figure 8-7 WAN port parameters
8-28
5.
Click Apply.
6.
In the navigation pane, choose Basic > VoIP.
7.
Configure the basic VoIP parameters. Configure the phone number to 88860001, as shown in Figure 8-8. –
SIP Local Port: 5060
–
Register Server Address: 200.200.200.200
–
Register Server Port: 5060
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Figure 8-8 VoIP parameters
8.
Click Apply. Add another phone number 88860000 in the same way.
9.
In the navigation pane, click Advanced > VoIP, and click the Port tab in the right pane, as shown in Figure 8-9. Figure 8-9 Port bind
10. Bind ports 0 and 1 to the two phone numbers added in the preceding steps respectively. Click the required port, and then select the numbers mapping the port. 11. In the navigation pane, choose Status > VoIP to view the port status, as shown in Figure 8-10.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-29
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 8-10 Port status
----End
Result Connect two phone sets to two TEL ports on the ONT, and calls can be made between two phone sets.
Configuration File vlan 200 smart port vlan 200 0/19 0 traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Packag dba-profile add profile-id 20 type3 assure 16384 max 26624 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 2 dba-profile-id 20 gem add 2 eth tcont 2 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 2 1 vlan 20 commit quit ont-srvprofile gpon profile-id 10 ont-port eth 4 pots 2 commit quit interface gpon 0/1 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 32303131D659FD40 omci ont-lineprofile-id 10 ontsrvprofile-id 10 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 quit service-port 2 vlan 200 gpon 0/1/1 ont 1 gemport 2 multi-service user-vlan 20 rxcttr 9 tx-cttr 9 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
8.1.3.4 Configuring the FTTH IPTV Service The OLT is connected to the remote ONT through a GPON port to provide users with the IPTV service.
Service Requirements l
8-30
The OLT adopts IGMP proxy, an L2 multicast protocol. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
l
Multicast programs are configured statically and multicast users are authenticated.
l
The IGMP version of the multicast VLAN is IGMP V3.
l
The user accesses the device through GPON, and has the right to demand programs from the multicast source.
Table 8-6 Data plan Item
Data
OLT
Service VLAN ID: 1000 Service VLAN type: smart VLAN Upstream port: 0/19/0
ONT
ONT ID: 1 ID of the port on the ONT that is connected to the STB: 3 Type of the port on the ONT that is connected to the STB: ETH Native VLAN ID of the port on the ONT that is connected to the STB: 30
Prerequisite l
The license for the multicast program or the multicast user must already be requested and installed.
l
The OLT is connected to the BRAS and the multicast source.
l
The VLAN of the LAN switch port connected to the OLT is the same as the upstream VLAN of the OLT.
l
Configure the OLT.
Procedure 1.
Create a service VLAN and add an upstream port to it. The VLAN ID is 1000, and the VLAN is a smart VLAN, Add upstream port 0/19/0 to VLAN 1000. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/19 0
2.
Configure a traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. The profile ID is 10, no rate limitation in the upstream and downstream directions, the priority is 4, and packets are scheduled according to the priority carried. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 10 cir off priority 4 prioritypolicy tag-In-Packag
3.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile ID to 30, type to type4, and upstream bandwidth to 60 Mbit/s. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-31
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-id 30 type4 max 61440
4.
5.
(Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is reported.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to configure an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONT line.
Add an ONT line profile. Add GPON ONT line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 3 to the DBA profile 30. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 3 dba-profile-id 30
Add GEM port 3 for transmitting ETH traffic streams and bind GEM port 3 to TCONT 3. The QoS mode is priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
1. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. 2. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 3 eth tcont 3 priority-queue 6
Configure the service mapping mode from the GEM port to the ONU to VLAN (default), and map CVLAN 30 to GEM port 3. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 3 2 vlan 30 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit NOTE
After a profile is configured, run the commit command to make the configuration take effect before the system quits the profile mode.
6.
Add an ONT service profile. The service profile type must be the same as the actual ONT type. Considering the HG850a as an example, configure four ETH ports and two POTS ports. The ID of the VLAN to which ETH port 3 belongs is 30. huawei(config)#ont-srvprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#ont-port eth 4 pots 2 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#port vlan eth 3 30 huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-srvprofile-10)#quit NOTE
After a profile is configured, run the commit command to make the configuration take effect before the system quits the profile mode.
7.
Add an ONT. The ONT is connected to GPON port 0/1/1. Configure the ONT ID to 1, SN to 32303131D659FD40, management to OMCI, the bound line profile ID is 10, and the bound service profile ID is 10.
8-32
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONT offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONT.
l
Before confirming an automatically discovered ONT, you must run the port portid ont-autofind command in the GPON mode to enable the ONT automatic discovery function of the port.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONT is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/1 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/1/1 Ont SN : 32303131D659FD40 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : HG850aGTH.B Ont SoftwareVersion : V1R1C01SPC033 Ont EquipmentID : EchoLife:HG850a Ont autofind time : 2009-10-24 14:59:10 -----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 32303131D659FD40 omci ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont-srvprofile-id 10 desc HG850a NOTE
8.
l
After an ONT is added, it is recommended that you run thedisplay ont info command to query the ONT status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONT are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONT state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONT capabilities, and then add a proper ONT profile based on the queried ONT capabilities. Then, add an ONT again.
(Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default alarm profile (profile 1) is adopted. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
9.
Specify the VLAN for the ONT port. ETH port 3 on the ONT is connected to the STB and the native VLAN of the port is VLAN 30. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#ont port native-vlan 1 1 eth 3 vlan 30
10. Add a service port to the VLAN. Configure the service port ID to 3, SVLAN ID to 1000, GEM port ID to 3, and CVLAN ID to 30. Bind traffic profile 10 to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/1)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 3 vlan 1000 gpon 0/1/1 ont 1 gemport 3 multiservice user-vlan 30 rx-cttr 10 tx-cttr 10
11. Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the IPTV service is 4, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-33
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
12. Create a multicast VLAN and select the IGMP mode. Select the IGMP proxy mode. huawei(config)#multicast-vlan 1000 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp mode proxy Are you sure to change IGMP mode?(y/n)[n]:y
13. Set the IGMP version. Set the IGMP version of the multicast VLAN to IGMP v3. huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp version v3
14. Add an IGMP upstream port. The IGMP upstream port is port 0/19/0 and works in the default mode, and protocol packets are transmitted to all the IGMP upstream ports in the multicast VLAN. huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp uplink-port 0/19/0 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port-mode default Are you sure to change the uplink port mode?(y/n)[n]:y
15. (Optional) Set the multicast global parameters. In this example, the default settings are used for all the multicast global parameters. 16. Configure the program library. Configure the IP address of the multicast program to 224.1.1.10, program name to program1, IP address of the program source to 10.10.10.10. huawei(config-btv)#multicast-vlan 1000 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.10 sourceip 10.10.10.10
17. Configure the right profile. Configure the profile name to profile0, with the right of watching program 1. huawei(config-mvlan1000)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile add profile-name profile0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program1 watch
18. Configure a multicast user. Set the user of service port 3 as a multicast user and bind right profile named profile0 to the service port. huawei(config-btv)#igmp policy service-port 3 normal huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add service-port 3 auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile service-port 3 profile-name profile0 huawei(config-btv)#multicast-vlan 1000 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 3 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#quit
19. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
The ONT need not be configured.
----End 8-34
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Result The user can watch program 1 on the TV.
Configuration File vlan 1000 smart port vlan 1000 0/19 0 traffic table ip index 10 cir off priority 4 priority-policy tag-In-Packag dba-profile add profile-id 30 type4 max 61440 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 3 dba-profile-id 30 gem add 3 eth tcont 3 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 3 2 vlan 30 commit quit ont-srvprofile gpon profile-id 10 ont-port eth 4 pots 2 port vlan eth 3 30 commit quit interface gpon 0/1 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 32303131D659FD40 omci ont-lineprofile-id 10 ontsrvprofile-id 10 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 ont port native-vlan 1 1 eth 3 vlan 30 quit service-port 3 vlan 1000 gpon 0/1/1 ont 1 gemport 3 multi-service user-vlan 30 rxcttr 10 tx-cttr 10 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 multicast-vlan 1000 igmp mode proxy y igmp version v3 igmp uplink-port 0/19/0 btv igmp uplink-port-mode default y multicast-vlan 1000 igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.10 sourceip 10.10.10.10 btv igmp profile add profile-name profile0 igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name program1 watch igmp policy service-port 3 normal igmp user add service-port 3 auth igmp user bind-profile service-port 3 profile-name profile0 multicast-vlan 1000 igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 3 quit save
8.1.4 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Access Services This topic describes how to configure the Internet access, voice and multicast in the FTTB and FTTC Access Services.
Context In the FTTB and FTTC Access Services, the user can access to the ONU by LAN or xDSL. The ONU is connected to the MA5600T through an GPON port to provide users with the high-speed Internet access service, VoIP service and IPTV service. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-35
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 8-11 Example network of the multiple service in FTTB and FTTC service
8.1.4.1 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Internet Access Services (LAN Access) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the high-speed Internet access service. The ONUs that support LAN access include MA5620, MA5626, MA5610, and MA5612. This topic considers the MA5620 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT. 8.1.4.2 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Internet Access Services (ADSL2+ Access) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the high-speed Internet access service. The ONUs that support ADSL2+ access include MA5616. This topic considers the MA5616 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT. 8.1.4.3 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Internet Access Services (VDSL2 Access) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the high-speed Internet access service. The ONUs that support VDSL2 access include MA5616 and MA5652G. This topic considers the MA5616 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT. 8.1.4.4 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC VoIP Services (Based on the H.248 Protocol) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the VoIP service. The ONUs that support H.248 Protocol include MA5620, MA5626, MA5616, and MA5612. This topic considers the MA5620 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT. 8.1.4.5 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC VoIP Services (Based on the SIP Protocol) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the VoIP service. The ONUs that support SIP Protocol include MA5620, MA5626, MA5616, and MA5612. This topic considers the MA5620 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT. 8.1.4.6 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC IPTV Services The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the high-speed Internet access service. This topic considers the MA5620 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT.
8-36
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
8.1.4.1 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Internet Access Services (LAN Access) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the high-speed Internet access service. The ONUs that support LAN access include MA5620, MA5626, MA5610, and MA5612. This topic considers the MA5620 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT.
Service Requirements l
The user PC is connected to the ONU through the FE port in the PPPoE dialing mode. The ONU is connected to the OLT and then to the upper-layer network in the GPON mode to provide the high-speed Internet access service.
l
The high-speed Internet access service is identified by two precisely-bound VLAN tags. On the ONU, each user is allocated with a CVLAN; on the OLT, each slot is allocated with an SVLAN.
l
The high-speed Internet access service adopts a bandwidth-ensured mode with the maximum bandwidth 100 Mbit/s as the DBA profile and performs the 4 Mbit/s rate limitation on both the upstream and downstream directions.
Prerequisite Corresponding MA5620 version: V800R307. If another version is used, the configuration differs slightly. For details, see the configuration guide of the corresponding ONU version.
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 100, VLAN attribute QinQ and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei(config)#vlan attrib 100 q-in-q huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLAN and IP address for the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-37
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Configure the DBA profile name to PPPoE, type to Type4, and upstream bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name PPPoE type4 max 102400
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON ONU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 4 to DBA profile named PPPoE. In this way, the T-CONT can flexibly provide DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. NOTE
The ONU line profile must not be the existed on and you can create different ONU line profiles based on different services. This topic considers creating the ONU line profile 10 for example. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 4 dba-profile-name PPPoE
Add GEM port 0 for carrying management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for carrying traffic streams of the ETH type. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to T-CONT 4. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the default QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the index of the traffic profile to which the GEM port is bound. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation). NOTE
l
Before running the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same as the number of CVLANs. Therefore, you must create GEM ports according to the number of CVLANs.
l
To run the service-port command to create service ports one by one, note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. Therefore, you must create sufficient GEM ports according to the number of service ports. This topic considers this method to create one GEM port for example. The service virtual ports in the same GEM port only to replace the mapping VLAN and the mapping-index.
huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 100 (CVLAN 1001) to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1001
8-38
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ONU to GPON port 0/2/1. The ONU ID is 0, the SN is 32303131B39FD641, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#display ont autofind all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/2/1 Ont SN : 32303131B39FD641 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307 C00 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX MA5620G Ont autofind time : 2009-08-21 16:51:45 ----------------------------------------------------------------------The number of GPON autofind ONT is 1 huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/2 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont confirm 0 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont state command to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities and then add a proper ONU profile and a proper ONU based on the queried ONU capabilities.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ONU to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#quit
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-39
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ONU by running the telnet command on the OLT to configure the ONU.
3.
Create a service port. Configure the service port ID to 1001, SVLAN ID to 100, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 1001. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the ONU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be consistent with the upstream VLAN of the ONU. huawei(config)#service-port 1001 vlan 100 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 1001 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
4.
l
In this example, run the service-port command to create service ports one by one. The following considers the creation of one service port as an example. Note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. When creating a service port, pay attention to its relationships with the GEM port and the CVLAN.
l
You can also run the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches. In the case of GPON access, you must confirm a service port by specifying ont+gemindex. In addition, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same of the number of CVLANs.
Configure the queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weight as 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. Configure the priority of the Internet access service to 1 and adopt the WRR mode. NOTE
Queue scheduling is configured globally. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l 8-40
Configure the ONU. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1.
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Log in to the ONU to perform the configuration. On the OLT, use the management IP address of the ONU to log in to the ONU through Telnet. User name: root. Password: mduadmin. huawei(config)#telnet 192.168.50.2 { |service-port }: Command: telnet 192.168.50.2 Press CTRL_] to quit telnet mode Trying 192.168.50.2 ... Connected to 192.168.50.2 ... >>User name:root >>User password:
2.
Configure the traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. Add traffic profile 8, and set the CIR to 4 Mbit/s. The priority is 1, bind the traffic profile 8 and the priority policy is scheduled by the priority that the packets bear. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 8 cir 4096 priority 1 prioritypolicy tag-In-Packag
3.
Create a VLAN. Create S-VLAN, VLAN ID from 1001 to 1024. NOTE
The VLAN ID must be consistent with the CVLAN of the OLT. huawei(config)#vlan 1001-1024 smart
4.
Add an upstream port to the VLAN. Add upstream port 0/0/1 to S-VLAN, VLAN ID from 1001 to 1024. huawei(config)#port vlan 1001-1024 0/0 1
5.
Add a service port to the VLAN. Create service port 100, bind port 0/1/1 to it, and configure the C-VLAN to be 1001. NOTE
In this step, you need to create 24 service ports in batches. The following considers the creation of one service port as an example. For the rest, replace the SVLANs, and corresponding ports. huawei(config)#service-port 1001 vlan 1001 eth 0/1/1 multi-service userencap untagged rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
6.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result Users can enjoy the high-speed Internet service with PC by PPPoE.
Configuration File On the OLT side. vlan vlan port vlan
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
100 smart attrib 100 q-in-q vlan 100 0/19 0 4000 smart
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-41
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name PPPoE type4 max 102400 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 4 dba-profile-name PPPoE gem add 0 eth tcont 4 priority-queue 6 gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1001 commit quit interface gpon 0/2 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind all ont confirm 1 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1001 vlan 100 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 1001 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
On the ONU side. traffic table ip index 8 cir 4096 priority 1 priority-policy tag-In-Packag vlan 1001-1024 smart port vlan 1001-1024 0/0 1 service-port 1001 vlan 1001 eth 0/1/1 multi-service user-vlan untagged rx-cttr 8 txcttr 8 save
8.1.4.2 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Internet Access Services (ADSL2+ Access) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the high-speed Internet access service. The ONUs that support ADSL2+ access include MA5616. This topic considers the MA5616 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT.
Service Requirements l
The user PC is connected to the ONU through the ADSL2+ port in the PPPoE dialing mode. The ONU is connected to the OLT and then to the upper-layer network in the GPON mode to provide the high-speed Internet access service.
l
The high-speed Internet access service is identified by two precisely-bound VLAN tags. On the ONU, each user is allocated with a CVLAN; on the OLT, each slot is allocated with an SVLAN.
l
The high-speed Internet access service adopts a bandwidth-ensured mode with the maximum bandwidth 100 Mbit/s as the DBA profile and performs the 4 Mbit/s rate limitation on both the upstream and downstream directions.
l
Corresponding MA5616 version: V800R307. If another version is used, the configuration differs slightly. For details, see the configuration guide of the corresponding MDU version.
l
The ADSL mode is NGADSL.
Prerequisite
8-42
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
You can run the display adsl mode command in the privilege mode to query the ADSL mode.
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 100, VLAN attribute QinQ and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei(config)#vlan attrib 100 q-in-q huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLAN and IP address for the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile name to PPPoE, type to Type4, and upstream bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name PPPoE type4 max 102400
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON ONU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 4 to DBA profile named PPPoE. In this way, the T-CONT can flexibly provide DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. NOTE
The ONU line profile must not be the existed on and you can create different ONU line profiles based on different services. This topic considers creating the ONU line profile 10 for example. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 4 dba-profile-name PPPoE
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-43
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Add GEM port 0 for carrying management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for carrying traffic streams of the ETH type. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to T-CONT 4. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the default QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the index of the traffic profile to which the GEM port is bound. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation). NOTE
l
Before running the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same as the number of CVLANs. Therefore, you must create GEM ports according to the number of CVLANs.
l
To run the service-port command to create service ports one by one, note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. Therefore, you must create sufficient GEM ports according to the number of service ports. This topic considers this method to create one GEM port for example. The service virtual ports in the same GEM port only to replace the mapping VLAN and the mapping-index.
huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 100 (CVLAN 1001) to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1001
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ONU to GPON port 0/2/1. The ONU ID is 0, the SN is 32303131B39FD641, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#display ont autofind all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/2/1 Ont SN : 32303131B39FD641 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version :
8-44
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307 C00 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX MA5620G Ont autofind time : 2009-08-21 16:51:45 ----------------------------------------------------------------------The number of GPON autofind ONT is 1 huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/2 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont confirm 0 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont state command to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities and then add a proper ONU profile and a proper ONU based on the queried ONU capabilities.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ONU to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#quit
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ONU by running the telnet command on the OLT to configure the ONU.
3.
Create a service port. Configure the service port ID to 1001, SVLAN ID to 100, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 1001. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the ONU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be consistent with the upstream VLAN of the ONU. huawei(config)#service-port 1001 vlan 100 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 1001 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-45
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
NOTE
4.
l
In this example, run the service-port command to create service ports one by one. The following considers the creation of one service port as an example. Note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. When creating a service port, pay attention to its relationships with the GEM port and the CVLAN.
l
You can also run the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches. In the case of GPON access, you must confirm a service port by specifying ont+gemindex. In addition, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same of the number of CVLANs.
Configure the queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weight as 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. Configure the priority of the Internet access service to 1 and adopt the WRR mode. NOTE
Queue scheduling is configured globally. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
6.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLAN and IP address for the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile name to PPPoE, type to Type4, and upstream bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name PPPoE type4 max 102400
8-46
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON MDU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 4 to DBA profile named PPPoE. In this way, the T-CONT can flexibly provide DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. NOTE
The ONU line profile must not be the existed on and you can create different ONU line profiles based on different services. This topic considers creating the ONU line profile 10 for example. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 4 dba-profile-name PPPoE
Add GEM port 0 for carrying management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for carrying traffic streams of the ETH type. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to T-CONT 4. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the default QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the index of the traffic profile to which the GEM port is bound. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation). NOTE
l
Before running the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same as the number of CVLANs. Therefore, you must create GEM ports according to the number of CVLANs.
l
To run the service-port command to create service ports one by one, note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. Therefore, you must create sufficient GEM ports according to the number of service ports. This topic considers this method to create one GEM port for example. The service virtual ports in the same GEM port only to replace the mapping VLAN and the mapping-index.
huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 100 (CVLAN 1001) to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1001
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-47
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ONU to GPON port 0/2/1. The ONU ID is 0, the SN is 32303131B39FD641, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#display ont autofind all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/2/1 Ont SN : 32303131B39FD641 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307 C00 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX MA5616 Ont autofind time : 2009-08-21 16:51:45 ----------------------------------------------------------------------The number of GPON autofind ONT is 1 huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/2 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont confirm 0 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont state command to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities and then add a proper ONU profile and a proper ONU based on the queried ONU capabilities.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ONU to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#quit
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. 8-48
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ONU by running the telnet command on the OLT to configure the ONU.
7.
Create a service port. Configure the service port ID to 1001, SVLAN ID to 100, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 1001. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the MDU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be consistent with the upstream VLAN of the ONU. huawei(config)#service-port 1001 vlan 100 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 1001 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
8.
l
In this example, run the service-port command to create service ports one by one. The following considers the creation of one service port as an example. Note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. When creating a service port, pay attention to its relationships with the GEM port and the CVLAN.
l
You can also run the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches. In the case of GPON access, you must confirm a service port by specifying ont+gemindex. In addition, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same of the number of CVLANs.
Configure the queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weight as 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. Configure the priority of the Internet access service to 1 and adopt the WRR mode. NOTE
Queue scheduling is configured globally. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
9.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. 1.
Log in to the ONU to perform the configuration. On the OLT, use the management IP address of the ONU to log in to the ONU through Telnet. User name: root. Password: mduadmin. huawei(config)#telnet 192.168.50.2 { |service-port }:
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-49
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Command: telnet 192.168.50.2 Press CTRL_] to quit telnet mode Trying 192.168.50.2 ... Connected to 192.168.50.2 ... >>User name:root >>User password:
2.
Configure the traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. Add traffic profile 8, and set the CIR to 4 Mbit/s. The priority is 1, bind the traffic profile 8 and the priority policy is scheduled by the priority that the packets bear. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 8 cir 4096 priority 1 prioritypolicy tag-In-Packag
3.
Create a VLAN. Add an upstream port to the VLAN. Configure the SVLAN, the VLAN ID from 1001-1024. Add the upstream port 0/0/0 to these VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 1001-1024 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1001-1024 0/0 0
4.
Add a service port to the VLAN. Considers one of service virtual ports for example. The SVLAN is 1001, VPI 8, VCI 35, CVLAN untagged. The other service virtual ports can be added similarly by replacing the right SVLAN and the ADSL2+ port ID. huawei(config)#service-port 1001 vlan 1001 adsl 0/1/1 vpi 8 vci 35 multiservice user-vlan untagged rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 NOTE
In the case of batch service provisioning, run the multi-service-port command to add service ports in batches.
5.
Configure the ADSL2+ line profile. –
Run the display adsl line-profile command to query the existing ADSL2+ line profiles in the current system. A profile can be directly used if it meets the requirements.
–
If no ADSL2+ line profile in the system meets the requirements, you need to add an ADSL2+ line profile. Run the adsl line-profile quickadd command to add an ADSL2+ line profile.
The data in the ADSL2+ line profile must be configured according to the actual line conditions. Add ADSL2+ line profile 4 and use default settings for the parameters. huawei(config)#adsl line-profile quickadd 4
6.
Configure the ADSL2+ channel profile. –
Run the display adsl channel-profile command to query the existing ADSL2+ channel profiles in the current system. A profile can be directly used if it meets the requirements.
–
If no ADSL2+ channel profile in the system meets the requirements, you need to add an ADSL2+ channel profile. Run the adsl channel-profile quickadd command to add an ADSL2+ channel profile.
The data in the ADSL2+ channel profile must be configured according to the actual channel conditions. In this example, the traffic profile is used to limit the user access 8-50
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
rate; therefore, when the ADSL2+ channel profile is configured, the line rate parameters need not be configured. Add ADSL2+ channel profile 4 and use default settings for the parameters. huawei(config)#adsl channel-profile quickadd 4
7.
Configure the ADSL2+ line template. –
Run the display adsl line-template command to query the existing ADSL2+ line templates in the current system. A template can be directly used if it meets the requirements.
–
If no ADSL2+ line template in the system meets the requirements, you need to add an ADSL2+ line template. Run the adsl line-template quickadd command to add an ADSL2+ line template.
Bind the ADSL2+ line profile configured in Step 5 and the ADSL2+ channel profile configured in Step 6 to form ADSL2+ line template 3. Set the downstream rate adaptation ratio to 100% and the upstream rate adaptation ratio to 100%. huawei(config)#adsl line-template quickadd 3 line 4 channel1 4 100 100
8.
Activate the ADSL2+ port and bind the line template to the ADSL2+ port. Activate ADSL2+ port 0/1/1 and bind line template 3 to it. NOTE
The other ADSL2+ ports can be activated similarly. If you want to activate all the ports of a board, use the command activate all. huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/1 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/1)#deactivate 1 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/1)#activate 1 template-index 3
9.
(Optional) Bind the ADSL2+ alarm template to the port. Bind default ADSL2+ alarm template 1 to the port. To meet actual requirements, you can run the adsl alarm-template quickadd command to add an ADSL2+ alarm template. huawei(config-if-adsl-0/1)#alarm-config 1 1
10. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result Users can enjoy the high-speed Internet service with PC by PPPoE.
Configuration File On the OLT side. vlan 100 smart vlan attrib 100 q-in-q port vlan 100 0/19 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name PPPoE type4 max 102400 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 4 dba-profile-name PPPoE
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-51
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
gem add 0 eth tcont 4 priority-queue 6 gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1001 commit quit interface gpon 0/2 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind all ont confirm 1 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1001 vlan 100 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 1001 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
On the ONU side. traffic table ip index 8 cir 4096 priority 1 priority-policy tag-In-Packag vlan 1001-1024 smart port vlan 1001-1024 0/0 0 service-port vlan 10 adsl 0/1/1 vpi 8 vci 35 multi-service user-vlan untagged rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 adsl line-profile quickadd 4 adsl channel-profile quickadd 4 adsl line-template quickadd 3 interface adsl 0/1 deactivate 1 activate 1 template-index 3 alarm-config 1 1 save
8.1.4.3 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC Internet Access Services (VDSL2 Access) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the high-speed Internet access service. The ONUs that support VDSL2 access include MA5616 and MA5652G. This topic considers the MA5616 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT.
Service Requirements l
The user PC is connected to the ONU through the VDSL2 port in the PPPoE dialing mode. The ONU is connected to the OLT and then to the upper-layer network in the GPON mode to provide the high-speed Internet access service.
l
The high-speed Internet access service is identified by two precisely-bound VLAN tags. On the ONU, each user is allocated with a CVLAN; on the OLT, each slot is allocated with an SVLAN.
l
The high-speed Internet access service adopts a bandwidth-ensured mode with the maximum bandwidth 100 Mbit/s as the DBA profile and performs the 4 Mbit/s rate limitation on both the upstream and downstream directions.
l
Corresponding MA5616 version: V800R307. If another version is used, the configuration differs slightly. For details, see the configuration guide of the corresponding ONU version.
l
The VDSL mode is Normal.
Prerequisite
8-52
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
You can run the display vdsl mode command in the privilege mode to query the VDSL mode.
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 100, VLAN attribute QinQ and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei(config)#vlan attrib 100 q-in-q huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLAN and IP address for the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile name to PPPoE, type to Type4, and upstream bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name PPPoE type4 max 102400
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON ONU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 4 to DBA profile named PPPoE. In this way, the T-CONT can flexibly provide DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. NOTE
The ONU line profile must not be the existed on and you can create different ONU line profiles based on different services. This topic considers creating the ONU line profile 10 for example. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 4 dba-profile-name PPPoE
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-53
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Add GEM port 0 for carrying management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for carrying traffic streams of the ETH type. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to T-CONT 4. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the default QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the index of the traffic profile to which the GEM port is bound. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation). NOTE
l
Before running the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same as the number of CVLANs. Therefore, you must create GEM ports according to the number of CVLANs.
l
To run the service-port command to create service ports one by one, note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. Therefore, you must create sufficient GEM ports according to the number of service ports. This topic considers this method to create one GEM port for example. The service virtual ports in the same GEM port only to replace the mapping VLAN and the mapping-index.
huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 100 (CVLAN 1001) to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1001
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ONU to GPON port 0/2/1. The ONU ID is 0, the SN is 32303131B39FD641, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#display ont autofind all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/2/1 Ont SN : 32303131B39FD641 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version :
8-54
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307 C00 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX MA5620G Ont autofind time : 2009-08-21 16:51:45 ----------------------------------------------------------------------The number of GPON autofind ONT is 1 huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/2 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont confirm 0 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont state command to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities and then add a proper ONU profile and a proper ONU based on the queried ONU capabilities.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ONU to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#quit
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ONU by running the telnet command on the OLT to configure the ONU.
3.
Create a service port. Configure the service port ID to 1001, SVLAN ID to 100, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 1001. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the ONU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be consistent with the upstream VLAN of the ONU. huawei(config)#service-port 1001 vlan 100 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 1001 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-55
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
NOTE
4.
l
In this example, run the service-port command to create service ports one by one. The following considers the creation of one service port as an example. Note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. When creating a service port, pay attention to its relationships with the GEM port and the CVLAN.
l
You can also run the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches. In the case of GPON access, you must confirm a service port by specifying ont+gemindex. In addition, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same of the number of CVLANs.
Configure the queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weight as 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. Configure the priority of the Internet access service to 1 and adopt the WRR mode. NOTE
Queue scheduling is configured globally. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
6.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLAN and IP address for the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile name to PPPoE, type to Type4, and upstream bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name PPPoE type4 max 102400
8-56
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON MDU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 4 to DBA profile named PPPoE. In this way, the T-CONT can flexibly provide DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. NOTE
The ONU line profile must not be the existed on and you can create different ONU line profiles based on different services. This topic considers creating the ONU line profile 10 for example. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 4 dba-profile-name PPPoE
Add GEM port 0 for carrying management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for carrying traffic streams of the ETH type. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to T-CONT 4. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the default QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the index of the traffic profile to which the GEM port is bound. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation). NOTE
l
Before running the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same as the number of CVLANs. Therefore, you must create GEM ports according to the number of CVLANs.
l
To run the service-port command to create service ports one by one, note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. Therefore, you must create sufficient GEM ports according to the number of service ports. This topic considers this method to create one GEM port for example. The service virtual ports in the same GEM port only to replace the mapping VLAN and the mapping-index.
huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 100 (CVLAN 1001) to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1001
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-57
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ONU to GPON port 0/2/1. The ONU ID is 0, the SN is 32303131B39FD641, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#display ont autofind all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/2/1 Ont SN : 32303131B39FD641 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307 C00 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX MA5616 Ont autofind time : 2009-08-21 16:51:45 ----------------------------------------------------------------------The number of GPON autofind ONT is 1 huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/2 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont confirm 0 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont state command to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities and then add a proper ONU profile and a proper ONU based on the queried ONU capabilities.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ONU to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#quit
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. 8-58
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ONU by running the telnet command on the OLT to configure the ONU.
7.
Create a service port. Configure the service port ID to 1001, SVLAN ID to 100, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 1001. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the MDU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be consistent with the upstream VLAN of the ONU. huawei(config)#service-port 1001 vlan 100 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 1001 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
8.
l
In this example, run the service-port command to create service ports one by one. The following considers the creation of one service port as an example. Note that one GEM port can be bound to a maximum of eight service ports. When creating a service port, pay attention to its relationships with the GEM port and the CVLAN.
l
You can also run the multi-service-port command to create service ports in batches. In the case of GPON access, you must confirm a service port by specifying ont+gemindex. In addition, ensure that the number of GEM ports is the same of the number of CVLANs.
Configure the queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weight as 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. Configure the priority of the Internet access service to 1 and adopt the WRR mode. NOTE
Queue scheduling is configured globally. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
9.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. 1.
Log in to the ONU to perform the configuration. On the OLT, use the management IP address of the ONU to log in to the ONU through Telnet. User name: root. Password: mduadmin. huawei(config)#telnet 192.168.50.2 { |service-port }:
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-59
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Command: telnet 192.168.50.2 Press CTRL_] to quit telnet mode Trying 192.168.50.2 ... Connected to 192.168.50.2 ... >>User name:root >>User password:
2.
Configure the traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. Add traffic profile 8, and set the CIR to 4 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 8 cir 4096 priority 1 prioritypolicy tag-In-Packag
3.
Create a VLAN. Add an upstream port to the VLAN. Configure the SVLAN, the VLAN ID from 1001-1024. Add the upstream port 0/0/0 to these VLAN. huawei(config)#vlan 1001-1024 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1001-1024 0/0 0
4.
Add a service port to the VLAN. Considers one of service virtual ports for example. The SVLAN is 1001, VDSL mode PTM, CVLAN untagged. The other service virtual ports can be added similarly by replacing the right SVLAN and the VDSL port ID. huawei(config)#service-port 1001 vlan 1001 vdsl mode ptm 0/1/1 multiservice user-vlan untagged rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 NOTE
In the case of batch service provisioning, run the multi-service-port command to add service ports in batches.
5.
Configure the VDSL2 line profile. –
Run the display vdsl line-profile command to query the existing VDSL2 line profiles in the current system. A profile can be directly used if it meets the requirements.
–
If no VDSL2 line profile in the system meets the requirements, you need to add a VDSL2 line profile. Run the vdsl line-profile quickadd command to quickly add a VDSL2 line profile.
The data in the VDSL2 line profile must be configured according to the actual line conditions. Quickly add VDSL2 line profile 4 and use default settings for the parameters. huawei(config)#vdsl line-profile quickadd 4
6.
8-60
Configure the VDSL2 channel profile. –
Run the display vdsl channel-profile command to query the existing VDSL2 channel profiles in the current system. A profile can be directly used if it meets the requirements.
–
If no VDSL2 channel profile in the system meets the requirements, you need to add a VDSL2 channel profile. Run the vdsl channel-profile quickadd command to add a VDSL2 channel profile.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
The data in the VDSL2 channel profile must be configured according to the actual channel conditions. In this example, the traffic profile is used to limit the subscriber access rate; therefore, when the VDSL2 channel profile is configured, the line rate parameters need not be configured.
Quickly add VDSL2 channel profile 4 and use default settings for the parameters. huawei(config)#vdsl channel-profile quickadd 4
7.
Configure the VDSL2 line template. –
Run the display vdsl line-template command to query the existing VDSL2 line templates in the current system. A template can be directly used if it meets the requirements.
–
If no VDSL2 line template in the system meets the requirements, you need to add a VDSL2 line template. Run the vdsl line-template quickadd command to add a VDSL2 line template.
Bind the VDSL2 line profile configured in Step 5 and the VDSL2 channel profile configured in Step 6. Set the downstream rate adaptation ratio to 80% and the upstream rate adaptation ratio to 20%. huawei(config)#vdsl line-template quickadd 3 line 4 channel1 4 100 100
8.
Activate VDSL2 port 0/1/1 and bind line template 3 to it. NOTE
The other VDSL2 ports can be activated similarly. If you want to activate all the ports of a board, use the command activate all. huawei(config)#interface vdsl 0/1 huawei(config-if-vdsl-0/1)#deactivate 1 huawei(config-if-vdsl-0/1)#activate 1 template-index 3
9.
Bind the VDSL2 alarm template. In this example, bind default VDSL2 alarm template 1. To meet actual requirements, you can run the vdsl alarm-template add command to add a VDSL2 alarm template. huawei(config-if-vdsl-0/1)#alarm-config 1 1
10. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result Users can enjoy the high-speed Internet service with PC by PPPoE.
Configuration File On the OLT side. vlan 100 smart vlan attrib 100 q-in-q port vlan 100 0/19 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name PPPoE type4 max 102400 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-61
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
tcont 4 dba-profile-name PPPoE gem add 0 eth tcont 4 priority-queue 6 gem add 1 eth tcont 4 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1001 commit quit interface gpon 0/2 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind all ont confirm 1 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1001 vlan 100 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 1001 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
On the ONU side. traffic table ip index 8 cir 4096 priority 1 priority-policy tag-In-Packag vlan 1001-1024 smart port vlan 1001-1024 0/0 1 service-port 1001 vlan 1001 eth 0/1/1 multi-service user-vlan untagged rx-cttr 8 txcttr 8 save
8.1.4.4 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC VoIP Services (Based on the H.248 Protocol) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the VoIP service. The ONUs that support H.248 Protocol include MA5620, MA5626, MA5616, and MA5612. This topic considers the MA5620 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT.
Service Requirements l
The user phone is connected to the ONU through the POTS port, the ONU is connected to the OLT through GPON and then to the softswitch, thus implementing the VoIP service.
l
The DBA of the VoIP service adopts the assured bandwidth + maximum bandwidth mode, and no rate limitation is performed on the upstream and downstream traffic.
l
The polarity-reversal accounting is adopted.
l
Corresponding ONU version: V800R307. If another version is used, the configuration differs slightly. For details, see the configuration guide of the corresponding ONU version.
l
The MGC interface data and the PSTN user data corresponding to the MG interface must be configured on the MGC.
l
To run the command display board 0 to make sure the Status of the voice board of ONU is Normal.
l
Configure the OLT.
Prerequisite
Procedure 1. 8-62
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Create smart VLAN 200 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 200 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 200 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLAN and IP address for the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile name to VoIP, type to Type3, assured bandwidth to 15Mbit/s and upstream bandwidth to 30Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name VoIP type3 assure 15360 max 30720
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON ONU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 2 to DBA profile named VoIP. In this way, the T-CONT can flexibly provide DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. NOTE
The ONU line profile must not be the existed on and you can create different ONU line profiles based on different services. This topic considers creating the ONU line profile 10 for example. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 2 dba-profile-name VoIP
Add GEM port 0 for carrying management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for carrying traffic streams of the ETH type. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to T-CONT 2. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-63
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
NOTE
a. To change the default QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the index of the traffic profile to which the GEM port is bound. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 2 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 2 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 200 (CVLAN 200) to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 200
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ONU to GPON port 0/2/1. The ONU ID is 0, the SN is 32303131B39FD641, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#display ont autofind all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/2/1 Ont SN : 32303131B39FD641 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307 C00 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX MA5616 Ont autofind time : 2009-08-21 16:51:45 ----------------------------------------------------------------------The number of GPON autofind ONT is 1 huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/2 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont confirm 0 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10
8-64
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont state command to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities and then add a proper ONU profile and a proper ONU based on the queried ONU capabilities.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ONU to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#quit
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ONU by running the telnet command on the OLT to configure the ONU.
3.
Configure the traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. Add traffic profile 9, and no rate limitation on user packets. The priority is 6 and the priority policy is scheduled by the priority that the packets bear. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Packag
4.
Create a service port. Configure the service port ID to 200, SVLAN ID to 200, GEM port ID to 1, bind traffic profile 9 and CVLAN ID to 200. NOTE
The CVLAN must be consistent with the upstream VLAN of the ONU. huawei(config)#service-port 200 vlan 200 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 200 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9
5. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Configure the queue scheduling. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-65
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weight as 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. Configure the priority of the VoIP service to 6 and adopt the PQ mode. NOTE
Queue scheduling is configured globally. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
6.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. 1.
Log in to the ONU to perform the configuration. On the OLT, use the management IP address of the ONU to log in to the ONU through Telnet. User name: root. Password: mduadmin. huawei(config)#telnet 192.168.50.2 { |service-port }: Command: telnet 192.168.50.2 Press CTRL_] to quit telnet mode Trying 192.168.50.2 ... Connected to 192.168.50.2 ... >>User name:root >>User password:
2.
Configure the upstream port of the media stream and the signaling stream. Create VLAN 10 and add upstream port 0/0/0 to the VLAN. Configure the IP address of the VLAN L3 interface to 17.10.10.10 and subnet mask to 255.255.0.0, NOTE
l
The VLAN ID of the default upstream Ethernet port is 1. Use the default VLAN if no specific VLAN is required for the upstream transmission.
l
If you need to use another VLAN to transmit packets in the upstream direction, run the port vlan command to add the specified upstream port to the VLAN.
huawei(config)#vlan 200 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 200 0/0 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 200 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#ip address 17.10.10.10 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#quit
3.
Configure the media and signaling IP address pools. Configure both the media IP address and the signaling IP address to 17.10.10.10 huawei(config)#voip huawei(config-voip)#ip address media 17.10.10.10 17.10.10.1 huawei(config-voip)#ip address signaling 17.10.10.10 huawei(config-voip)#quit
8-66
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
4.
l
You can configure the attributes of the MG interface only when the media IP address and the signaling IP address exist in the media and signaling IP address pools.
l
The media IP address and the signaling IP address can be different. You can plan the IP addresses according to the actual network.
Configure the static route. Because the IP address of the VLAN interface and the IP address of the MGC are in different network segments, you should configure a route for the network segment from gateway 17.10.10.1 to 200.200.200.0. huawei(config)#ip route-static 200.200.200.0 24 17.10.10.1
5.
Add an MG interface. Add MG interface 0. huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
6.
Configure the attributes of the MG interface. –
Signaling IP address: 17.10.10.10
–
Coding mode: text
–
Port number of the transport layer protocol: 2944
–
Transfer mode: UDP
–
IP address of the primary MGC: 200.200.200.200
–
Port number of the transport layer protocol of the primary MGC: 2944
–
Media IP address 1: 17.10.10.10
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 17.10.10.10 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp primary-mgc-ip1 200.200.200.200 primary-mgcport 2944 mg-media-ip1 17.10.10.10
7.
Reset the MG interface. huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit
8.
Configure the PSTN user data. Configure the telephone number of the user on port 0/3/1 to 0/3/24, telephone number of the user from 83110001 to 83110024, and terminal ID to 0. NOTE
l
To configure the PSTN data of a single user, run the mgpstnuser add command.
l
To configure the PSTN data of multiple users in batches, run the mgpstnuser batadd command.
l
If the user of the MG interface is configured to support terminal layering, you need not configure the terminal ID and the system automatically allocates it. If the user of the MG interface does not support terminal layering, this parameter is mandatory. The terminal ID must be unique on one MG interface.
huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/3/1 0/3/24 0 terminalid 0 telno 83110001
9.
Change the call priority of the PSTN user. Configure the call priority of the user on port 0/3/1 to Cat2 and the users of 0/3/1 to 0/3/24 to Cat3(Default)
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-67
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser modify 0/3/1 priority cat2 huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
10. Modify the attributes of all the PSTN ports so that the PSTN ports supports the polarity reversal. Modify the attributes of the PSTN port 0/3/1 to 0/3/24 so that the PSTN ports supports the polarity reversal. huawei(config)#pstnport huawei(config-pstnport)#pstnport attribute batset 0/3/1 0/3/24 reversepole-pulse enable huawei(config-pstnport)#quit
11. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration is completed, users can make calls between two phones. l
The caller can hear the dial tone after picking up the phone.
l
When the caller dials the phone number of the callee, the phone of the callee can ring normally, and the caller can hear the ringback tone.
l
The caller and the callee can communicate with each other successfully.
l
After the callee hangs up the phone, the caller can hear the busy tone.
Configuration File On the OLT side. vlan 200 smart port vlan 200 0/19 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name VoIP type3 assure 15360 max 30720 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 2 dba-profile-name VoIP gem add 0 eth tcont 2 priority-queue 6 gem add 1 eth tcont 2 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 200 commit quit interface gpon 0/2 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Package service-port 200 vlan 200 gpon 0/2/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 200 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
On the ONU side. 8-68
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
vlan 200 smart port vlan 200 0/0 0 interface vlanif 200 ip address 17.10.10.10 16 quit voip ip address media 17.10.10.10 17.10.10.1 ip address signaling 17.10.10.10 quit ip route-static 200.200.200.0 24 17.10.10.1 interface h248 0 if-h248 attribute mgip 17.10.10.10 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp primary-mgcip1 200.200.200.200 primary-mgc-port 2944 mg-media-ip1 17.10.10.10 reset coldstart quit esl user mgpstnuser batadd 0/3/1 0/3/24 0 terminalid 0 telno 83110001 mgpstnuser modify 0/3/1 priority cat2 quit pstnport pstnport attribute batset 0/3/1 0/3/24 reverse-pole-pulse enable quit save
8.1.4.5 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC VoIP Services (Based on the SIP Protocol) The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the VoIP service. The ONUs that support SIP Protocol include MA5620, MA5626, MA5616, and MA5612. This topic considers the MA5620 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT.
Service Requirements l
The user phone is connected to the ONU through the POTS port, the ONU is connected to the OLT through GPON and then to the softswitch, thus implementing the VoIP service.
l
The DBA of the VoIP service adopts the assured bandwidth + maximum bandwidth mode, and no rate limitation is performed on the upstream and downstream traffic.
l
The polarity-reversal accounting is adopted.
l
Corresponding ONU version: V800R307. If another version is used, the configuration differs slightly. For details, see the configuration guide of the corresponding ONU version.
l
The PSTN user data corresponding to the SIP interface must be configured on the IMS.
l
To run the command display board 0 to make sure the Status of the voice board of ONU is Normal.
l
Configure the OLT.
Prerequisite
Procedure 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 200 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 200 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 200 0/19 0
2. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Add an ONU on the OLT. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-69
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLAN and IP address for the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile name to VoIP, type to Type3, assured bandwidth to 15Mbit/s and upstream bandwidth to 30Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name VoIP type3 assure 15360 max 30720
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON ONU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 2 to DBA profile named VoIP. In this way, the T-CONT can flexibly provide DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. NOTE
The ONU line profile must not be the existed on and you can create different ONU line profiles based on different services. This topic considers creating the ONU line profile 10 for example. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 2 dba-profile-name VoIP
Add GEM port 0 for carrying management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for carrying traffic streams of the ETH type. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to T-CONT 2. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the default QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the index of the traffic profile to which the GEM port is bound. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation).
8-70
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 2 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 2 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 200 (CVLAN 200) to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 200
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ONU to GPON port 0/2/1. The ONU ID is 0, the SN is 32303131B39FD641, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#display ont autofind all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/2/1 Ont SN : 32303131B39FD641 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307 C00 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX MA5616 Ont autofind time : 2009-08-21 16:51:45 ----------------------------------------------------------------------The number of GPON autofind ONT is 1 huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/2 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont confirm 0 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont state command to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities and then add a proper ONU profile and a proper ONU based on the queried ONU capabilities.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-71
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ONU to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#quit
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ONU by running the telnet command on the OLT to configure the ONU.
3.
Configure the traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. Add traffic profile 9, and no rate limitation on user packets. The priority is 6 and the priority policy is scheduled by the priority that the packets bear. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Packag
4.
Create a service port. Configure the service port ID to 200, SVLAN ID to 200, GEM port ID to 1, bind traffic profile 9 and CVLAN ID to 200. NOTE
The CVLAN must be consistent with the upstream VLAN of the ONU. huawei(config)#service-port 200 vlan 200 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 200 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9
5.
Configure the queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weight as 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. Configure the priority of the VoIP service to 6 and adopt the PQ mode. NOTE
Queue scheduling is configured globally. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7
8-72
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
6.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. 1.
Log in to the ONU to perform the configuration. On the OLT, use the management IP address of the ONU to log in to the ONU through Telnet. User name: root. Password: mduadmin. huawei(config)#telnet 192.168.50.2 { |service-port }: Command: telnet 192.168.50.2 Press CTRL_] to quit telnet mode Trying 192.168.50.2 ... Connected to 192.168.50.2 ... >>User name:root >>User password:
2.
Configure the upstream port of the media stream and the signaling stream. Create VLAN 200 and add upstream port 0/0/0 to the VLAN. Configure the IP address of the VLAN L3 interface to 17.10.10.10 and subnet mask to 255.255.0.0, NOTE
l
The VLAN ID must be consistent with the CVLAN of the OLT.
l
The VLAN ID of the default upstream Ethernet port is 1. Use the default VLAN if no specific VLAN is required for the upstream transmission.
l
If you need to use another VLAN to transmit packets in the upstream direction, run the port vlan command to add the specified upstream port to the VLAN.
huawei(config)#vlan 200 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 200 0/0 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 200 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#ip address 17.10.10.10 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#quit
3.
Configure the media and signaling IP address pools. Configure both the media IP address and the signaling IP address to 17.10.10.10 huawei(config)#voip huawei(config-voip)#ip address media 17.10.10.10 17.10.10.1 huawei(config-voip)#ip address signaling 17.10.10.10 huawei(config-voip)#quit NOTE
4.
l
You can configure the attributes of the SIP interface only when the media IP address and the signaling IP address exist in the media and signaling IP address pools.
l
The media IP address and the signaling IP address can be different. You can plan the IP addresses according to the actual network.
Configure the static route. Because the IP address of the VLAN interface and the IP address of the IMS are in different network segments, you should configure a route for the network segment from gateway 17.10.10.1 to 200.200.200.0. huawei(config)#ip route-static 200.200.200.0 24 17.10.10.1
5.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Add an SIP interface. Add SIP interface 0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-73
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#interface sip 0 Are you sure to add SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y
6.
Configure the basic attributes of the SIP interface. –
Signaling IP address: 17.10.10.10
–
Coding mode: text
–
Signaling port ID: 5060
–
Transfer mode: UDP
–
IP address of the primary IMS: 200.200.200.200
–
Signaling port ID of the primary IMS: 5060
–
Media IP address 1: 17.10.10.10
–
Homing domain name of SIP interface: huawei
–
SIP profile ID: 1
huawei(config-if-sip-0)#if-sip attribute basic media-ip 17.10.10.10 signal-ip 17.10.10.10 signal-port 5060 transfer udp primary-proxy-ip1 200.200.200.200 primary-proxy-port 5060 home-domain huawei sipprofileindex 1
7.
Configure the optional attributes of the SIP interface. You can configure the optional attributes such as the domain name, description, register server uniform resource identifier (URI), phone context and conference factory URI by running commandif-sip attribute optional. No configuration here.
8.
Reset the SIP interface. huawei(config-if-sip-0)#reset Are you sure to reset SIP interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-sip-0)#quit
9.
Configure the PSTN user data. Configure the telephone number of the user on port 0/3/1 to 0/3/24, telephone number of the user from 83110001 to 83110024, and terminal ID to 0. NOTE
l
To configure the PSTN data of a single user, run the sippstnuser add command.
l
To configure the PSTN data of multiple users in batches, run the sippstnuser batadd command.
huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#sippstnuser batadd 0/3/1 0/3/24 0 telno 83110001
10. Change the call priority of the PSTN user. Configure the call priority of the user on port 0/3/1 to Cat2 and the users of 0/3/1 to 0/3/24 to Cat3(Default) huawei(config-esl-user)#sippstnuser attribute set 0/3/1 priority cat2 huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
11. Modify the attributes of all the PSTN ports so that the PSTN ports supports the polarity reversal. Modify the attributes of the PSTN port 0/3/1 to 0/3/24 so that the PSTN ports supports the polarity reversal. huawei(config)#pstnport huawei(config-pstnport)#pstnport attribute batset 0/3/1 0/3/24 reversepole-pulse enable huawei(config-pstnport)#quit
12. Save the data. 8-74
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the configuration is completed, users can make calls between two phones. l
The caller can hear the dial tone after picking up the phone.
l
When the caller dials the phone number of the callee, the phone of the callee can ring normally, and the caller can hear the ringback tone.
l
The caller and the callee can communicate with each other successfully.
l
After the callee hangs up the phone, the caller can hear the busy tone.
Configuration File On the OLT side. vlan 200 smart port vlan 200 0/19 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name VoIP type3 assure 15360 max 30720 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 2 dba-profile-name VoIP gem add 0 eth tcont 2 priority-queue 6 gem add 1 eth tcont 2 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 200 commit quit interface gpon 0/2 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Package service-port 200 vlan 200 gpon 0/2/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 200 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
On the ONU side. vlan 200 smart port vlan 200 0/0 0 interface vlanif 200 ip address 17.10.10.10 16 quit voip ip address media 17.10.10.10 17.10.10.1 ip address signaling 17.10.10.10 quit ip route-static 200.200.200.0 24 17.10.10.1 interface sip 0 if-sip attribute basic media-ip 17.10.10.10 signal-ip 17.10.10.10 signal-port 5060 transfer udp primary-proxy-ip1 200.200.200.200
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-75
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
primary-proxy-port 5060 home-domain huawei sipprofile-index 1 reset quit esl user sippstnuser batadd 0/3/1 0/3/24 0 telno 83110001 sippstnuser attribute set 0/3/1 priority cat2 quit pstnport pstnport attribute batset 0/3/1 0/3/24 reverse-pole-pulse enable quit save
8.1.4.6 Configuring the FTTB and FTTC IPTV Services The MA5600T is connected to a remote ONU through the GPON port to provide users with the high-speed Internet access service. This topic considers the MA5620 as an example, and uses the GPBC board on the OLT.
Service Requirements l
The user set-top box (STB) is connected to the ONU through FE port, and the ONU is connected to the OLT and then to the upper-layer network through GPON, thus implementing the IPTV service.
l
The DBA of the IPTV service adopts the maximum bandwidth mode, and no rate limitation is performed on the upstream and downstream traffic.
l
The OLT adopts IGMP proxy and the ONU adopts IGMP snooping.
l
Multicast programs are configured statically.
l
Multicast logs are reported to the log server in the CDR format.
l
The license for the multicast program or the multicast user must already be requested and installed.
l
Corresponding MA5620 version: V800R307. If another version is used, the configuration differs slightly. For details, see the configuration guide of the corresponding ONU version.
l
Configure the OLT.
Prerequisite
Procedure 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 1000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLAN and IP address for the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24.
8-76
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile name to IPTV, type to Type4, and upstream bandwidth to 100 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name IPTV type4 max 102400
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON ONU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 3 to DBA profile named IPTV. In this way, the T-CONT can flexibly provide DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. NOTE
The ONU line profile must not be the existed on and you can create different ONU line profiles based on different services. This topic considers creating the ONU line profile 10 for example. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 3 dba-profile-name IPTV
Add GEM port 0 for carrying management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for carrying traffic streams of the ETH type. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to T-CONT 3. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the default QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gem-car or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the index of the traffic profile to which the GEM port is bound. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 3 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 3 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 100 (CVLAN 1001) to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1001
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-77
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ONU to GPON port 0/2/1. The ONU ID is 0, the SN is 32303131B39FD641, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#display ont autofind all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/2/1 Ont SN : 32303131B39FD641 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307 C00 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX MA5620G Ont autofind time : 2009-08-21 16:51:45 ----------------------------------------------------------------------The number of GPON autofind ONT is 1 huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/2 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont confirm 0 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont state command to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities and then add a proper ONU profile and a proper ONU based on the queried ONU capabilities.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ONU to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/2)#quit
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the 8-78
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2 ont 0 gemport 0 multiservice user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ONU by running the telnet command on the OLT to configure the ONU.
3.
Create a service port. Configure the service port ID to 1000, SVLAN ID to 1000, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 1001. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the ONU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be consistent with the upstream VLAN of the ONU. huawei(config)#service-port 1000 vlan 1000 gpon 0/2/1 ont 0 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 1000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
4.
Configure the queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weight as 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. Configure the priority of the IPTV service to 4 and adopt the WRR mode. NOTE
Queue scheduling is configured globally. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Set the IGMP version. Use IGMP V3. huawei(config)#multicast-vlan 1000 huawei(config-mvlan10000)#igmp version v3
6.
Select the IGMP mode. Select the IGMP proxy mode. huawei(config-mvlan10000)#igmp mode proxy Are you sure to change IGMP mode?(y/n)[n]:y
7.
Configure the IGMP upstream port. The IGMP upstream port is port 0/19/0 and works in the default mode, and protocol packets are transmitted to all the IGMP upstream ports in the multicast VLAN. huawei(config-mvlan10000)#igmp uplink-port 0/19/0
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-79
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
8.
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Set the multicast global parameters. In this example, the default settings are used for all the multicast global parameters.
9.
Configure the program library. The multicast IP address of the program is 224.1.1.10 and the IP address of the program source is 10.10.10.10 huawei(config-mvlan10000)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.10 sourceip 10.10.10.10
10. Configure a multicast user and add the user to the multicast VLAN. Add service port 1000 as a multicast user, add the user to multicast VLAN 1000, and adopt no-auth for the user. NOTE
l
If set users to be authenticated, you can run the command igmp profile add to add a multicast authority profile, and then use the command igmp profile to modify the authority parameters. At last, use the commandigmp user bind-profile to bind this profile to the user need to be authenticated.
l
If set users to be authenticated, delete the no-auth parameter.
huawei(config-mvlan10000)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add service-port 1000 no-auth huawei(config-btv)#multicast-vlan 1000 huawei(config-mvlan10000)#igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 100
11. Configure a log server. Enable CDR log reporting, and configure the IP address of the active server to 10.10.10.20. huawei(config-mvlan10000)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp cdr enable huawei(config-btv)#quit huawei(config)#file-server auto-backup log primary 10.10.10.20 tftp
12. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. 1.
Log in to the ONU to perform the configuration. On the OLT, use the management IP address of the ONU to log in to the ONU through Telnet. User name: root. Password: mduadmin. huawei(config)#telnet 192.168.50.2 { |service-port }: Command: telnet 192.168.50.2 Press CTRL_] to quit telnet mode Trying 192.168.50.2 ... Connected to 192.168.50.2 ... >>User name:root >>User password:
2.
Configure the traffic profile. You can run the display traffic table ip command to query the traffic profiles existing in the system. If the traffic profiles existing in the system do not meet the requirements, you need to run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile. Add traffic profile 10, and no rate limitation on user packets. The priority is 1, bind the traffic profile 8 and the priority policy is scheduled by the priority that the packets bear.
8-80
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 10 cir off priority 4 prioritypolicy tag-In-Packag
3.
Configure a VLAN and add an upstream port to the VLAN. Create S-VLAN 1000 and add upstream port 0/0/1 to S-VLAN 1000. NOTE
The CVLAN must be consistent with the upstream VLAN of the ONU. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/0 1
4.
Configure a service port. Add service port 1000, CVLAN to untagged , and bind VLAN 1000 and traffic profile 10 to it. huawei(config)#service-port 1000 vlan 1000 eth 0/1/1 multi-service uservlan untagged rx-cttr 10 tx-cttr 10
5.
Configure the multicast mode and multicast protocol version. Configure the multicast mode to IGMP snooping and adopt IGMP V3. huawei(config)#multicast-vlan 1000 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp mode snooping huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp version v3
6.
Configure a multicast upstream port and a multicast program. Configure upstream port 0/0/1 as the upstream multicast port, and configure the IP address of the multicast to 224.1.1.10 and the source IP address to 10.10.10.10. huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp uplink-port 0/0/1 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp program add ip 224.1.1.10 sourceip 10.10.10.10
7.
Configure a multicast user and add the user to the multicast VLAN. Configure service port 1000 as a multicast user, add the user to VLAN 1000, and adopt the no-auth mode for the multicast user. NOTE
l
If set users to be authenticated, you can run the command igmp profile add to add a multicast authority profile, and then use the command igmp profile to modify the authority parameters. At last, use the commandigmp user bind-profile to bind this profile to the user need to be authenticated.
l
If set users to be authenticated, delete the no-auth parameter.
huawei(config-mvlan1000)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add service-port 1000 no-auth huawei(config-btv)#multicast-vlan 1000 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 100
8.
Save the configuration. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result The user can watch program 1 on the TV.
Configuration File On the OLT side. vlan 1000 smart port vlan 1000 0/19 0 vlan 4000 smart
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-81
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name IPTV type4 max 61440 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 3 dba-profile-name IPTV gem add 0 eth tcont 3 priority-queue 6 gem add 1 eth tcont 3 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 1000 commit quit interface gpon 0/2 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 0 sn-auth 32303131B39FD641 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 ont ipconfig 1 0 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 0 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/2/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1000 vlan 100 gpon 0/2/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 1000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 multicast-vlan 1000 igmp version v3 igmp mode proxy igmp uplink-port 0/19/0 igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.10 sourceip 10.10.10.10 btv igmp user add service-port 1000 no-auth multicast-vlan 1000 igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 1000 btv igmp cdr enable quit file-server auto-backup log primary 10.10.10.20 tftp save
On the ONU side. vlan 1000 port vlan 1000 0/0 1 traffic table ip index 10 cir off priority 4 priority-policy tag-In-Packag service-port 1000 vlan 1000 eth 0/1/1 multi-service user-vlan untagged rx-cttr 10 tx-cttr 10 multicast-vlan 1000 igmp mode snooping igmp version v3 igmp uplink-port 0/0/1 igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.10 sourceip 10.10.10.10 btv igmp user add service-port 1000 no-auth multicast-vlan 1000 igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 100 save
8.1.5 Configuring the FTTO (OLT+ATN930) Service Through the MA5600T+ATN930 network, the fiber to the office (FTTO) solution is provided for enterprise users. This topic describes how to configure the TDM PBX access, IP PBX access, and enterprise router access services in the FTTO scenario.
8-82
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Context In the FTTO solution, an ATN930, which functions as the SBU, provides various types of ports and supports multiple networking modes to meet networking requirements for various services in different environments. The ATN930 features the following: l
Provides eight E1 ports for connecting to the enterprise TDM PBX to provide the TDM private line service.
l
Provides four FE/GE electrical ports for connecting to a device such as LAN switch or enterprise router.
l
Transmits services upstream to the OLT and then to the SDH or PSN network.
l
Encapsulates the TDM voice service and data service through the PWE3 technology to ensure the reliable transmission of signals.
8.1.5.1 Configuring the TDM PBX Access Service The ATN930 provides eight E1 ports for connecting to the enterprise TDM PBX, and the OLT transmits signals of the TDM PBX upstream to the SDH or PSN network. 8.1.5.2 Configuring the IP PBX Access Service The ATN930 provides four FE/GE ports for connecting to the enterprise IP PBX, and the OLT transmits signals of the IP PBX upstream to the PSN network. 8.1.5.3 Configuring the Enterprise Router Access Service The ATN930 provides four FE/GE ports for connecting to the enterprise router or L3 switch, and the OLT transmits signals of the router or switch upstream to the IP network.
8.1.5.1 Configuring the TDM PBX Access Service The ATN930 provides eight E1 ports for connecting to the enterprise TDM PBX, and the OLT transmits signals of the TDM PBX upstream to the SDH or PSN network.
Service Requirements l
The E1 port of the ATN930 is connected to the enterprise TDM PBX.
l
Through line emulation, the TDM service data can be transmitted in the GPON network.
l
Signals are transmitted upstream to the OLT through GPON, and the OLT transmits the signals upstream to the SDH or PSN network.
l
Various PWE3 encapsulation modes are flexibly adopted.
Background Information The TDM PBX access service is classified into two scenarios: l
The ATN930 provides the PBX access, and the OLT transmits signals upstream to the SDH network through the E1 or STM-1 port.
l
The ATN930 provides the PBX access, and the OLT transmits signals upstream to the PSN network (MPLS or IP bearer network) through the FE or GE port.
Note that the service configurations are different in different network scenarios. Figure 8-12 shows an example network of the TDM PBX access service.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-83
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Figure 8-12 Example network of the TDM PBX access service
Procedure l
Scenario 1: The ATN930 provides the PBX access, and the OLT transmits signals upstream to the SDH network through the E1 or STM-1 port. For details about the configuration, see 8.1.6.1 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service Between the CBU and the OLT.
l
Scenario 2: The ATN930 provides the PBX access, and the OLT transmits signals upstream to the PSN network (MPLS or IP bearer network) through the FE or GE port. According to different bearer networks (MPLS and IP bearer networks), this scenario is subdivided into the two cases. For details about the configuration, see the following topics: –
8.1.6.2 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (MPLSbased).
–
8.1.6.3 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (IPbased).
----End
8.1.5.2 Configuring the IP PBX Access Service The ATN930 provides four FE/GE ports for connecting to the enterprise IP PBX, and the OLT transmits signals of the IP PBX upstream to the PSN network.
Service Requirements l
The FE/GE port of the ATN930 is connected to the enterprise IP PBX.
l
Data can be transparently transmitted in the GPON network.
l
Signals are transmitted upstream to the OLT through GPON, and the OLT transmits the signals upstream to the IP or MPLS network.
l
L2 VPN adopts the QinQ VLAN or ETH PWE3 encapsulation mode.
Background Information IP PBX is an IP network-based company telephone system. It can integrates voice communication into the data network of the company, thus setting up an integrated voice and data network that can connect all offices and employees distributed all over the world. For example, the SoftCo series IP voice integrated switch of Huawei can function as a mini NGN system and IP-PBX. The IP PBX access service is classified into two scenarios: 8-84
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
l
The ATN930 provides the IP PBX access, and the OLT transmits data transparently to the IP network in the QinQ VLAN mode.
l
The ATN930 provides the IP PBX access, and the OLT transmits data transparently to the MPLS network in the ETH PWE3 mode.
Note that the service configurations vary with the network scenario. Figure 8-13 shows an example network of the IP PBX access service. Figure 8-13 Example network of the IP PBX access service
Procedure l
Scenario 1: The ATN930 provides the IP PBX access, and the OLT transmits data transparently to the IP network in the QinQ VLAN mode. For details about the configuration, see 8.1.5.3 Configuring the Enterprise Router Access Service.
l
Scenario 2: The ATN930 provides the IP PBX access, and the OLT transmits data transparently to the MPLS network in the ETH PWE3 mode. For details about the configuration, see 8.1.6.6 Configuring the ETH PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU.
----End
8.1.5.3 Configuring the Enterprise Router Access Service The ATN930 provides four FE/GE ports for connecting to the enterprise router or L3 switch, and the OLT transmits signals of the router or switch upstream to the IP network.
Service Requirements l
The FE/GE port of the ATN930 is connected to the enterprise router or L3 switch.
l
The QinQ VLAN encapsulation mode is adopted so that data can be transparently transmitted in the GPON network.
l
Signals are transmitted upstream to the OLT through GPON, and then the OLT transmits the signals upstream to the IP network.
Figure 8-14 shows an example network of the enterprise router access service. The Intranet data is transmitted to the ATN930 through an L3 switch or enterprise router. Configure the QinQ VLAN private line on both ATN930_1 and ATN930_2 so that the service data and BPDUs between enterprise private networks can be transparently transmitted in the public network. This provides a transparent and safe data channel for enterprise private networks that are located in different places. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-85
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Figure 8-14 Example network of the enterprise router access service
Data Plan Table 8-7 provides the data plan for the OLT, and Table 8-8 provides the data plan for the ATN930. Table 8-7 Data plan for configuring the enterprise router access service-OLT side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000 SVLAN: smart VLAN 2000 with the attribute QinQ
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.1/24
GPON service board
Port: 0/3/1 ONU ID: 1 ONU authentication mode: SN ONU SN: 48575443E6D8B541
DBA profile
Profile name: PrivateLine Type: type3 Assured bandwidth: 20 Mbit/s Maximum bandwidth: 50 Mbit/s
ONU line profile
Profile ID: 10, bound to the DBA profile named PrivateLine GEM port IDs: 0 and 1 T-CONT ID: 5
ONU management mode
8-86
SNMP
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Table 8-8 Data plan for configuring the enterprise router access service-ATN930 side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN SVLAN: smart VLAN 2000 with the attribute QinQ, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to the VLAN Private VLANs of enterprise A and enterprise B: VLAN 50 and VLAN 60
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.2/24
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. NOTE
OLT_1 and OLT_2 have the same configuration.
1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 2000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 2000 smart huawei(config)#vlan attrib 2000 q-in-q huawei(config)#port vlan 2000 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLANs and IP addresses of the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the management IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the profile name to PrivateLine, profile type to Type3, assured bandwidth to 20 Mbit/s, and maximum bandwidth to 50 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name PrivateLine type3 assure 20480 max 51200
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-87
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
–
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON MDU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 5 to the DBA profile named PrivateLine. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 5 dba-profile-name PrivateLine
Add GEM port 0 for transmitting management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for transmitting ETH traffic streams. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to TCONT 5. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 5. NOTE
a. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gemcar or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 5 priorityqueue 5 cascade on huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 5 priorityqueue 5 cascade on
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 2000 to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 2000
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ATN930 to GPON port 0/3/1. The ONU ID is 1, the SN is 48575443E6D8B541, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
8-88
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/3/1 Ont SN : 48575443E6D8B541 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : ATN930V800R307C01B020 Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307C01 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX ATN930 Ont autofind time : 2009-09-10 10:20:45 -----------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont statecommand to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities, and then add a proper ONU profile based on the queried ONU capabilities. Then, add an ONU again.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ATN930 to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ipcommand to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ATN930 by running the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to configure the ATN930.
3.
Create a service port. Configure the service port ID to 1, SVLAN ID to 2000, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 2000. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the MDU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-89
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
NOTE
The CVLAN must be the same as the upstream VLAN of the ATN930. huawei(config)#service-port 1 vlan 2000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multiservice user-vlan 2000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
4.
Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the TDM emulation service is 6, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ATN930. NOTE
ATN930_1 and ATN930_2 have the same configuration.
1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Configure the SVLAN ID to 2000, type to smart, attribute to QinQ, and upstream GPON port to 0/0/0. huawei(config)#vlan 2000 smart huawei(config)#vlan attrib 2000 q-in-q huawei(config)#port vlan 2000 0/0 0
2.
(Optional) Enable transparent transmission of BPDUs, and bind VLAN service profile 1 to the SVLAN. huawei(config)#vlan service-profile profile-id 1 huawei(config-vlan-srvprof-1)#bpdu tunnel enable Info: Please use the commit command to make modifications take effect huawei(config-vlan-srvprof-1)#commit huawei(config-vlan-srvprof-1)#quit huawei(config)#vlan bind service-profile 2000 profile-id 1
3.
Create a service port. Create service ports for VLAN 2000 with the QinQ attribute. The outer VLAN ID is 2000. The router or L3 switch of enterprise A is connected to GE port 0/4/0 of the ATN930, and the Intranet packets of enterprise A contain VLAN tag 50; the router or L3 switch of enterprise B is connected to GE port 0/4/1 of the ATN930, and the Intranet packets of enterprise B contain VLAN tag 60. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 2000 eth 0/4/0 multi-service user-vlan 50 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 2000 eth 0/4/1 multi-service user-vlan 60 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
8-90
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
4.
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result The private networks distributed in two places can communicate with each other and various services can be provided between these private networks.
Configuration File Configure the OLT. vlan 2000 smart vlan attrib 2000 q-in-q port vlan 2000 0/19 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name PrivateLine type3 assure 20480 max 51200 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 5 dba-profile-name PrivateLine gem add 0 eth tcont 5 priority-queue 5 cascade on gem add 1 eth tcont 5 priority-queue 5 cascade on mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 2000 commit quit interface gpon 0/3 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1 vlan 2000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 2000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
Configure the ATN930. vlan 2000 smart vlan attrib 2000 q-in-q port vlan 2000 0/0 0 vlan service-profile profile-id 1 bpdu tunnel enable commit quit vlan bind service-profile 2000 profile-id 1 service-port vlan 2000 eth 0/4/0 multi-service user-vlan 50 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port vlan 2000 eth 0/4/1 multi-service user-vlan 60 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
8.1.6 Configuring the FTTM (OLT+ATN930) Service In the FTTM network, the ATN930 functions as a base station AG and is connected to the 2G or 3G base station in various modes. After the OLT transmits signals upstream to the upperlayer network, the ATN930 is connected to the base station controller (BSC) or radio network controller (RNC) to implement the FTTM network application over the 2G or 3G network. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-91
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8.1.6.1 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service Between the CBU and the OLT The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 2G or 3G base station through the E1 port and transmits the TDM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT terminates the emulation data and restores TDM signals, and then transmits the signals to the SDH network through the E1 or STM-1 port. In this way, the traditional circuit-switched service is implemented over the GPON network. 8.1.6.2 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (MPLS-based) The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 2G or 3G base station through the E1 port and transmits the TDM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the MPLS network and remote PTN network through the GE port. In this way, the traditional circuit-switched service is implemented over the GPON network. 8.1.6.3 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (IP-based) The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 2G or 3G base station through the E1 port and transmits the TDM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the IP network and remote PTN network through the GE port. In this way, the traditional circuit-switched service is implemented over the GPON network. 8.1.6.4 Configuring the ATM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (MPLS-based) The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 3G base station through ATM (the physical port is the E1 port), and transmits the ATM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the MPLS network and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port. In this way, the ATM service is implemented over the GPON network. 8.1.6.5 Configuring the ATM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (IP-based) The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 3G base station through ATM (the physical port is the E1 port), and transmits the ATM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the IP network and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port. In this way, the ATM service is implemented over the GPON network. 8.1.6.6 Configuring the ETH PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 3G base station through the FE or GE port, and transmits the Ethernet data upstream to the OLT after ETH PWE3 encapsulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the MPLS network and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port. In this way, the ETH service is implemented over the GPON network.
8.1.6.1 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service Between the CBU and the OLT The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 2G or 3G base station through the E1 port and transmits the TDM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT terminates the emulation data and restores TDM signals, and then transmits the signals to the SDH network through the E1 or STM-1 port. In this way, the traditional circuit-switched service is implemented over the GPON network.
Service Requirements l
The E1 port is used for connecting to the 2G or 3G base station in a unified manner.
l
GPON is adopted for bearing the mobile AN in a unified manner to meet mobile carriers' requirements for a high bandwidth and for covering high base station density.
l
Through SAToP emulation, the TDM service data can be transmitted in the GPON network.
l
The PWE3 encapsulation mode is IP+UDP.
l
The E1 or STM-1 port of the OLT is used for upstream transmission to the SDH network.
Figure 8-15 shows an example network of the TDMoPSN mobile bearer service. 8-92
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
The ATN930 is connected to the 2G or 3G base station through the E1 port to provide the TDM access, and then transmits the service data upstream to the GPON service board of the OLT through GPON after SAToP emulation. The OLT terminates the emulation data and restores TDM signals, and then transmits the signals to the SDH network through the E1 port (provided by the EH1A daughter board) or STM-1 port (provided by the CSSA daughter board) of the TOPA board. In this way, the 2G or 3G mobile bearer service is implemented between the ATN930 and the OLT in the TDM PW mode. Figure 8-15 Example network of the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service between the CBU and the OLT
Data Plan Table 8-9 provides the data plan for the OLT, and Table 8-10 provides the data plan for the ATN930. Table 8-9 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000 SVLAN: smart VLAN 500
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.1/24
GPON service board
Port: 0/3/1 ONU ID: 1 ONU authentication mode: SN ONU SN: 48575443E6D8B541
TOPA service board
Port: 0/6/0 Daughter board type: EH1A (providing E1 ports) or CSSA (providing STM-1 ports) IP address of the board (or IP address of STM-1 port 0): 20.20.20.20 MAC address of the board (or MAC address of STM-1 port 0): 0800-3E32-5310 Local UDP port ID: 50050 VC12 ID: 2 (for only the STM-1 port)
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-93
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Item
Data
DBA profile
Profile name: TDM Type: type1 Fixed bandwidth: 32 Mbit/s
ONU line profile
Profile ID: 10, bound to the DBA profile named TDM GEM port IDs: 0 and 1 T-CONT ID: 1
ONU management mode
SNMP
Table 8-10 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN SVLAN: smart VLAN 500, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.2/24 IP address of the L3 interface of VLAN 500: 10.50.50.50/24 IP address of loopback interface 0: 5.5.5.5/32
MAC address
MAC address of L3 interface of VLAN 500: 00E0-FC01-0450 MAC address of the GPON port of the ATN930: 0018-82D6D178
MPLS
MPLS LSR ID: 5.5.5.5 Global MPLS: enabled MPLS L2 VPN: enabled MAC address of the board (or MAC address of STM-1 port 0): 0800-3E32-5310 Local UDP port ID: 50050 Remote UDP port ID: 50050
PW template
Template name: cbu2olt_satop Template type: TDM SAToP Peer IP address: 20.20.20.20 PW load time: 125 μs Jitter buffer size: 2500 μs Control word: supported RTP: enabled
8-94
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Item
Data
Tunnel
Tunnel ID: 10 Link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface: IP Destination IP address: 20.20.20.20 Policy name: ip-policy
E1 port
Port: 0/3/0 Working mode of the port: UDT Transmit clock of the port: system TDM virtual path link ID: 10
Clock source
SAToP clock (channel 0 , clock source 0) + GPON line clock (port 0/0/0, clock source 1) Priority: p0 > p1
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 500 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 500 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 500 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU to the GPON port. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLANs and IP addresses of the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the management IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the DBA profile name to TDM, type to type1, and fixed bandwidth to 32 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name 10 TDM type1 fix 32768
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-95
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
–
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON MDU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 1 to DBA profile named TDM. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 1 dba-profile-name TDM
Add GEM port 0 for transmtting management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for transmitting ETH traffic streams. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to TCONT 1. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gemcar or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6 cascade on huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6 cascade on
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 500 to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 500
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ATN930 to GPON port 0/3/1. The ONU ID is 1, the SN is 48575443E6D8B541, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable
8-96
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/3/1 Ont SN : 48575443E6D8B541 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : ATN930V800R307C01B020 Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307C01 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX ATN930 Ont autofind time : 2009-09-10 10:20:45 -----------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont statecommand to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities, and then add a proper ONU profile based on the queried ONU capabilities. Then, add an ONU again.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ATN930 to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ipcommand to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ATN930 by running the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to configure the ATN930.
3.
Create service ports. Configure the management service port ID to 1, SVLAN ID to 500, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 500. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the MDU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be the same as the upstream VLAN of the ATN930.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-97
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#service-port 1 vlan 500 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multiservic e user-vlan 500 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
4.
Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the TDM emulation service is 6, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Configure the attribute of the TOPA board. Configure the IP address of the upstream E1/STM-1 port in slot 0/6. –
If the upstream port is the STM-1 port, the command is as follows: huawei(config)#interface top-stml 0/6 huawei(config-if-top-stml-0/6)#ip-address 0 20.20.20.20 huawei(config-if-top-stml-0/6)#quit
–
If the upstream port is the E1 port, the command is as follows: huawei(config)#interface top 0/6 huawei(config-if-top-0/6)#set ip-address 20.20.20.20 huawei(config-if-top-0/6)#quit
6.
Log in to the ATN930 to perform the configuration. On the OLT, run the telnet 192.168.50.2 command to log in to the ATN930 to perform the configuration. For details about the configuration, see Configure the ONU..
7.
Configure the SAToP connection. NOTE
Perform this step after the ATN930 is configured because certain parameters must be obtained from the ATN930.
Create a CSEoP connection on TDM port 0/6/0. Configure the SVLAN ID to 500, local UDP port ID to 50050, remote MAC address (MAC address of VLAN interface 500 of the ATN930, which can be queried by running the display interface vlanif 500 command on the ATN930) to 00e0-fc01-0450, remote IP address (IP address of the loopback interface corresponding to the LSR ID of the ATN930) to 5.5.5.5, and the remote UDP port ID to 50050. –
8-98
If the upstream port is the STM-1 port, you must configure the VC12 parameter. The ATN930 requires the local UDP port ID of the OLT to be the same as that of the ATN930, and the implementation must meet this requirement: VC12 ID + base number (50048) = remote-udp. The command is as follows: Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#cesop-connect tdm 0/6/0 vc12 2 vlan 500 local-udp 2 remote-mac 00e0-fc01-0450 remote-ip 5.5.5.5 remote-udp 50050 –
If the upstream port is the E1 port, the command is as follows: huawei(config)#cesop-connect tdm 0/6/0 vlan 500 local-udp 50050 remotemac 00e0-fc01-0450 remote-ip 5.5.5.5 remote-udp 50050
8.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. NOTE
Because the management VLAN and the management IP address have been configured, you can run the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to log in to the ATN930 to perform the configuration. You can also log in to the ATN930 through a serial port to perform the configuration.
1.
Configure the IP address of the loopback interface. Configure the IP address of loopback interface 0 to 5.5.5.5/32. huawei(config)#interface loopback 0 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#ip address 5.5.5.5 32 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#quit
2.
Configure the MPLS LSR ID and enable the global MPLS and L2 VPN functions. huawei(config)#mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 //Set the local LSR ID to the IP address of loopback interface 0 huawei(config)#mpls //Enable global MPLS huawei(config-mpls)#quit huawei(config)#mpls l2vpn //Enable L2 VPN
3.
Enable the basic MPLS functions for VLAN interface 500 and configure the IP address of VLAN interface 500. huawei(config)#vlan 500 smart //Upstream VLAN huawei(config)#mpls vlan 500 huawei(config)#port vlan 500 0/0 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 500 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#ip address 10.50.50.50 24 address of VLAN interface 500 to 10.50.50.50/24 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#mpls huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#quit
4.
//Configure the IP
Configure the static route to the IP address of the TOPA board on the OLT. Configure the destination IP address to 20.20.20.20, egress interface to VLAN interface 500, and next hop to 10.50.50.1. huawei(config)#ip route-static 20.20.20.20 32 vlanif 500 10.50.50.1
5.
Configure the static ARP entry of the next hop IP address of the static route. The next hop IP address is 10.50.50.1, the MAC address of the TOPA board is 0800-3E32-5310, and services are transmitted through upstream GPON port 0/0/0 that is in VLAN 500. NOTE
In the case of an STM-1 port, different ports can be configured with different IP addresses and MAC addresses. On the OLT, you can enter the board mode and then run the display port state command to query the IP address and MAC address of the corresponding port. huawei(config)#arp 10.50.50.1 0800-3E32-5310 500 0/0/0
6.
Create an IP tunnel from the ATN930 to the OLT and configure the tunnel policy. Configure the tunnel ID to 10, link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface to IP, destination IP address of the tunnel to 20.20.20.20, and tunnel policy name to ip-policy.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-99
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#interface tunnel 10 huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#tunnel-protocol mpls ip huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#destination 20.20.20.20 huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls ip commit huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#quit huawei(config)#tunnel-policy ip-policy Info: New tunnel-policy is configured. huawei(config-tunnel-policy-ip-policy)#tunnel select-seq ip load-balancenumber 1 huawei(config-tunnel-policy-ip-policy)#quit
7.
Create a PW profile and configure its attributes. (1) Configure the PW name and type. Configure the PW name to cbu2olt_satop and type to SAToP. huawei(config)#pw-template cbu2olt_satop huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2olt_satop)#pw-type tdm satop
(2) Configure the IP address of the TOPA board of the remote device (OLT in this example) in the PW template. Configure the IP address to 20.20.20.20. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2olt_satop)#peer-address 20.20.20.20
(3) Configure the PW load time. Configure the load time to 125 μs. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2olt_satop)#tdm-load-time satop loadtime 125
(4) (Optional) Enable RTP. After RTP is enabled, PW packets of the TDM type contain the RTP control header. By default, RTP is disabled. NOTE
The RTP configuration must be the same as that on the OLT. On the OLT, RTP is enabled by default. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2olt_satop)#rtp enable
(5) (Optional) Configure the jitter buffer size. The jitter buffer can effectively prevent jitter and delay. Only PW templates of the TDM type support the jitter buffer configuration. By default, the jitter buffer size is 2000 μs. NOTE
The value range of the jitter buffer is 500-32000 and the value must be an integer multiple of 125. You can configure this value according to actual conditions. In this example, the jitter buffer size is configured to 2500 μs. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2olt_satop)#jitter-buffer buffer-size 2500
(6) Configure the PW template to or not to support the control word. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2olt_satop)#control-word
(7) Configure the tunnel policy used by the PW template. Configure the tunnel policy name to ip-policy. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2olt_satop)#tnl-policy ip-policy huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2olt_satop)#quit
(8) Reset the PW template.
8-100
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
CAUTION After modifying the attributes of a PW template, you must reset the PW. After that, the modified attributes take effect. After a PW is reset, the protocol starts negotiation again. In this case, the services are interrupted. Therefore, exercise caution when you run this command. huawei(config)#reset pw template cbu2olt_satop Info: In operation, please wait...OK!
8.
Configure the TDM service port and create TDM VCL 10. huawei(config)#interface tdm 0/3 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#port 0 udt system //Confiugre TDM port 0 to work in the UDT mode, and use the system clock as the transmit clock of the port huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#tdm-vcl tdm-vcl-id 10 satop 0/3/0 //Create TDM VCL 10 on port 0/3/0 and configure the type to SAToP
9.
Bind the TDM to the PW. The IP+UDP encapsulation mode is adopted. Such a PW does not use the signaling protocol for parameter negotiation. You can manually specify the related information by running the related command. The data of a static PW is transmitted between the provider edges (PEs) through tunnels. Configure the TDM virtual path link (VPL) ID to 10, PW ID to 1, PW template name to cbu2olt_satop, working mode to UDP, local UDP port ID to 50050, and destination port ID to 50050. huawei(config)#pw-ac-binding tdm 10 pw 1 pw-template cbu2olt_satop udp ingress-dst-port 50050 egress-dst-port 50050 NOTE
The destination port ID (dst-port) of the PW configured on the ATN930 must be the same as the destination port ID (local-udp) configured on the remote PE (in this example, the peer PE is the OLT).
10. Configure the system clock source. The system input clock and output clock sources of the ATN930 can be obtained through the GPON line clock and adaptive recovery clock when it adopts GPON. If the configuration is not performed, the ATN930 adopts the local oscillator as the system clock or output clock source. (1) Obtain clock signals from channel 0 of the received SAToP data streams and upstream port 0/0/0 as the system clock source, with the IDs of 0 and 1 respectively. huawei(config)#clock source 0 adapt-clock 0 huawei(config)#clock source 1 0/0/0
(2) Configure the priority of the system clock. The priority of the adaptive clock source is higher than that of the line clock source. huawei(config)#clock priority system 0/1
(3) Bind the adaptive clock source to PW 1. huawei(config)#interface tdm 0/3 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#adapt-clock-source 0 1 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#quit
11. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-101
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Result On the ATN930, you can run the display pw-ac-binding command to confirm that the PW is in the up (normal) state. huawei(config)#display pw-ac-binding tdm 10 { |secondary }: Command: display pw-ac-binding tdm 10 Total : 1 (Up/Down : 1/0 Static/LDP : 1/0) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------TDM PW PW PROTO RECEIVE TRNS TEMPLATE ID ID STATE TYPE LABEL LABEL NAME ---------------------------------------------------------------------------10 1 up UDP 50050 50050 cbu2olt_satop ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Note : F--Frame, S--Slot, P--Port *: Secondary
Configuration File Configure the OLT. vlan 500 smart port vlan 500 0/19 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name TDM type1 fix 32768 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 1 dba-profile-name TDM gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 cascade on gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 cascade on mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 500 commit quit interface gpon 0/3 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1 vlan 500 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 500 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 interface top 0/6 set ip-address 20.20.20.20 quit telnet 192.168.50.2 cesop-connect tdm 0/6/0 vlan 500 local-udp 50050 remote-mac 00e0-fc01-0450 remote-ip 5.5.5.5 remote-udp 50050 save
Configure the ATN930. interface loopback 0 ip address 5.5.5.5 32 quit mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 mpls
8-102
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
quit mpls l2vpn vlan 500 smart mpls vlan 500 port vlan 500 0/0 0 interface vlanif 500 ip address 10.50.50.50 24 mpls quit ip route-static 20.20.20.20 32 vlanif 500 10.50.50.1 arp 10.50.50.1 0800-3E32-5310 500 0/0/0 interface tunnel 10 tunnel-protocol mpls ip destination 20.20.20.20 mpls ip commit quit tunnel-policy ip-policy tunnel select-seq ip load-balance-number 1 quit pw-template cbu2olt_satop pw-type tdm satop peer-address 20.20.20.20 tdm-load-time satop loadtime 125 rtp enable jitter-buffer buffer-size 2500 control-word tnl-policy ip-policy quit reset pw template cbu2olt_satop interface tdm 0/3 port 0 udt system quit tdm-vcl tdm-vcl-id 10 satop 0/3/0 pw-ac-binding tdm 10 pw 1 pw-template cbu2olt_satop udp ingress-dst-port 50050 egress-dst-port 50050 clock source 0 adapt-clock 0 clock source 1 0/0/0 clock priority system 0/1 interface tdm 0/3 adapt-clock-source 0 1 quit save
8.1.6.2 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (MPLSbased) The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 2G or 3G base station through the E1 port and transmits the TDM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the MPLS network and remote PTN network through the GE port. In this way, the traditional circuit-switched service is implemented over the GPON network.
Service Requirements l
The E1 port is used for connecting to the 2G or 3G base station in a unified manner.
l
GPON is adopted for bearing the mobile AN in a unified manner to meet mobile carriers' requirements for a high bandwidth and for covering high base station density.
l
Through SAToP or CESoP emulation, the TDM service data can be transmitted in the GPON network.
l
The PWE3 encapsulation mode is MPLS+MPLS, and the static LSP is adopted.
l
The service is transmitted upstream to the MPLS network or and remote PTN network through the GE port of the OLT.
Figure 8-16 shows an example network of the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-103
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
The ATN930 is connected to the 2G or 3G base station through the E1 port to provide the TDM access, and then transmits the service data upstream to the GPON service board of the OLT through GPON after SAToP emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the MPLS network and remote PTN network through the GE port. The PTN device terminates emulation signals and restores them to TDM signals. In this way, the 2G or 3G mobile bearer service is implemented between the ATN930 and the remote PTN in the TDM PW mode. Figure 8-16 Example network of the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (MPLSbased)
Background Information The ATN930 supports static and dynamic PWs. You can configure the PW according to the requirements. l
A dynamic PW is created through LDP, and the LSP is generated dynamically. No manual configuration is required.
l
The relevant information about a static PW is manually specified through the CLI, and the parameters are not negotiated through LDP. Therefore, a static LSP can work normally only after the LSRs along the LSP are configured.
The ATN930 supports SAToP encapsulation and CESoP encapsulation, and you can configure the encapsulation mode according to the requirements. l
The structure-agnostic TDM over PSN (SAToP) standard provides the non-structurized TDM service with the emulation and transmission functions. The protocol need not be aware of the structure of the TDM packets and transparently transmits the packets. Therefore, if the customer only needs to provide services based on E1, SAToP can meet this requirement.
l
The circuit emulation services over PSN (CESoP) standard provides the structurized TDM service with emulation and transmission functions, and then the TDM frame structure and in-frame signaling can be identified. Therefore, if the customer needs to provide services based on timeslot, CESoP can meet this requirement.
Data Plan Table 8-11 provides the data plan for the OLT, Table 8-12 provides the data plan for the ATN930, and Table 8-13 provides the data plan for the remote PTN.
8-104
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Table 8-11 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000 SVLAN: smart VLAN 500
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.1/24
GPON service board
Port: 0/3/1 ONU ID: 1 ONU authentication mode: SN ONU SN: 48575443E6D8B541
DBA profile
Profile name: TDM Type: type1 Fixeded bandwidth: 32 Mbit/s
ONU line profile
Profile ID: 10, bound to the DBA profile named TDM GEM port IDs: 0 and 1 T-CONT ID: 1
ONU management mode
SNMP
Table 8-12 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN SVLAN: smart VLAN 500, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.2/24 IP address of the L3 interface of VLAN 500: 10.50.50.50/24 IP address of loopback interface 0: 5.5.5.5/32
MPLS
MPLS LSR ID: 5.5.5.5 Global MPLS: enabled MPLS L2 VPN: enabled Out-label of the ingress node that functions as the static LSP: 8100 In-label of the ingress node that functions as the static LSP: 8200
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-105
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Item
Data
PW
Template name: cbu2ptn_satop Template type: TDM SAToP Peer IP address: 30.30.30.30 PW load time: 125 μs Jitter buffer size: 2500 μs Control word: supported RTP: enabled PW transmit label: 8448 PW receive label: 8449
Tunnel
Tunnel interface ID: 10 Tunnel ID: 10 Link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface: MPLSTE Tunnel signaling protocol: static Destination IP address: 30.30.30.30 Policy name: mpls-static
E1 port
Port: 0/3/0 Working mode of the port: UDT Transmit clock of the port: system TDM virtual path link ID: 10
Clock source
SAToP clock (channel 0 , clock source 0) + GPON line clock (port 0/0/0, clock source 1) Priority: p0 > p1
Table 8-13 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side Item
Data
IP address
L3 interface IP address of VLAN 500 that functions as LSP1 egress node and LSP2 ingress node: 10.60.60.60/24
MPLS
LSR-ID: 30.30.30.30 Tunnel interface ID: 10 Tunnel ID: 10 In-label of the egress node that functions as the static LSP: 8100 Out-label of the ingress node that functions as the static LSP: 8200
8-106
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 500 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 500 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 500 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLANs and IP addresses of the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the management IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the profile name to TDM, profile type to Type1, Fixed bandwidth to 32 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name TDM type1 fix 32768
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON MDU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 1 to the DBA profile named TDM. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 1 dba-profile-name TDM
Add GEM port 0 for transmitting management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for transmitting ETH traffic streams. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to TCONT 1. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-107
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
NOTE
a. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gemcar or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 1 cascade on huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6 cascade on
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 500 to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 500
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ATN930 to GPON port 0/3/1. The ONU ID is 1, the SN is 48575443E6D8B541, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/3/1 Ont SN : 48575443E6D8B541 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : ATN930V800R307C01B020 Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307C01 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX ATN930 Ont autofind time : 2009-09-10 10:20:45 -----------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10
8-108
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont statecommand to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities, and then add a proper ONU profile based on the queried ONU capabilities. Then, add an ONU again.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ATN930 to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ipcommand to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ATN930 by running the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to configure the ATN930.
3.
Create service ports. Configure the management service port ID to 1, SVLAN ID to 500, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 500. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the MDU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be the same as the upstream VLAN of the ATN930. huawei(config)#service-port 1 vlan 500 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 multi-service user-vlan 500
4.
Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the TDM emulation service is 6, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-109
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. NOTE
Because the management VLAN and the management IP address have been configured, you can run the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to log in to the ATN930 to perform the configuration. You can also log in to the ATN930 through a serial port to perform the configuration.
1.
Configure the IP address of the loopback interface. Configure the IP address of loopback interface 0 to 5.5.5.5/32. huawei(config)#interface loopback 0 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#ip address 5.5.5.5 32 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#quit
2.
Configure the MPLS LSR ID and enable the global MPLS and L2 VPN functions. huawei(config)#mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 //Set the local LSR ID to the IP address of loopback interface 0 huawei(config)#mpls //Enable global MPLS huawei(config-mpls)#quit huawei(config)#mpls l2vpn //Enable L2 VPN
3.
Enable the MPLS TE function for VLAN interface 500 and configure the IP address of VLAN interface 500. huawei(config)#vlan 500 smart //Upstream VLAN huawei(config)#mpls vlan 500 huawei(config)#port vlan 500 0/0 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 500 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#ip address 10.50.50.50 24 address of VLAN interface 500 to 10.50.50.50/24 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#mpls huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#mpls te huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#quit
4.
//Configure the IP
Create an MPLS tunnel from the ATN930 to the PTN. Configure the tunnel ID to 10 and the link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface to MPLS. huawei(config)#interface tunnel 10 huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#tunnel-protocol mpls te
Configure the destination IP address of the tunnel to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#destination 30.30.30.30
Configure the MPLS TE tunnel ID to 10. A tunnel ID and an LSR ID uniquely identifies an MPLS TE tunnel. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls te tunnel-id 10
Configure the signaling protocol for creating the MPLS TE tunnel to static. 8-110
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls te signal-protocol static
Save the configuration and quit the MPLS TE configuration. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls te commit huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#quit
5.
Configure parameters of the ingress node of the static LSP. Configure the tunnel interface ID to 10, IP address of the egress node of the LSP to 30.30.30.30, next hop IP address (L3 interface IP address of the egress node in the same tunnel) to 10.60.60.60, and out-label to 8100 (which must be the same as the inlabel of the downstream LSR). NOTE
A static MPLS TE tunnel can be used only after it is bound to a static LSP. huawei(config)#static-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 10 destination 30.30.30.30 nexthop 10.60.60.60 out-label 8100
6.
Configure parameters of the egress node of the static LSP. Configure the name of the static LSP to ptn2atn930, bind the static LSP to VLAN interface 500 of the ingress node (The VLAN interface IP address is the next hop IP address of the ingress node. The communication between LSRs is available only when the ingress node and the egress node are added to the same MPLS VLAN), and configure the in-label to 8200 (which must be the same as the out-label of the upstream LSR). huawei(config)#static-lsp egress ptn2atn930 incoming-interface vlanif 500 in-lable 8200
7.
Configure the tunnel policy. Configure the policy name to mpls-static, bind the policy to tunnel 10, and configure the destination IP address of the tunnel to 30.30.30.30. NOTE
The destination IP address should be consistent with that configured in the MPLS TE tunnel. huawei(config)#tunnel-policy mpls-static Info: New tunnel-policy is configured. huawei(config-tunnel-policy-mpls-static)#tunnel binding destination 30.30.30.30 te tunnel 10 huawei(config-tunnel-policy-mpls-static)#quit
8.
Create a PW profile and configure its attributes. (1) Configure the PW name and type. Configure the PW name to cbu2ptn_satop, and type to SAToP. huawei(config)#pw-template cbu2ptn_satop huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#pw-type tdm satop
(2) Configure the loopback interface IP address of the remote PTN device in the PW profile. Configure the loopback interface IP address to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#peer-address 30.30.30.30
(3) Configure the PW load time. Configure the load time to 125 μs. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#tdm-load-time satop loadtime 125
(4) (Optional) Enable RTP. After RTP is enabled, PW packets of the TDM type contain the RTP control header. By default, RTP is disabled. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-111
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI NOTE
The RTP configuration must be the same as that on the PTN. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#rtp enable
(5) (Optional) Configure the jitter buffer size. The jitter buffer can effectively prevent jitter and delay. Only PW templates of the TDM type support the jitter buffer configuration. By default, the jitter buffer size is 2000 μs. NOTE
The value range of the jitter buffer is 500-32000 and the value must be an integer multiple of 125. You can configure this value according to actual conditions. In this example, the jitter buffer size is configured to 2500 μs. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#jitter-buffer buffer-size 2500
(6) Configure the PW template to or not to support the control word. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#control-word
(7) Configure the tunnel policy used by the PW template. Configure the tunnel policy name to mpls-static. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#tnl-policy mpls-static huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#quit
(8) Reset the PW template.
CAUTION After modifying the attributes of a PW template, you must reset the PW. After that, the modified attributes take effect. After a PW is reset, the protocol starts negotiation again. In this case, the services are interrupted. Therefore, exercise caution when you run this command. huawei(config)#reset pw template cbu2ptn_satop Info: In operation, please wait...OK!
9.
Configure the TDM service port and create TDM VCL 10. huawei(config)#interface tdm 0/3 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#port 0 udt system //Confiugre TDM port 0 to work in the UDT mode //Use the system clock as the transmit clock of the port huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#tdm-vcl tdm-vcl-id 10 satop 0/3/0 //Create TDM VCL 10 on port 0/3/0 and configure the type to SAToP
10. Bind the TDM to the PW. The static LSP encapsulation mode is adopted. Such a PW does not use the LDP signaling protocol for parameter negotiation. You can manually specify the related information by running the related command. The data of a static PW is transmitted between the provider edges (PEs) through tunnels. Configure the TDM virtual path link (VPL) ID to 10, PW ID to 1, PW template cbu2ptn_satop, type to MPLS, transmit label to 8448, and receive label to 8449. huawei(config)#pw-ac-binding tdm 10 pw 1 pw-template cbu2ptn_satop static transmit-label 8448 receive-label 8449 NOTE
When you configure a static TDM PW, the PW transmit-label and receive-label configured on the ATN930 must be the same as the PW transmit-label and receive-label configured on the peer PE (the PTN in this example).
8-112
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
11. Configure the system clock source. The system input clock and output clock sources of the ATN930 can be obtained through the GPON line clock and adaptive recovery clock when it adopts GPON. If the configuration is not performed, the ATN930 adopts the local oscillator as the system clock or output clock source. (1) Obtain clock signals from channel 0 of the received SAToP data streams and upstream port 0/0/0 as the system clock source, with the IDs of 0 and 1 respectively. huawei(config)#clock source 0 adapt-clock 0 huawei(config)#clock source 1 0/0/0
(2) Configure the priority of the system clock. The priority of the adaptive clock source is higher than that of the line clock source. huawei(config)#clock priority system 0/1
(3) Bind the adaptive clock source to PW 1. huawei(config)#interface tdm 0/3 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#adapt-clock-source 0 1 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#quit
12. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result On the ATN930, you can run the display pw-ac-binding command to confirm that the PW is in the up (normal) state. huawei(config)#display pw-ac-binding tdm 10 { |secondary }: Command: display pw-ac-binding tdm 10 Total : 1 (Up/Down : 1/0 Static/LDP : 1/0) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------TDM PW PW PROTO RECEIVE TRNS TEMPLATE ID ID STATE TYPE LABEL LABEL NAME ---------------------------------------------------------------------------10 1 up static 8449 8448 cbu2ptn_satop ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Note : F--Frame, S--Slot, P--Port *: Secondary
Configuration File Configure the OLT. vlan 500 smart port vlan 500 0/19 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name TDM type1 fix 32768 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 1 dba-profile-name TDM gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 cascade on gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 cascade on mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 500
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-113
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
commit quit interface gpon 0/3 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1 vlan 500 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 500 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
Configure the ATN930. interface loopback 0 ip address 5.5.5.5 32 quit mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 mpls mpls te quit mpls l2vpn vlan 500 smart mpls vlan 500 port vlan 500 0/0 0 interface vlanif 500 ip address 10.50.50.50 24 mpls mpls te quit interface tunnel 10 tunnel-protocol mpls te destination 30.30.30.30 mpls te tunnel-id 10 mpls te signal-protocol static mpls te commit quit static-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 10 destination 30.30.30.30 nexthop 10.60.60.60 out-label 8100 static-lsp egress ptn2atn930 incoming-interface vlanif 500 in-lable 8200 tunnel-policy mpls-static tunnel binding destination 30.30.30.30 te tunnel 10 quit pw-template cbu2ptn_satop pw-type tdm satop peer-address 30.30.30.30 tdm-load-time satop loadtime 125 rtp enable jitter-buffer buffer-size 2500 control-word tnl-policy mpls-static quit reset pw template cbu2ptn_satop interface tdm 0/3 port 0 udt system quit tdm-vcl tdm-vcl-id 10 satop 0/3/0 pw-ac-binding tdm 10 pw 1 pw-template cbu2ptn_satop static transmit-label 8448 receive-label 8449 clock source 0 adapt-clock 0 clock source 1 0/0/0 clock priority system 0/1 interface tdm 0/3 adapt-clock-source 0 1
8-114
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
quit save
8.1.6.3 Configuring the TDM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (IP-based) The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 2G or 3G base station through the E1 port and transmits the TDM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the IP network and remote PTN network through the GE port. In this way, the traditional circuit-switched service is implemented over the GPON network.
Service Requirements l
The E1 port is used for connecting to the 2G or 3G base station in a unified manner.
l
GPON is adopted for bearing the mobile AN in a unified manner to meet mobile carriers' requirements for a high bandwidth and for covering high base station density.
l
Through SAToP or CESoP emulation, the TDM service data can be transmitted in the GPON network.
l
The PWE3 encapsulation mode is IP+UDP.
l
The service is transmitted upstream to the IP network or and remote PTN network through the GE port of the OLT.
Figure 8-17 shows an example network of the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service. The ATN930 is connected to the 2G or 3G base station through the E1 port to provide the TDM access, and then transmits the service data upstream to the GPON service board of the OLT through GPON after SAToP emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the IP network and remote PTN network through the GE port. The PTN device terminates emulation signals and restores them to TDM signals. In this way, the 2G or 3G mobile bearer service is implemented between the ATN930 and the remote PTN in the TDM PW mode. Figure 8-17 Example network of the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (MPLSbased)
Background Information The ATN930 supports static and dynamic PWs. You can configure the PW according to the requirements. l
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
A dynamic PW is created through LDP, and the LSP is generated dynamically. No manual configuration is required. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-115
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI l
The relevant information about a static PW is manually specified through the CLI, and the parameters are not negotiated through LDP. Therefore, a static LSP can work normally only after the LSRs along the LSP are configured.
The ATN930 supports SAToP encapsulation and CESoP encapsulation, and you can configure the encapsulation mode according to the requirements. l
The structure-agnostic TDM over PSN (SAToP) standard provides the non-structurized TDM service with the emulation and transmission functions. The protocol need not be aware of the structure of the TDM packets and transparently transmits the packets. Therefore, if the customer only needs to provide services based on E1, SAToP can meet this requirement.
l
The circuit emulation services over PSN (CESoP) standard provides the structurized TDM service with emulation and transmission functions, and then the TDM frame structure and in-frame signaling can be identified. Therefore, if the customer needs to provide services based on timeslot, CESoP can meet this requirement.
Data Plan Table 8-14 provides the data plan for the OLT, Table 8-15 provides the data plan for the ATN930, and Table 8-16 provides the data plan for the remote PTN. Table 8-14 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000 SVLAN: smart VLAN 500
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.1/24
GPON service board
Port: 0/3/1 ONU ID: 1 ONU authentication mode: MAC address
DBA profile
Profile ID: 20 Type: type3 Assured bandwidth: 30 Mbit/s Maximum bandwidth: 100 Mbit/s
ONU line profile
Profile ID: 10, bound to the DBA profile named TDM GEM port IDs: 0 and 1 T-CONT ID: 1
ONU management mode
8-116
SNMP
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Table 8-15 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN SVLAN: smart VLAN 500, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.2/24 IP address of the L3 interface of VLAN 500: 10.50.50.50/24 IP address of loopback interface 0: 5.5.5.5/32
MPLS
MPLS LSR ID: 5.5.5.5 Global MPLS: enabled MPLS L2 VPN: enabled
PW template
Template name: cbu2ptn_satop Template type: TDM SAToP Peer IP address: 30.30.30.30 PW load time: 125 μs Jitter buffer size: 2500 μs Control word: supported RTP: enabled
Tunnel
Tunnel interface ID: 10 Tunnel ID: 10 Link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface: IP Policy name: ip_policy Local UDP port ID: 50000 Remote UDP port ID: 50050
E1 port
Port: 0/3/0 Working mode of the port: UDT Transmit clock of the port: system TDM virtual path link ID: 10
Clock source
SAToP clock (channel 0 , clock source 0) + GPON line clock (port 0/0/0, clock source 1) Priority: p0 > p1
Table 8-16 Data plan for configuring the TDM PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Item
Data
IP address
L3 interface IP address of VLAN 500 that functions as LSP1 egress node and LSP2 ingress node: 10.60.60.60/24
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-117
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Item
Data
MPLS
LSR-ID: 30.30.30.30 Local UDP port ID: 50050 Remote UDP port ID: 50000
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 500 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 500 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 500 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLANs and IP addresses of the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the management IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the profile name to TDM, profile type to Type1, Fixed bandwidth to 32 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name TDM type1 fix 32768
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON MDU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 1 to the DBA profile named TDM. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. 8-118
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 1 dba-profile-name TDM
Add GEM port 0 for transmitting management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for transmitting ETH traffic streams. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to TCONT 1. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gemcar or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6 cascade on huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6 cascade on
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 500 to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 500
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ATN930 to GPON port 0/3/1. The ONU ID is 1, the SN is 48575443E6D8B541, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/3/1 Ont SN : 48575443E6D8B541 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : ATN930V800R307C01B020 Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307C01 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX ATN930 Ont autofind time : 2009-09-10 10:20:45 -----------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-119
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont statecommand to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities, and then add a proper ONU profile based on the queried ONU capabilities. Then, add an ONU again.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ATN930 to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ipcommand to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ATN930 by running the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to configure the ATN930.
3.
Create service ports. Configure the management service port ID to 1, SVLAN ID to 500, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 500. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the MDU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be the same as the upstream VLAN of the ATN930. huawei(config)#service-port 1 vlan 500 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 multi-service user-vlan 500
4.
Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the TDM emulation service is 6, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services.
8-120
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. NOTE
Because the management VLAN and the management IP address have been configured, you can run the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to log in to the ATN930 to perform the configuration. You can also log in to the ATN930 through a serial port to perform the configuration.
1.
Configure the IP address of the loopback interface. Configure the IP address of loopback interface 0 to 5.5.5.5/32. huawei(config)#interface loopback 0 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#ip address 5.5.5.5 32 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#quit
2.
Configure the MPLS LSR ID and enable the global MPLS and L2 VPN functions. huawei(config)#mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 //Set the local LSR ID to the IP address of loopback interface 0 huawei(config)#mpls //Enable global MPLS huawei(config-mpls)#quit huawei(config)#mpls l2vpn //Enable L2 VPN
3.
Enable the MPLS function for VLAN interface 500 and configure the IP address of VLAN interface 500. huawei(config)#vlan 500 smart //Upstream VLAN huawei(config)#mpls vlan 500 huawei(config)#port vlan 500 0/0 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 500 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#ip address 10.50.50.50 24 address of VLAN interface 500 to 10.50.50.50/24 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#mpls huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#quit
4.
//Configure the IP
Create an IP tunnel from the ATN930 to the PTN and configure the tunnel policy. Configure the tunnel ID to 10, link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface to IP. huawei(config)#interface tunnel 10 huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#tunnel-protocol mpls ip
Configure the destination IP address of the tunnel to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#destination 30.30.30.30
Save the configuration and quit the tunnel configuration. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls ip commit huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#quit
5.
Configure the tunnel policy used by the PW template. Configure the tunnel policy name to ip-policy.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-121
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#tunnel-policy ip_policy Info: New tunnel-policy is configured. huawei(config-tunnel-policy-ip_policy)#tunnel select-seq ip load-balancenumber 1 huawei(config-tunnel-policy-ip_policy)#quit
6.
Create a PW profile and configure its attributes. (1) Configure the PW name and type. Configure the PW name to cbu2ptn_satop, and type to SAToP. huawei(config)#pw-template cbu2ptn_satop huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#pw-type tdm satop
(2) Configure the loopback interface IP address of the remote PTN device in the PW profile. Configure the loopback interface IP address to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#peer-address 30.30.30.30
(3) Configure the PW load time. Configure the load time to 125 μs. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#tdm-load-time satop loadtime 125
(4) (Optional) Enable RTP. After RTP is enabled, PW packets of the TDM type contain the RTP control header. By default, RTP is disabled. NOTE
The RTP configuration must be the same as that on the PTN. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#rtp enable
(5) (Optional) Configure the jitter buffer size. The jitter buffer can effectively prevent jitter and delay. Only PW templates of the TDM type support the jitter buffer configuration. By default, the jitter buffer size is 2000 μs. NOTE
The value range of the jitter buffer is 500-32000 and the value must be an integer multiple of 125. You can configure this value according to actual conditions. In this example, the jitter buffer size is configured to 2500 μs. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#jitter-buffer buffer-size 2500
(6) Configure the PW template to or not to support the control word. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#control-word
(7) Configure the tunnel policy used by the PW template. Configure the tunnel policy name to ip_policy. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#tnl-policy ip_policy huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_satop)#quit
(8) Reset the PW template.
CAUTION After modifying the attributes of a PW template, you must reset the PW. After that, the modified attributes take effect. After a PW is reset, the protocol starts negotiation again. In this case, the services are interrupted. Therefore, exercise caution when you run this command. huawei(config)#reset pw template cbu2ptn_satop Info: In operation, please wait...OK!
8-122
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7.
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Configure the TDM service port and create TDM VCL 10. huawei(config)#interface tdm 0/3 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#port 0 udt system //Confiugre TDM port 0 to work in the UDT mode //Use the system clock as the transmit clock of the port huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#tdm-vcl tdm-vcl-id 10 satop 0/3/0 //Create TDM VCL 10 on port 0/3/0 and configure the type to SAToP
8.
Bind the TDM to the PW. The IP+UDP encapsulation mode is adopted. Such a PW does not use the signaling protocol for parameter negotiation. You can manually specify the related information by running the related command. The data of a static PW is transmitted between the provider edges (PEs) through tunnels. Configure the TDM virtual path link (VPL) ID to 10, PW ID to 1, PW template name to cbu2ptn_satop, working mode to UDP, local UDP port ID to 50050, and destination port ID to 50050. huawei(config)#pw-ac-binding tdm 10 pw 1 pw-template cbu2ptn_satop udp ingress-dst-port 50000 egress-dst-port 50050 NOTE
The destination port ID (egress-dst-port) of the PW configured on the ATN930 must be the same as the destination port ID (ingress-dst-port) configured on the remote PE (in this example, the peer PE is the OLT).
9.
Configure the system clock source. The system input clock and output clock sources of the ATN930 can be obtained through the GPON line clock and adaptive recovery clock when it adopts GPON. If the configuration is not performed, the ATN930 adopts the local oscillator as the system clock or output clock source. (1) Obtain clock signals from channel 0 of the received SAToP data streams and upstream port 0/0/0 as the system clock source, with the IDs of 0 and 1 respectively. huawei(config)#clock source 0 adapt-clock 0 huawei(config)#clock source 1 0/0/0
(2) Configure the priority of the system clock. The priority of the adaptive clock source is higher than that of the line clock source. huawei(config)#clock priority system 0/1
(3) Bind the adaptive clock source to PW 1. huawei(config)#interface tdm 0/3 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#adapt-clock-source 0 1 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#quit
10. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result On the ATN930, you can run the display pw-ac-binding command to confirm that the PW is in the up (normal) state. huawei(config)#display pw-ac-binding tdm 10 { |secondary }: Command: display pw-ac-binding tdm 10
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-123
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Total : 1 (Up/Down : 1/0 Static/LDP : 1/0) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------TDM PW PW PROTO RECEIVE TRNS TEMPLATE ID ID STATE TYPE LABEL LABEL NAME ---------------------------------------------------------------------------10 1 up UDP 50050 50000 cbu2ptn_satop ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Note : F--Frame, S--Slot, P--Port *: Secondary
Configuration File Configure the OLT. vlan 500 smart port vlan 500 0/19 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/19 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name TDM type1 fix 32768 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 1 dba-profile-name TDM gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 cascade on gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 cascade on mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 500 commit quit interface gpon 0/3 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1 vlan 500 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 500 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
Configure the ATN930. interface loopback 0 ip address 5.5.5.5 32 quit mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 mpls quit mpls l2vpn vlan 500 smart mpls vlan 500 port vlan 500 0/0 0 interface vlanif 500 ip address 10.50.50.50 24 mpls quit interface tunnel 10 tunnel-protocol mpls ip destination 30.30.30.30 mpls ip commit quit tunnel-policy ip-policy tunnel select-seq ip load-balance-number 1
8-124
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
quit pw-template cbu2ptn_satop pw-type tdm satop peer-address 10.60.60.60 tdm-load-time satop loadtime 125 rtp enable jitter-buffer buffer-size 2500 control-word tnl-policy ip_policy quit reset pw template cbu2ptn_satop interface tdm 0/3 port 0 udt system quit tdm-vcl tdm-vcl-id 10 satop 0/3/0 pw-ac-binding tdm 10 pw 1 pw-template cbu2ptn_satop udp ingress-dst-port 50000 egress-dst-port 50050 clock source 0 adapt-clock 0 clock source 1 0/0/0 clock priority system 0/1 interface tdm 0/3 adapt-clock-source 0 1 quit save
8.1.6.4 Configuring the ATM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (MPLSbased) The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 3G base station through ATM (the physical port is the E1 port), and transmits the ATM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the MPLS network and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port. In this way, the ATM service is implemented over the GPON network.
Prerequisite Service Requirements l
The ATM mode (the physical port is the E1 port) is used for connecting to the 3G base station.
l
GPON is adopted for bearing the mobile AN in a unified manner to meet mobile carriers' requirements for a high bandwidth and for covering high base station density.
l
The PWE3 encapsulation mode is MPLS+MPLS, and the static LSP is adopted.
l
The service is transmitted upstream to the MPLS network or and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port of the OLT.
Figure 8-18 shows an example network of the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service. The ATN930 is connected to the 3G base station through the IMA E1 port and transmits the ATM service upstream to the GPON board of the OLT through GPON after ATM emulation. The OLT transparently transmits the emulation data to the MPLS network and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port, and then the PTN device terminates the emulation data and restores ATM signals. Thus, the 3G mobile bearer service is implemented between the ATN930 and the PTN in the ATM PW mode.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-125
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Figure 8-18 Example network of the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (MPLSbased)
Background Information The ATN930 supports static and dynamic PWs. You can configure the PW according to the requirements. l
A dynamic PW is created through LDP, and the LSP is generated dynamically. No manual configuration is required.
l
The relevant information about a static PW is manually specified through the CLI, and the parameters are not negotiated through LDP. Therefore, a static LSP can work normally only after the LSRs along the LSP are configured.
When the data packets are transmitted in an ATM network, and multiple PVCs identify a traffic stream, the PW type must be set to ATM Nto1. When the PW type is ATM Nto1, a PW template can be bound to N PVCs. Currently, the ATN930 does not support binding to multiple PVCs. That is, N = 1, equal to 1to1.
Data Plan Table 8-17 provides the data plan for the OLT,Table 8-18 provides the data plan for the ATN930, and Table 8-19 provides the data plan for the remote PTN. Table 8-17 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000 SVLAN: smart VLAN 700
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.1/24
GPON service board
Port: 0/3/1 ONU ID: 1 ONU authentication mode: SN ONU SN: 48575443E6D8B541
8-126
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Item
Data
DBA profile
Profile name: ATM Type: type1 Fixed bandwidth: 32 Mbit/s
ONU line profile
Profile ID: 10, bound to the DBA profile named ATM GEM port IDs: 0 and 1 T-CONT ID: 1
ONU management mode
SNMP
Table 8-18 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN SVLAN: smart VLAN 700, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.2/24 IP address of the L3 interface of VLAN 500: 10.50.50.50/24 IP address of loopback interface 0: 5.5.5.5/32
MPLS
MPLS LSR ID: 5.5.5.5 Global MPLS: enabled MPLS L2 VPN: enabled Out-label of the ingress node that functions as the static LSP: 8100 In-label of the egress node that functions as the static LSP: 8200
PW
Template name: cbu2ptn_atm Template type: atm nto1 vcc Peer IP address: 30.30.30.30 Control word: supported PW transmit label: 8448 PW receive label: 8449
Tunnel
Tunnel ID: 10 Link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface: MPLSTE Destination IP address: 30.30.30.30 Tunnel signaling protocol: static Policy name: mpls-static
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-127
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Item
Data
ATM port
Port: 0/3/0 Working mode of the port: UNI Transmit clock of the port: system clock VPI: 0,VCI: 35
Clock source
GPON line clock (clock source ID 0)
Table 8-19 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side Item
Data
IP address
L3 interface IP address of VLAN 700 that functions as LSP1 egress node and LSP2 ingress node: 10.60.60.60/24
MPLS
LSR-ID:30.30.30.30 Tunnel interface ID: 10 Tunnel ID: 10 In-label of the egress node that functions as the static LSP: 8100 Out-label of the ingress node that functions as the static LSP: 8200
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 700 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 700 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 700 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLANs and IP addresses of the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the management IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000
8-128
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the profile name to ATM, profile type to Type1, Fixed bandwidth to 32 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name ATM type1 fix 32768
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON MDU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 1 to the DBA profile named ATM. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 1 dba-profile-name ATM
Add GEM port 0 for transmitting management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for transmitting ETH traffic streams. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to TCONT 1. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gemcar or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 700 to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 700
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ATN930 to GPON port 0/3/1. The ONU ID is 1, the SN is 48575443E6D8B541, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-129
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/3/1 Ont SN : 48575443E6D8B541 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : ATN930V800R307C01B020 Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307C01 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX ATN930 Ont autofind time : 2009-09-10 10:20:45 -----------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont statecommand to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities, and then add a proper ONU profile based on the queried ONU capabilities. Then, add an ONU again.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ATN930 to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ipcommand to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
8-130
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ATN930 by running the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to configure the ATN930.
3.
Create service ports. Configure the management service port ID to 1, SVLAN ID to 700, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 700. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the MDU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be the same as the upstream VLAN of the ATN930. huawei(config)#service-port 1 vlan 700 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 multi-service user-vlan 700
4.
Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the TDM emulation service is 6, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. NOTE
Because the management VLAN and the management IP address have been configured, you can run the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to log in to the ATN930 to perform the configuration. You can also log in to the ATN930 through a serial port to perform the configuration.
1.
Configure the IP address of the loopback interface. Configure the IP address of loopback interface 0 to 5.5.5.5/32. huawei(config)#interface loopback 0 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#ip address 5.5.5.5 32 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#quit
2.
Configure the MPLS LSR ID and enable the global MPLS and L2 VPN functions. huawei(config)#mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 //Set the local LSR ID to the IP address of loopback interface 0 huawei(config)#mpls //Enable global MPLS huawei(config-mpls)#mpls te //Enable global MPLS TE
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-131
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI uawei(config-mpls)#quit huawei(config)#mpls l2vpn
3.
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
//Enable L2 VPN
Enable the MPLS TE function for VLAN interface 700 and configure the IP address of VLAN interface 700. huawei(config)#vlan 700 smart //Upstream VLAN huawei(config)#mpls vlan 700 huawei(config)#port vlan 700 0/0 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 700 huawei(config-if-vlanif700)#ip address 10.50.50.50 24 address of VLAN interface 500 to 10.50.50.50/24 huawei(config-if-vlanif700)#mpls huawei(config-if-vlanif700)#mpls te huawei(config-if-vlanif700)#quit
4.
//Configure the IP
Create an MPLS tunnel from the ATN930 to the PTN. Configure the tunnel ID to 10 and the link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface to MPLS. huawei(config)#interface tunnel 10 huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#tunnel-protocol mpls te
Configure the destination IP address of the tunnel to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#destination 30.30.30.30
Configure the MPLS TE tunnel ID to 10. A tunnel ID and an LSR ID uniquely identifies an MPLS TE tunnel. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls te tunnel-id 10
Configure the signaling protocol for creating the MPLS TE tunnel to static. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls te signal-protocol static
Save the configuration and quit the MPLS TE configuration. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls te commit huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#quit
5.
Configure parameters of the ingress node of the static LSP. Configure the tunnel interface ID to 10, IP address of the egress node of the LSP to 30.30.30.30, next hop IP address (L3 interface IP address of the egress node in the same tunnel) to 10.60.60.60, and out-label to 8100 (which must be the same as the inlabel of the downstream LSR). NOTE
A static MPLS TE tunnel can be used only after it is bound to a static LSP. huawei(config)#static-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 10 destination 30.30.30.30 nexthop 10.60.60.60 out-label 8100
6.
Configure parameters of the egress node of the static LSP. Configure the name of the static LSP to ptn2atn930, bind the static LSP to VLAN interface 700 of the ingress node (The VLAN interface IP address is the next hop IP address of the ingress node. The communication between LSRs is available only when the ingress node and the egress node are added to the same MPLS VLAN), and configure the in-label to 8200 (which must be the same as the out-label of the upstream LSR). huawei(config)#static-lsp egress ptn2atn930 incoming-interface vlanif 700 in-lable 8200
8-132
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
7.
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Configure the tunnel policy. Configure the policy name to mpls-static, bind the policy to tunnel 10, and configure the destination IP address of the tunnel to 30.30.30.30. NOTE
The destination IP address should be consistent with that configured in the MPLS TE tunnel. huawei(config)#tunnel-policy mpls-static Info: New tunnel-policy is configured. huawei(config-tunnel-policy-mpls-static)#tunnel binding destination 30.30.30.30 te tunnel 10 huawei(config-tunnel-policy-mpls-static)#quit
8.
Create a PW profile and configure its attributes. (1) Configure the PW name and type. Configure the PW name to cbu2ptn_atm, and type to nto1. huawei(config)#pw-template cbu2ptn_atm huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#pw-type atm nto1 vcc
(2) Configure the loopback interface IP address of the remote PTN device in the PW profile. Configure the loopback interface IP address to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#peer-address 30.30.30.30
(3) Configure the PW template to or not to support the control word. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#control-word
(4) Configure the tunnel policy used by the PW template. Configure the tunnel policy name to mpls-static. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#tnl-policy mpls-static huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#quit
(5) Reset the PW template.
CAUTION After modifying the attributes of a PW template, you must reset the PW. After that, the modified attributes take effect. After a PW is reset, the protocol starts negotiation again. In this case, the services are interrupted. Therefore, exercise caution when you run this command. huawei(config)#reset pw template cbu2ptn_atm Info: In operation, please wait...OK!
9.
Configure the E1 port. huawei(config)#interface tdm 0/3 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#port 0 uni system crc enable //Confiugre E1 port 0 to work in the UNI mode //Use the system clock as the transmit clock of the port huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#quit
10. Configure the system clock source. The system input/output clock source of ATN930 can be obtained from the GPON line clock. If the configuration is not performed, the ATN930 adopts the local oscillator as the system clock or output clock source. Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-133
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#clock source 0 0/0/0 huawei(config)#clock priority system 0 NOTE
After the configuration is completed, you can run the display clock source command to confirm that the configured system clock source is in the normal state.
11. Bind the ATM to the PW. The static LSP encapsulation mode is adopted. Such a PW does not use the LDP signaling protocol for parameter negotiation. You can manually specify the related information by running the related command. The data of a static PW is transmitted between the provider edges (PEs) through tunnels. Configure the VPI to 10, VCI to 35, PW ID to 1, PW template cbu2ptn_atm, type to MPLS, transmit label to 8448, and receive label to 8449. huawei(config)#pw-ac-binding pvc 0/3/0 vpi 0 vci 35 pw 10 pw-template cbu2ptn_atm static transmit-label 8448 receive-label 8449 NOTE
When you configure a static TDM PW, the PW transmit-label and receive-label configured on the ATN930 must be the same as the PW transmit-label and receive-label configured on the peer PE (the PTN in this example).
12. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result On the ATN930, you can run the display pw-ac-binding command to confirm that the PW is in the up (normal) state. huawei(config)#display pw-ac-binding pvc 0/3/0 vpi 0 vci 35 { |secondary }: Command: display pw-ac-binding pvc 0/3/0 vpi 0 vci 35 Total : 1 (Up/Down : 1/0 Static/LDP : 1/0) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------F/S/P PW PW PW RECEIVE TRNS TEMPLATE VPIVCI ID STATE TYPE LABEL LABEL NAME ---------------------------------------------------------------------------0/3/0 0 35 10 up static 8449 8448 cbu2ptn_atm ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Note : F--Frame, S--Slot, P--Port *: Secondary
Configuration File Configure the OLT. vlan 700 smart port vlan 700 0/9 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/9 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name ATM type1 fix 32768 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id
8-134
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
10tcont 1 dba-profile-name ATM gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 700 commit quit interface gpon 0/3 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 ont ipconfig static 1 1 ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 gateway 192.168.50.1 quit service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1 vlan 700 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 700 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
Configure the ATN930. interface loopback 0 ip address 5.5.5.5 32 quit mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 mpls mpls te quit mpls l2vpn vlan 700 smart mpls vlan 700 port vlan 700 0/0 0 interface vlanif 700 ip address 10.50.50.50 24 mpls mpls te quit interface tunnel 10 tunnel-protocol mpls te destination 30.30.30.30 mpls te tunnel-id 10 mpls te signal-protocol static mpls te commit quit static-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 10 destination 30.30.30.30 nexthop 10.60.60.60 out-label 8100 static-lsp egress ptn2atn930 incoming-interface vlanif 700 in-label 8200 tunnel-policy mpls-static tunnel binding destination 30.30.30.30 te tunnel 10 quit pw-template cbu2ptn_atm pw-type atm nto1 vcc peer-address 30.30.30.30 control-word tnl-policy mpls-static quit reset pw template cbu2ptn_atm interface tdm 0/3 port 0 uni system crc enable quit clock source 0 0/0/0 clock priority system 0 pw-ac-binding pvc 0/3/0 vpi 0 vci 35 pw 10 pw-template cbu2ptn_atm static transmit-
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-135
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
label 8448 receive-label 8449 save
8.1.6.5 Configuring the ATM PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU (IP-based) The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 3G base station through ATM (the physical port is the E1 port), and transmits the ATM service to the OLT after emulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the IP network and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port. In this way, the ATM service is implemented over the GPON network.
Prerequisite Service Requirements l
The ATM mode (the physical port is the E1 port) is used for connecting to the 3G base station.
l
GPON is adopted for bearing the mobile AN in a unified manner to meet mobile carriers' requirements for a high bandwidth and for covering high base station density.
l
The PWE3 encapsulation mode is IP+UDP.
l
The service is transmitted upstream to the IP network or and remote PTN network through the GE port of the OLT.
Figure 8-19 shows an example network of the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service. The ATN930 is connected to the 3G base station through the E1 port and transmits the ATM service upstream to the GPON board of the OLT through GPON after ATM emulation. The OLT transparently transmits the emulation data to the IP network and remote PTN network through the GE port, and then the PTN device terminates the emulation data and restores ATM signals. Thus, the 3G mobile bearer service is implemented between the ATN930 and the PTN in the ATM PW mode. Figure 8-19 Example network of the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (IP-based)
Background Information When the data packets are transmitted in an ATM network, and multiple PVCs identify a traffic stream, the PW type must be set to ATM Nto1. When the PW type is ATM Nto1, a PW template can be bound to N PVCs. Currently, the ATN930 does not support binding to multiple PVCs. That is, N = 1, equal to 1to1. 8-136
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Data Plan Table 8-20 provides the data plan for the OLT,Table 8-21 provides the data plan for the ATN930, and Table 8-22 provides the data plan for the remote PTN. Table 8-20 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000 SVLAN: smart VLAN 700
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.1/24
GPON service board
Port: 0/3/1 ONU ID: 1 ONU authentication mode: SN ONU SN: 48575443E6D8B541
DBA profile
Profile name: ATM Type: type1 Fixed bandwidth: 32 Mbit/s
ONU line profile
Profile ID: 10, bound to the DBA profile named ATM GEM port IDs: 0 and 1 T-CONT ID: 1
ONU management mode
SNMP
Table 8-21 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN SVLAN: smart VLAN 700, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.2/24 IP address of the L3 interface of VLAN 500: 10.50.50.50/24 IP address of loopback interface 0: 5.5.5.5/32
IP
MPLS LSR ID: 5.5.5.5 Global IP: enabled MPLS L2 VPN: enabled
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-137
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Item
Data
PW
Template name: cbu2ptn_atm Template type: atm nto1 vcc Peer IP address: 30.30.30.30 Control word: supported
Tunnel
Tunnel ID: 10 Link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface: IP Destination IP address: 30.30.30.30 Policy name: ip-policyc Local UDP port ID: 50000 Remote UDP port ID: 50050
ATM port
Port: 0/3/0 Working mode of the port: UNI Transmit clock of the port: system clock VPI: 0,VCI: 35
Clock source
GPON line clock (clock source ID 0)
Table 8-22 Data plan for configuring the ATM PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side Item
Data
IP address
L3 interface IP address of VLAN 700 that functions as LSP1 egress node and LSP2 ingress node: 10.60.60.60/24
MPLS
LSR-ID:30.30.30.30 Local UDP port ID: 50050 Remote UDP port ID: 50000
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 700 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 700 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 700 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLANs and IP addresses of the OLT and the ONU on the OLT.
8-138
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
(1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the management IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the profile name to ATM, profile type to Type1, Fixed bandwidth to 32 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name ATM type1 fix 32768
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile. –
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
–
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON MDU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 1 to the DBA profile named ATM. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 1 dba-profile-name ATM
Add GEM port 0 for transmitting management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for transmitting ETH traffic streams. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to TCONT 1. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gemcar or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 700 to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 700
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-139
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ATN930 to GPON port 0/3/1. The ONU ID is 1, the SN is 48575443E6D8B541, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/3/1 Ont SN : 48575443E6D8B541 Password : VenderID : HWTC Ont Version : ATN930V800R307C01B020 Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307C01 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX ATN930 Ont autofind time : 2009-09-10 10:20:45 -----------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont statecommand to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities, and then add a proper ONU profile based on the queried ONU capabilities. Then, add an ONU again.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ATN930 to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the 8-140
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
rate of the service port, run the traffic table ipcommand to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ATN930 by running the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to configure the ATN930.
3.
Create service ports. Configure the management service port ID to 1, SVLAN ID to 700, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 700. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the MDU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be the same as the upstream VLAN of the ATN930. huawei(config)#service-port 1 vlan 700 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 multi-service user-vlan 700
4.
Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the TDM emulation service is 6, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. NOTE
Because the management VLAN and the management IP address have been configured, you can run the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to log in to the ATN930 to perform the configuration. You can also log in to the ATN930 through a serial port to perform the configuration.
1.
Configure the IP address of the loopback interface. Configure the IP address of loopback interface 0 to 5.5.5.5/32.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-141
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#interface loopback 0 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#ip address 5.5.5.5 32 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#quit
2.
Configure the MPLS LSR ID and enable the global MPLS and L2 VPN functions. huawei(config)#mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 //Set the local LSR ID to the IP address of loopback interface 0 huawei(config)#mpls //Enable global MPLS uawei(config-mpls)#quit huawei(config)#mpls l2vpn //Enable L2 VPN
3.
Enable the MPLS TE function for VLAN interface 700 and configure the IP address of VLAN interface 700. huawei(config)#vlan 700 smart //Upstream VLAN huawei(config)#mpls vlan 700 huawei(config)#port vlan 700 0/0 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 700 huawei(config-if-vlanif700)#ip address 10.50.50.50 24 address of VLAN interface 500 to 10.50.50.50/24 huawei(config-if-vlanif700)#mpls huawei(config-if-vlanif700)#quit
4.
//Configure the IP
Create an IP tunnel from the ATN930 to the PTN and configure the tunnel policy. Configure the tunnel ID to 10, link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface to IP. huawei(config)#interface tunnel 10 huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#tunnel-protocol mpls ip
Configure the destination IP address of the tunnel to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#destination 30.30.30.30 huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls ip commit huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#quit
5.
Configure the tunnel policy. Configure the tunnel policy name to ip_policy. huawei(config)#tunnel-policy ip_policy Info: New tunnel-policy is configured. huawei(config-tunnel-policy-ip_policy)#tunnel select-seq ip load-balancenumber 1 huawei(config-tunnel-policy-ip_policy)#quit
6.
Create a PW profile and configure its attributes. (1) Configure the PW name and type. Configure the PW name to cbu2ptn_atm, and type to nto1. huawei(config)#pw-template cbu2ptn_atm huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#pw-type atm nto1 vcc
(2) Configure the loopback interface IP address of the remote PTN device in the PW profile. Configure the loopback interface IP address to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#peer-address 30.30.30.30
(3) Configure the PW template to or not to support the control word. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#control-word
(4) Configure the tunnel policy used by the PW template. Configure the tunnel policy name to ip_policy. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#tnl-policy ip_policy huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_atm)#quit
(5) Reset the PW template. 8-142
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
CAUTION After modifying the attributes of a PW template, you must reset the PW. After that, the modified attributes take effect. After a PW is reset, the protocol starts negotiation again. In this case, the services are interrupted. Therefore, exercise caution when you run this command. huawei(config)#reset pw template cbu2ptn_atm Info: In operation, please wait...OK!
7.
Configure the E1 port. huawei(config)#interface tdm 0/3 huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#port 0 uni system crc enable //Confiugre E1 port 0 to work in the UNI mode //Use the system clock as the transmit clock of the port huawei(config-if-tdm-0/3)#quit
8.
Configure the system clock source. The system input/output clock source of ATN930 can be obtained from the GPON line clock. If the configuration is not performed, the ATN930 adopts the local oscillator as the system clock or output clock source. huawei(config)#clock source 0 0/0/0 huawei(config)#clock priority system 0 NOTE
After the configuration is completed, you can run the display clock source command to confirm that the configured system clock source is in the normal state.
9.
Bind the ATM to the PW. The IP+UDP encapsulation mode is adopted. Such a PW does not use the signaling protocol for parameter negotiation. You can manually specify the related information by running the related command. The data of a static PW is transmitted between the provider edges (PEs) through tunnels. Configure the VPI to 0, VCI to 35, PW ID to 10, PW template name to cbu2ptn_atm, working mode to UDP, local UDP port ID to 50050, and destination port ID to 50050. huawei(config)#pw-ac-binding pvc 0/3/0 vpi 0 vci 35 pw 10 pw-template cbu2ptn_atm udp ingress-dst-port 50000 egress-dst-port 50050 NOTE
The destination port ID (egress-dst-port) of the PW configured on the ATN930 must be the same as the destination port ID (ingress-dst-port) configured on the remote PE (in this example, the peer PE is the PTN).
10. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result On the ATN930, you can run the display pw-ac-binding command to confirm that the PW is in the up (normal) state. huawei(config)#display pw-ac-binding pvc 0/3/0 vpi 0 vci 35 { |secondary }:
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-143
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Command: display pw-ac-binding pvc 0/3/0 vpi 0 vci 35 Total : 1 (Up/Down : 1/0 Static/LDP : 1/0) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------F/S/P PW PW PROTO RECEIVE TRNS TEMPLATE VPIVCI ID STATE TYPE LABEL LABEL NAME ---------------------------------------------------------------------------0/3/0 0 35 10 up UDP 50050 50000 cbu2ptn_atm ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Note : F--Frame, S--Slot, P--Port *: Secondary
Configuration File Configure the OLT. vlan 700 smart port vlan 700 0/9 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/9 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name ATM type1 fix 32768 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 1 dba-profile-name ATM gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 700 commit quit interface gpon 0/3 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 ont ipconfig static 1 1 ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 gateway 192.168.50.1 quit service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1 vlan 700 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 700 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
Configure the ATN930. interface loopback 0 ip address 5.5.5.5 32 quit mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 mpls quit mpls l2vpn vlan 700 smart mpls vlan 700 port vlan 700 0/0 0 interface vlanif 700 ip address 10.50.50.50 24 mpls quit interface tunnel 10
8-144
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
tunnel-protocol mpls ip destination 30.30.30.30 mpls ip commit quit tunnel-policy ip_policy tunnel select-seq ip load-balance-number 1 quit pw-template cbu2ptn_atm pw-type atm nto1 vcc peer-address 30.30.30.30 control-word tnl-policy ip_policy quit reset pw template cbu2ptn_atm interface tdm 0/3 port 0 uni system crc enable quit clock source 0 0/0/0 clock priority system 0 pw-ac-binding pvc 0/3/0 vpi 0 vci 35 pw 10 pw-template cbu2ptn_atm udp ingress-dstport 50000 egress-dst-port 50050 save
8.1.6.6 Configuring the ETH PWE3 Mobile Bearer Service on the CBU The CBU ATN930 is connected to the 3G base station through the FE or GE port, and transmits the Ethernet data upstream to the OLT after ETH PWE3 encapsulation. The OLT transparently transmits emulation signals to the MPLS network and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port. In this way, the ETH service is implemented over the GPON network.
Prerequisite Service Requirements l
The ETH mode (the physical port is the GE port) is used for connecting to the 3G base station.
l
GPON is adopted for bearing the mobile AN in a unified manner to meet mobile carriers' requirements for a high bandwidth and for covering high base station density.
l
The PWE3 encapsulation mode is MPLS+MPLS, and the static LSP is adopted.
l
The service is transmitted upstream to the MPLS network or and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port of the OLT.
Figure 8-20 shows an example network of the ETH PWE3 mobile bearer service. The ATN930 is connected to the 3G base station through the FE port and transmits the ETH service upstream to the GPON board of the OLT through GPON after ETH emulation. The OLT transparently transmits the emulation data to the MPLS network and remote PTN network through the Ethernet port, and then the PTN device terminates the emulation data and restores ETH signals. Thus, the 3G mobile bearer service is implemented between the ATN930 and the PTN in the ETH PW mode.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-145
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Figure 8-20 Example network of the ETH PWE3 mobile bearer service on the CBU (MPLSbased)
Background Information The ATN930 supports static and dynamic PWs. You can configure the PW according to the requirements. l
A dynamic PW is created through LDP, and the LSP is generated dynamically. No manual configuration is required.
l
The relevant information about a static PW is manually specified through the CLI, and the parameters are not negotiated through LDP. Therefore, a static LSP can work normally only after the LSRs along the LSP are configured.
Data Plan Table 8-23 provides the data plan for the OLT,Table 8-24 provides the data plan for the ATN930, and Table 8-25 provides the data plan for the remote PTN. Table 8-23 Data plan for configuring the ETH PWE3 mobile bearer service-OLT side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000 SVLAN: smart VLAN 800
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.1/24
GPON service board
Port: 0/3/1 ONU ID: 1 ONU authentication mode: SN ONU SN: 48575443E6D8B541
DBA profile
Profile name: ETM Type: type1 Fixed bandwidth: 100 Mbit/s
8-146
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Item
Data
ONU line profile
Profile ID: 10, bound to the DBA profile named ETH GEM port IDs: 0 and 1 T-CONT ID: 1
ONU management mode
SNMP
Table 8-24 Data plan for configuring the ETH PWE3 mobile bearer service-ATN930 side Item
Data
VLAN
Inband management VLAN: smart VLAN 4000, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN SVLAN: smart VLAN 800, adding GPON upstream port 0/0/0 to this VLAN
IP address
Inband management IP address: 192.168.50.2/24 IP address of the L3 interface of VLAN 500: 10.50.50.50/24 IP address of loopback interface 0: 5.5.5.5/32
MPLS
MPLS LSR ID: 5.5.5.5 Global MPLS: enabled MPLS L2 VPN: enabled Out-label of the ingress node that functions as the static LSP: 8100 In-label of the egress node that functions as the static LSP: 8200
PW
Template name: cbu2olt_eth Template type: ethernet Peer IP address: 30.30.30.30 Control word: supported PW transmit label: 8448 PW receive label: 8449
Tunnel
Tunnel ID: 10 Link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface: MPLSTE Destination IP address: 30.30.30.30 Tunnel signaling protocol: static Policy name: mpls-static
ETH port
Port: 0/4/0 ETH emulation service VLAN:3001 User VLAN:20
Clock source
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
GPON line clock (clock source ID 0)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-147
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Table 8-25 Data plan for configuring the ETH PWE3 mobile bearer service-PTN side Item
Data
IP address
L3 interface IP address of VLAN 800 that functions as LSP1 egress node and LSP2 ingress node: 10.60.60.60/24
MPLS
LSR-ID:30.30.30.30 Tunnel interface ID: 10 Tunnel ID: 10 In-label of the egress node that functions as the static LSP: 8100 Out-label of the ingress node that functions as the static LSP: 8200
Procedure l
Configure the OLT. 1.
Create an SVLAN and add an upstream port to it. Create smart VLAN 800 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. huawei(config)#vlan 800 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 800 0/19 0
2.
Add an ONU on the OLT. The ONU is connected to the GPON port of the OLT through an optical fiber. You can perform the service configuration only after adding an ONU successfully on the OLT. To log in to the ONU through Telnet and configure the ONU from the OLT, you must configure the inband management VLANs and IP addresses of the OLT and the ONU on the OLT. (1) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the OLT. Create management VLAN 4000 and add upstream port 0/19/0 to it. Configure the inband management IP address to 192.168.50.1/24. NOTE
To manage the ONU through SNMP, you must configure the management VLAN, configure the management IP address, and create a management service port. huawei(config)#vlan 4000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 4000 0/19 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 4000 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#ip address 192.168.50.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif4000)#quit
(2) Add a DBA profile. Configure the profile name to ETH, profile type to Type1, Fixed bandwidth to 102400 Mbit/s. huawei(config)#dba-profile add profile-name ETH type1 fix 102400
(3) (Optional) Add an alarm profile.
8-148
–
The ID of the default GPON alarm profile is 1. The thresholds of all the alarm parameters in the default alarm profile are 0, which indicates that no alarm is generated.
–
In this example, the default alarm profile is used, and therefore the configuration of the alarm profile is not required.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide –
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Run the gpon alarm-profile add command to add an alarm profile, which is used for monitoring the performance of an activated ONU line.
(4) Add an ONU line profile. Add GPON MDU line profile 10 and bind T-CONT 1 to the DBA profile named ETH. In this way, the T-CONT can provide flexible DBA solutions based on different configurations in the DBA profile. huawei(config)#ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#tcont 1 dba-profile-name ETH
Add GEM port 0 for transmitting management traffic streams and GEM port 1 for transmitting ETH traffic streams. Bind GEM port 0 and GEM port 1 to TCONT 1. Configure the QoS mode to priority-queue (default) and the queue priority to 6. NOTE
a. To change the QoS mode, run the qos-mode command to configure the QoS mode to gemcar or flow-car, and run the gem add command to configure the ID of the traffic profile bound to the GEM port. b. When the QoS mode is PQ, the default queue priority is 0; when the QoS is flow-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation); when the QoS mode is gem-car, traffic profile 6 is bound to the port by default (no rate limitation). huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priorityqueue 6
Configure the mapping mode from the GEM port to ONU-side service to VLAN (default), map the service port of management VLAN 4000 to GEM port 0, and map the service port of SVLAN 800 to GEM port 1. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#mapping-mode vlan huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#gem mapping 1 1 vlan 800
After the configuration is complete, run the commit command to make the configured parameters take effect. huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#commit huawei(config-gpon-lineprofile-10)#quit
(5) Add an ONU. Connect the ATN930 to GPON port 0/3/1. The ONU ID is 1, the SN is 48575443E6D8B541, the management mode is SNMP, and the bound line profile ID is 10. NOTE
l
You can run the ont add command to add an ONU offline or run the ont confirm command to confirm an automatically discovered ONU.
l
Before running the ont confirm command to confirm the automatically discovered ONU, you must run the port ont-auto-find command in the GPON mode to enable the ONU automatic discovery function.
l
In this example, the method of confirming an automatically discovered ONU is used.
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#port 1 ont-auto-find enable huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display ont autofind 1 -----------------------------------------------------------Number : 1 F/S/P : 0/3/1 Ont SN : 48575443E6D8B541 Password : VenderID : HWTC
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-149
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Ont Version : ATN930V800R307C01B020 Ont SoftwareVersion : V8R307C01 Ont EquipmentID : SmartAX ATN930 Ont autofind time : 2009-09-10 10:20:45 -----------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 NOTE
l
After an ONU is added, it is recommended that you run the display ont info command or the display ont statecommand to query the ONU status. In this step, ensure that Config State and Match State of the ONU are normal and match respectively.
l
If the ONU state in the actual query result is different from the preceding description, run the display ont capability command to query the actual ONU capabilities, and then add a proper ONU profile based on the queried ONU capabilities. Then, add an ONU again.
(6) (Optional) Bind the alarm profile to the ONU. The default profile (profile 1) is used. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1
(7) Configure the inband management VLAN and IP address of the ONU. Configure the static IP address of the ATN930 to 192.168.50.2/24 and the management VLAN ID to 4000 (the same as the management VLAN of the OLT). huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#ont ipconfig 1 1 static ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000
(8) Configure an inband management service port. Configure the management service port ID to 0, management VLAN ID to 4000, GEM port ID to 0, and CVLAN ID to 4000. The rate of the inband service port on the OLT is not limited. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ipcommand to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#quit huawei(config)#service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 NOTE
Now, the ONU is successfully added to the OLT, and the management channel between the OLT and the ONU is available. You can log in to the ATN930 by running the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to configure the ATN930.
3.
Create service ports. Configure the management service port ID to 1, SVLAN ID to 800, GEM port ID to 1, and CVLAN ID to 800. Rate limitation for upstream and downstream packets is performed on the MDU instead of on the OLT. Therefore, use traffic profile 6 (default). To limit the rate of the service port, run the traffic table ip command to add a traffic profile and bind it to the service port. NOTE
The CVLAN must be the same as the upstream VLAN of the ATN930. huawei(config)#service-port 1 vlan 800 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 multi-service user-vlan 800
4. 8-150
Configure queue scheduling. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. The priority of the TDM emulation service is 6, adopting the PQ scheduling. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the ONU. NOTE
Because the management VLAN and the management IP address have been configured, you can run the telnet 192.168.50.2 command on the OLT to log in to the ATN930 to perform the configuration. You can also log in to the ATN930 through a serial port to perform the configuration.
1.
Configure the IP address of the loopback interface. Configure the IP address of loopback interface 0 to 5.5.5.5/32. huawei(config)#interface loopback 0 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#ip address 5.5.5.5 32 huawei(config-if-loopback0)#quit
2.
Configure the MPLS LSR ID and enable the global MPLS and L2 VPN functions. huawei(config)#mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 //Set the local LSR ID to the IP address of loopback interface 0 huawei(config)#mpls //Enable global MPLS huawei(config-mpls)#mpls te //Enable global MPLS TE uawei(config-mpls)#quit huawei(config)#mpls l2vpn //Enable L2 VPN
3.
Enable the MPLS TE function for VLAN interface 800 and configure the IP address of VLAN interface 800. huawei(config)#vlan 800 smart //Upstream VLAN huawei(config)#mpls vlan 800 huawei(config)#port vlan 800 0/0 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 800 huawei(config-if-vlanif800)#ip address 10.50.50.50 24 address of VLAN interface 500 to 10.50.50.50/24 huawei(config-if-vlanif800)#mpls huawei(config-if-vlanif800)#mpls te huawei(config-if-vlanif800)#quit
4.
//Configure the IP
Create a service port for the Ethernet access service. Create an SVLAN for ETH emulation (the services of this SVLAN are terminated by the ETH PW termination device after ETH emulation of the services), and then create a service port and switch the CVLAN ID to the emulation SVLAN ID.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-151
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#vlan 3001 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 3001 eth 0/4/0 multi-service user-vlan 20 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
5.
Create an MPLS tunnel from the ATN930 to the PTN. Configure the tunnel ID to 10 and the link layer encapsulation protocol of the tunnel interface to MPLS. huawei(config)#interface tunnel 10 huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#tunnel-protocol mpls te
Configure the destination IP address of the tunnel to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#destination 30.30.30.30
Configure the MPLS TE tunnel ID to 10. A tunnel ID and an LSR ID uniquely identifies an MPLS TE tunnel. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls te tunnel-id 10
Configure the signaling protocol for creating the MPLS TE tunnel to static. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls te signal-protocol static
Save the configuration and quit the MPLS TE configuration. huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#mpls te commit huawei(config-if-tunnel10)#quit
6.
Configure parameters of the ingress node of the static LSP. Configure the tunnel interface ID to 10, IP address of the egress node of the LSP to 30.30.30.30, next hop IP address (L3 interface IP address of the egress node in the same tunnel) to 10.60.60.60, and out-label to 8100 (which must be the same as the inlabel of the downstream LSR). NOTE
A static MPLS TE tunnel can be used only after it is bound to a static LSP. huawei(config)#static-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 10 destination 30.30.30.30 nexthop 10.60.60.60 out-label 8100
7.
Configure parameters of the egress node of the static LSP. Configure the name of the static LSP to ptn2atn930, bind the static LSP to VLAN interface 800 of the ingress node (The VLAN interface IP address is the next hop IP address of the ingress node. The communication between LSRs is available only when the ingress node and the egress node are added to the same MPLS VLAN), and configure the in-label to 8200 (which must be the same as the out-label of the upstream LSR). huawei(config)#static-lsp egress ptn2atn930 incoming-interface vlanif 800 in-lable 8200
8.
Configure the tunnel policy. Configure the policy name to mpls-static, bind the policy to tunnel 10, and configure the destination IP address of the tunnel to 30.30.30.30. NOTE
The destination IP address should be consistent with that configured in the MPLS TE tunnel. huawei(config)#tunnel-policy mpls-static Info: New tunnel-policy is configured. huawei(config-tunnel-policy-mpls-static)#tunnel binding destination
8-152
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
30.30.30.30 te tunnel 10 huawei(config-tunnel-policy-mpls-static)#quit
9.
Create a PW profile and configure its attributes. (1) Configure the PW name and type. Configure the PW name to cbu2ptn_eth, and type to nto1. huawei(config)#pw-template cbu2ptn_eth huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_eth)#pw-type ethernet tagged
(2) Configure the loopback interface IP address of the remote PTN device in the PW profile. Configure the loopback interface IP address to 30.30.30.30. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_eth)#peer-address 30.30.30.30
(3) Configure the PW template to or not to support the control word. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_eth)#control-word
(4) Configure the tunnel policy used by the PW template. Configure the tunnel policy name to mpls-static. huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_eth)#tnl-policy mpls-static huawei(config-pw-template-cbu2ptn_eth)#quit
(5) Reset the PW template.
CAUTION After modifying the attributes of a PW template, you must reset the PW. After that, the modified attributes take effect. After a PW is reset, the protocol starts negotiation again. In this case, the services are interrupted. Therefore, exercise caution when you run this command. huawei(config)#reset pw template cbu2ptn_eth Info: In operation, please wait...OK!
10. Configure the system clock source. The system input/output clock source of ATN930 can be obtained from the GPON line clock. If the configuration is not performed, the ATN930 adopts the local oscillator as the system clock or output clock source. huawei(config)#clock source 0 0/0/0 huawei(config)#clock priority system 0 NOTE
After the configuration is completed, you can run the display clock source command to confirm that the configured system clock source is in the normal state.
11. Bind the ETH to the PW. The static LSP encapsulation mode is adopted. Such a PW does not use the LDP signaling protocol for parameter negotiation. You can manually specify the related information by running the related command. The data of a static PW is transmitted between the provider edges (PEs) through tunnels. Configure the VLAN ID to 10, PW ID to 10, PW template cbu2ptn_eth, type to MPLS, transmit label to 8448, and receive label to 8449. huawei(config)#pw-ac-binding vlan 3001 pw 10 pw-template cbu2ptn_eth static transmit-label 8848 receive-label 8849
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-153
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
NOTE
When you configure a static TDM PW, the PW transmit-label and receive-label configured on the ATN930 must be the same as the PW transmit-label and receive-label configured on the peer PE (the PTN in this example).
12. Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result On the ATN930, you can run the display pw-ac-binding command to confirm that the PW is in the up (normal) state. huawei(config)#display pw-ac-binding vlan 3001 { |secondary }: Command: display pw-ac-binding vlan 3001 Total : 1 (Up/Down : 1/0 Static/LDP : 1/0) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------VLAN PW PW PROTO RECEIVE TRNS TEMPLATE ID ID STATE TYPE LABEL LABEL NAME ---------------------------------------------------------------------------3001 10 up static 8849 8848 cbu2ptn_eth ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Note : F--Frame, S--Slot, P--Port *: Secondary
Configuration File Configure the OLT. vlan 800 smart port vlan 800 0/9 0 vlan 4000 smart port vlan 4000 0/9 0 interface vlanif 4000 ip address 192.168.50.1 24 quit dba-profile add profile-name ETH type1 fix 102400 ont-lineprofile gpon profile-id 10 tcont 1 dba-profile-name ETH gem add 0 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 gem add 1 eth tcont 1 priority-queue 6 mapping-mode vlan gem mapping 0 0 vlan 4000 gem mapping 1 1 vlan 800 commit quit interface gpon 0/3 port 1 ont-auto-find enable display ont autofind 1 ont confirm 1 ontid 1 sn-auth 48575443E6D8B541 snmp ont-lineprofile-id 10 desc ATN930_0/3/1/1_lineprofile10 ont alarm-profile 1 1 profile-id 1 ont ipconfig static 1 1 ip-address 192.168.50.2 mask 255.255.255.0 vlan 4000 gateway 192.168.50.1 quit service-port 0 vlan 4000 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 0 multi-service user-vlan 4000 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6 service-port 1 vlan 800 gpon 0/3/1 ont 1 gemport 1 multi-service user-vlan 800 rxcttr 6 tx-cttr 6 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
8-154
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Configure the ATN930. interface loopback 0 ip address 5.5.5.5 32 quit mpls lsr-id 5.5.5.5 mpls mpls te quit mpls l2vpn vlan 800 smart mpls vlan 800 port vlan 800 0/0 0 interface vlanif 800 ip address 10.50.50.50 24 mpls mpls te quit vlan 3001 service-port vlan 3001 eth 0/4/0 multi-service user-vlan 20 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 interface tunnel 10 tunnel-protocol mpls te destination 30.30.30.30 mpls te tunnel-id 10 mpls te signal-protocol static mpls te commit quit static-lsp ingress tunnel-interface tunnel 10 destination 30.30.30.30 nexthop 10.60.60.60 out-label 8100 static-lsp egress ptn2atn930 incoming-interface vlanif 800 in-label 8200 tunnel-policy mpls-static tunnel binding destination 30.30.30.30 te tunnel 10 quit pw-template cbu2ptn_eth pw-type ethernet tagged peer-address 30.30.30.30 control-word tnl-policy mpls-static quit reset pw template cbu2ptn_eth clock source 0 0/0/0 clock priority system 0 pw-ac-binding vlan 3001 pw 10 pw-template cbu2ptn_eth static transmit-label 8848 receive-label 8849 save
8.2 Configuring the P2P Optical Fiber Access Service This topic describes the P2P optical fiber access technology and how to configure the P2P optical fiber access service on the OLT. 8.2.1 Configuring the FTTH P2P Optical Fiber Access Service (Single-Port for Single Service) The user is connected to the OLT through a modem, and the OLT provides the user with the Internet access service through FTTH. 8.2.2 Configuring the FTTH P2P Optical Fiber Access Service (Single-Port for Multiple Services) Users connected to the OLT through an Modem, and are thus provided with the Internet, VoIP, and IPTV service through a same port.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-155
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8.2.1 Configuring the FTTH P2P Optical Fiber Access Service (Single-Port for Single Service) The user is connected to the OLT through a modem, and the OLT provides the user with the Internet access service through FTTH.
Service Requirements l
The user accesses the Internet in the PPPoE dialing mode.
l
The user bandwidth is 100 Mbit/s.
l
The Modem is connected to the OPFA board of the OLT through the optical fiber.
l
The BRAS provides the AAA function.
Figure 8-21 Example network of the optical fiber access service in the single-port for single service mode
Prerequisite l
The OLT is connected to the BRAS.
l
Related configurations are performed on the BRAS according to the authentication and accounting requirements for dialup users. For details about the configuration, see the corresponding configuration guide.
l
The VLAN of the LAN switch port connected to the OLT is the same as the upstream VLAN of the OLT.
Procedure Step 1 Create a VLAN and add an upstream port to the VLAN. The VLAN ID is 100, and the VLAN is a smart VLAN. The upstream port is 0/19/0. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0
Step 2 Configure a traffic profile. The profile ID is 10, the CIR is 100 Mbit/s, and packets are scheduled according to the priority carried. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 10 cir 102400 priority 5 priority-policy tagIn-Package
8-156
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Step 3 Configure a service port. Add a service port to the VLAN and use traffic profile 10. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 eth 0/5/1 rx-cttr 10 tx-cttr 10
Step 4 Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result Connect the modem to the PC, perform the PPPoE dialing on the PC. After the dialing is successful, the user can access the Internet.
Configuration File vlan 100 smart port vlan 100 0/19 0 traffic table ip index 10 cir 102400 priority 5 priority-policy tag-In-Package service-port vlan 100 eth 0/5/1 rx-cttr 10 tx-cttr 10 save
8.2.2 Configuring the FTTH P2P Optical Fiber Access Service (Single-Port for Multiple Services) Users connected to the OLT through an Modem, and are thus provided with the Internet, VoIP, and IPTV service through a same port.
Service Requirements l
Modem_1 and Modem_2 are provided with the triple play service through FTTH.
l
The Internet access service is provided in the PPPoE access mode.
l
The IPTV user connected to Modem_1 can watch all the programs, and the IPTV user connected to Modem_2 can watch only program BTV-1.
l
The VoIP service and the IPTV service are provided in the DHCP mode and obtain IP addresses from the DHCP server in the DHCP standard mode.
l
After receiving different traffic streams, the OLT provides different QoS guarantees to the traffic streams according to the priorities of the traffic streams.
l
Traffic streams are differentiated on the OLT by the user-side VLAN (C-VLAN).
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-157
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Figure 8-22 Example network of the optical fiber access service in the single-port for multiple services mode
Table 8-26 Data plan for configuring the VLANs Item
Data
Upstream VLAN
Internet access service: smart VLAN 100 VoIP service: smart VLAN 200 IPTV service: smart VLAN 1000
User-side VLAN
Internet access service: VLAN 2 VoIP service: VLAN 3 IPTV service: VLAN 4
Prerequisite l
The OLT is connected to the upper-layer devices such as the BRAS, multicast server, SoftX3000, and DHCP server.
l
The VLAN of the LAN switch port connected to the OLT is the same as the upstream VLAN of the OLT.
l
Configure the Internet access service.
Procedure
8-158
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
1.
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
Create a VLAN and add an upstream port to the VLAN. The VLAN ID is 100, and the VLAN is a smart VLAN. The upstream port is0/19/0. huawei(config)#vlan 100 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 100 0/19 0
2.
Configure a traffic profile. Because the VoIP, IPTV, and Internet access services are provided through the same port, you must set the 802.1p priority of each service. Generally, the priorities are in a descending order for the VoIP service, IPTV service, and Internet access service. In this example, set the traffic profile index to 7 and the priority of the Internet access service to 1. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 7 cir 10240 priority 1 prioritypolicy local-Setting
3.
Configure a service port. Add a service port to the VLAN and use traffic profile 7. The user-side VLAN ID is 2. huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 eth 0/5/2 multi-service user-vlan 2 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 100 eth 0/5/3 multi-service user-vlan 2 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
4.
Configure queue scheduling. Use the 3PQ+5WRR queue scheduling. Queues 0-4 adopt the WRR mode, with the weights of 10, 10, 20, 20, and 40 respectively; queues 5-7 adopt the PQ mode. NOTE
Queue scheduling is a global configuration. You need to configure queue scheduling only once on the OLT, and then the configuration takes effect globally. In the subsequent phases, you need not configure queue scheduling repeatedly when configuring other services. huawei(config)#queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0
Configure the mapping between queues and 802.1p priorities. Priorities 0-7 map queues 0-7 respectively. huawei(config)#cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 NOTE
For the service board that supports only four queues, the mapping between 802.1p priorities and queue IDs is as follows: priorities 0 and 1 map queue 1; priorities 2 and 3 map queue 2; priorities 4 and 5 map queue 3; priorities 6 and 7 map queue 4.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the VoIP service. 1.
Create a VLAN and add an upstream port to the VLAN. The VLAN ID is 200, and the VLAN is a smart VLAN. The upstream port is0/19/0. huawei(config)#vlan 200 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 200 0/19 0
2.
Configure a traffic profile. The traffic profile index is 8, and the 802.1p priority of the VoIP service is 6. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 8 cir 10240 priority 6 prioritypolicy local-Setting
3.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Configure a service port. Add a service port to the VLAN and use traffic profile 8. The user-side VLAN ID is 3. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-159
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 200 eth 0/5/2 multi-service user-vlan 3 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 200 eth 0/5/3 multi-service user-vlan 3 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
4.
Configure the DHCP relay. The VoIP service and the IPTV service are provided in the DHCP mode. The DHCP option 60 domain is used to differentiate service types. –
The DHCP domain of the VoIP service is voice.
–
The IP addresses of VoIP DHCP server group 1 are 20.1.1.2 and 20.1.1.3.
–
The IP address of the L3 interface of VLAN 200 is 10.1.1.1/24.
huawei(config)#dhcp mode layer-3 option-60 huawei(config)#dhcp-server 1 ip 20.1.1.2 20.1.1.3 huawei(config)#dhcp domain voice huawei(config-dhcp-domain-voice)#dhcp-server 1 huawei(config-dhcp-domain-voice)#quit huawei(config)#interface vlanif 200 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#ip address 10.1.1.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#dhcp domain voice gateway 10.1.1.1 huawei(config-if-vlanif200)#quit NOTE
The DHCP option 60 domain of the Ethernet phone (Ephone) varies with the terminal type. In the actual configuration, see the operation instructions of the Ephone.
5.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
l
Configure the IPTV service. 1.
Create a VLAN and add an upstream port to the VLAN. The VLAN ID is 1000, and the VLAN is a smart VLAN. The upstream port is0/19/0. huawei(config)#vlan 1000 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 1000 0/19 0
2.
Configure a traffic profile. The traffic profile index is 9, and the 802.1p priority of the IPTV service is 5. huawei(config)#traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 5 priority-policy local-Setting
3.
Configure a service port. Add a service port to the VLAN and use traffic profile 9. The user-side VLAN ID is 4. huawei(config)#service-port 200 vlan 1000 eth 0/5/2 multi-service uservlan 4 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9 huawei(config)#service-port 300 vlan 1000 eth 0/5/3 multi-service uservlan 4 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9
4.
Configure the DHCP relay. The VoIP service and the IPTV service are provided in the DHCP mode. The DHCP option 60 domain is used to differentiate service types. –
The DHCP domain of the IPTV service is video.
–
The IP addresses of IPTV DHCP server group 2 are 20.2.2.2 and 20.2.2.3.
–
The IP address of the L3 interface of VLAN 1000 is 10.2.2.1/24.
huawei(config)#dhcp mode layer-3 option-60 huawei(config)#dhcp-server 2 ip 20.2.2.2 20.2.2.3 huawei(config)#dhcp domain video huawei(config-dhcp-domain-video)#dhcp-server 2 huawei(config-dhcp-domain-voice)#quit
8-160
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1000 huawei(config-if-vlanif1000)#ip address 10.2.2.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif1000)#dhcp domain video gateway 10.2.2.1 NOTE
The DHCP option 60 domain of the set-top box (STB) varies with the terminal type. In the actual configuration, see the operation instructions of the STB.
5.
Configure the multicast data. –
The multicast VLAN ID is 1000.
–
The IGMP mode is proxy.
–
The multicast upstream port is 0/19/0.
–
The multicast address of program BTV-1 is 224.1.1.10, and the program source IP address is 10.10.10.10.
–
The multicast address of program BTV-2 is 224.1.1.20, and the program source IP address is 10.10.10.10.
–
Right profile 0 allows users to watch program BTV-1 in the program library.
–
The user on port 0/5/3 is bound to right profile 0.
huawei(config-if-vlanif1000)#quit huawei(config)#multicast-vlan 1000 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp mode proxy Are you sure to change IGMP mode?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp uplink-port 0/19/0 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp program add name BTV-1 ip 224.1.1.10 sourceip 10.10.10.10 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp program add name BTV-2 ip 224.1.1.20 sourceip 10.10.10.10 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port-mode default Are you sure to change the uplink port mode?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile add profile-name profile0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name BTV-1 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp policy service-port 200 normal huawei(config-btv)#igmp policy service-port 300 normal huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add service-port 200 no-auth max-program 8 huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add service-port 300 auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile port service-port 200 profilename profile0 huawei(config-btv)#multicast-vlan 1000 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 200 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 300 huawei(config-mvlan1000)#quit
6.
Save the data. huawei(config)#save
----End
Result After the related upstream device and downstream device are configured, the triple play service (Internet, VoIP, and IPTV services) is available. l
The Internet user can access the Internet in the PPPoE mode.
l
The VoIP user can make and receive phone calls.
l
The IPTV user connected to port 0/5/2 can watch all the programs, and the IPTV user connected to port 0/5/3 can watch only program BTV-1.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-161
8 FTTx Solution Configuration Guide-CLI
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
Configuration File Internet service: vlan 100 smart port vlan 100 0/19 0 traffic table ip index 7 cir 10240 priority 1 priority-policy local-Setting service-port vlan 100 eth 0/5/2 multi-service user-vlan 2 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 service-port vlan 100 eth 0/5/3 multi-service user-vlan 2 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 queue-scheduler wrr 10 10 20 20 40 0 0 0 cos-queue-map cos0 0 cos1 1 cos2 2 cos3 3 cos4 4 cos5 5 cos6 6 cos7 7 save
VoIP service: vlan 200 smart port vlan 200 0/19 0 traffic table ip index 8 cir 10240 priority 6 priority-policy local-Setting service-port vlan 200 eth 0/5/2 multi-service user-vlan 3 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 service-port vlan 200 eth 0/5/3 multi-service user-vlan 3 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 dhcp mode layer-3 option-60 dhcp-server 1 ip 20.1.1.2 20.1.1.3 dhcp domain voice dhcp-server 1 quit interface vlanif 200 ip address 10.1.1.1 24 dhcp domain voice gateway 10.1.1.1 quit save
IPTV service: vlan 1000 smart port vlan 1000 0/19 0 traffic table ip index 9 cir off priority 5 priority-policy local-Setting service-port 200 vlan 1000 eth 0/5/2 multi-service user-vlan 4 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9 service-port 300 vlan 1000 eth 0/5/3 multi-service user-vlan 4 rx-cttr 9 tx-cttr 9 dhcp mode layer-3 option-60 dhcp-server 2 ip 20.2.2.2 20.2.2.3 dhcp domain video dhcp-server 2 quit interface vlanif 1000 ip address 10.2.2.1 24 dhcp domain video gateway 10.2.2.1 quit multicast-vlan 1000 igmp mode proxy y igmp uplink-port igmp program add name BTV-1 ip 224.1.1.10 sourceip 10.10.10.10 igmp program add name BTV-2 ip 224.1.1.20 sourceip 10.10.10.10 btv igmp uplink-port-mode default y igmp profile add profile-name profile0 igmp profile profile-name profile0 program-name BTV-1 watch igmp policy service-port 200 normal igmp policy service-port 300 normal igmp user add service-port 200 no-auth max-program 8 igmp user add service-port 300 auth igmp user bind-profile port service-port 200 profile-name profile0 multicast-vlan 1000 igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 200 igmp multicast-vlan member service-port 300 quit save
8-162
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
9 Script Making
9
Script Making
Before the commissioning, you can collect the information such as the data plan according to 1.2.4 Planning Data to make a commissioning script. Then, configure the basic data of the device by loading the script. This ensures that the device works in the normal state, which facilitates the commissioning of the basic functions and services of the device.
Script Overview The basic configuration through the script includes but is not limited to the following items: l
Adding the power board
l
Configuring the environment monitoring unit (including the FAN and the ESC)
l
Configuring the route protocol NOTE
For details about how to load the script, see 1.3.7 Loading the Script.
Example Script Table 9-1 lists the data plan of an example script. After the example script is configured, you can log in to the MA5600T through the maintenance terminal in the management center to commission the basic functions of the device. Table 9-1 Script data plan Item
Data
PRTE power board
Slot IDs: 0/21 and 0/22
FAN
l
SN: 0
l
Sub-node ID: 1 (default)
l
Name: FAN
l
Fan speed adjustment mode: automatic
l
SN: 1
l
Sub-node ID: 15 (default)
l
Name: H801ESC
ESC
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-1
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
9 Script Making
Item
Data
Route protocol
l
Upstream port: 0/19/0
l
Management VLAN ID: 100; type: Standard VLAN
l
IP address of the L3 interface of the management VLAN: 10.50.1.10/24
l
Gateway address: 10.50.1.1/24
l
IP address of the target network segment: 10.10.1.10/24
The following displays the commands that need to be included in the script according to the preceding data plan.
CAUTION Each command in the script must end with a carriage return (CR). enable config board add 0/21 H801PRTE board add 0/22 H801PRTE emu add 0 FAN 0 1 FAN interface emu 0 fan speed mode automatic quit emu add 1 H801ESC 0 15 H801ESC vlan 100 standard port vlan 100 0/19 0 interface vlanif 100 ip address 10.50.1.10 24 quit ip route-static 10.10.1.0 24 10.50.1.1 save
9-2
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
10
10 Configuring the File Transfer Mode
Configuring the File Transfer Mode
About This Chapter This topic describes how to configure various file transfer modes, such as Xmodem and TFTP. 10.1 Configuring the FTP Transfer Mode This topic describes how to configure the FTP transfer mode for transferring (uploading or downloading) files through the inband or outband Ethernet port of the MA5600T. After the configuration, the FTP server and the MA5600T can communicate to transfer files in the FTP mode. 10.2 Configuring the SFTP Transfer Mode This topic describes how to configure the SFTP transfer mode for transferring (uploading or downloading) files through the inband or outband Ethernet port of the MA5600T. After the configuration, the SFTP server and the MA5600T can communicate to transfer files in the SFTP mode. 10.3 Configuring the Xmodem Transfer Mode This topic describes how to configure the Xmodem transfer mode for transferring (uploading or downloading) files through the maintenance serial port of the MA5600T. After the configuration, the console and the MA5600T can communicate to transfer files in the Xmodem mode. 10.4 Configuring the TFTP Transfer Mode This topic describes how to configure the TFTP transfer mode for transferring (uploading or downloading) files through the inband or outband Ethernet port of the MA5600T. After the configuration, the TFTP server and the MA5600T can communicate to transfer files in the TFTP mode.
Issue 01 (2009-12-01)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10-1
10 Configuring the File Transfer Mode
SmartAX MA5600T Multi-service Access Module Commissioning and Configuration Guide
10.1 Configuring the FTP Transfer Mode This topic describes how to configure the FTP transfer mode for transferring (uploading or downloading) files through the inband or outband Ethernet port of the MA5600T. After the configuration, the FTP server and the MA5600T can communicate to transfer files in the FTP mode.
Prerequisite l
l
The Ethernet port of the FTP server is directly connected to the inband or outband Ethernet port of the MA5600T. –
Connect to the inband Ethernet port (Maintenance port) through the crossover cable.
–
Connect to the outband Ethernet port (Upstream port) through the direct cable.
You have logged in to the MA5600T through Telnet from the console (maintenance terminal), and have entered the global config mode.
Tools, Meters, and Materials l
Crossover cable
l
Direct cable
Impact on System None
Precautions Make sure that the crossover cable is used to directly connect the FTP server to the MA5600T. In other cases, a straight through cable is used.
Procedure Step 1 On the FTP server, configure the IP address of its Ethernet port. Configure the Ethernet port IP address of the FTP server according to the IP address planning in the specific networking, and ensure that the Ethernet port of the FTP server and the inband or outband Ethernet port of the MA5600T can ping each other. For example, if the Ethernet port of the FTP server is directly connected to the MA5600T, the IP address of this Ethernet port and the IP address of the inband or outband Ethernet port of the MA5600T must be in the same subnet. Step 2 On the FTP server, run the FTP application and set related parameters. After running the FTP application, set the path for saving the file, FTP user name, and password. Step 3 (This is step is used for setting the FTP user attributes for the manual file transfer.) On the MA5600T, run the ftp set command to set the FTP user name and password. huawei(config)#ftp set User Name(
